request for proposal replace chiller system · 2018-10-22 · request for proposal replace chiller...
TRANSCRIPT
REQUESTFORPROPOSALReplaceChillerSystem
IssuedOctober22,2018
Responsesdueviaemail
by4:30pmCTonNovember19,2018
2
TableofContentsI. Introduction...........................................................................................................................................................3
II. DescriptionofSURS..............................................................................................................................................3
III. ServicesRequired................................................................................................................................................4
IV. MinimumQualifications.....................................................................................................................................4
V. ProposalContent..................................................................................................................................................5
Cover Letter .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Statement of Minimum Qualifications ................................................................................................................. 5
Reference Checks .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Questionnaire ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
Fee Proposal ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Contract ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
Project Schedule ................................................................................................................................................... 6
VI. SubmissionofProposals....................................................................................................................................6
VII. EvaluationProcess...............................................................................................................................................6
Pre‐Evaluation Review .......................................................................................................................................... 6
Proposal Evaluation .............................................................................................................................................. 6
VIII. AnticipatedTimelineandContactInformation..........................................................................................7
IX. SubmissionProcess..............................................................................................................................................7
Deadline ................................................................................................................................................................ 7
Withdrawal ........................................................................................................................................................... 8
Questions .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
X. GeneralConditions..............................................................................................................................................8
Freedom of Information Act Disclosure................................................................................................................ 8
Redacted Version of RFP Response ...................................................................................................................... 8
Ordinary Course of Business Communications Allowed ....................................................................................... 9
SURS Quiet Period Policy ...................................................................................................................................... 9
Rights Reserved .................................................................................................................................................... 9
Equal Opportunity .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Terms and Conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 10
AppendixA:StatementofMinimumQualifications.........................................................................................10
AppendixB: Questionnaire......................................................................................................................................11
3
Contact and Company Information: .................................................................................................................... 11
Organization Background: ................................................................................................................................... 11
AppendixC:Proposal.................................................................................................................................................13
AppendixD: AddendumtoContract.....................................................................................................................15
AppendixE:SURSStandardContract....................................................................................................................17
AppendixF:ProjectScopeofWork........................................................................................................................46
AppendixG:ReplaceChillerProjectPlan/SystemSpecifications..............................................................51
AppendixH:ReplaceChillerSystemDrawings..................................................................................................233
I. Introduction
The State Universities Retirement System (“SURS” or the “System”) is requesting a fixed‐price proposal for
Installation of a new Chiller Unit. This includes removal of equipment that is no longer functioning, all
necessary specifications/drawings, equipment sourcing and purchase, installation, testing and commissioning
of new Chiller at our main office located at 1901 Fox Drive, Champaign, IL. This project is being managed by
Midwest Engineering Associates, Inc. 140 East Washington Street, East Peoria, IL 61611.
All forms/required documents needed for submitting a Request for Proposal (“RFP”) are available on the SURS
website at www.surs.org.
A proposer’s preparation and submittal of a proposal or subsequent participation in presentations or contract
negotiations creates no obligation on the System to award a contract or to pay any associated costs. All
proposals and related materials will be retained by the System and will be subject to disclosure as required in
accordance with the Illinois Freedom of Information Act.
II. DescriptionofSURS
SURS is the administrator of a cost‐sharing, multiple employer, public employee retirement system that
provides retirement, survivor, disability and death benefits to employees of Illinois state universities,
community colleges, and certain other affiliated organizations and agencies. SURS was created in 1941, by an
act of the Illinois General Assembly, and is governed by the Illinois Pension Code (40 ILCS 5/15‐101 et seq.).
SURS provides benefit services to over 230,000 members who work for 61 employers. SURS is responsible for
investing assets of more than $19 billion in a diversified portfolio of U.S. and foreign stocks, bonds, real estate
and alternative investments. SURS also administers a defined contribution plan, the Self‐Managed Plan, which
currently has assets of approximately $2.2 billion. Northern Trust serves as SURS’ Master Trustee Custodian.
An elected and appointed, eleven‐person, Board of Trustees, governs SURS. The chairperson of the Board of
Trustees is, by statute, the chairperson of the Illinois Board of Higher Education. Five members of the Board are
appointed by the governor of the state of Illinois. The remaining six members of the Board are elected by
participating members (four individuals) and annuitants (two individuals). Our trustees serve six‐year terms.
SURS is funded by participant payroll deductions and annual employer contributions provided by the state of
Illinois. By statute, SURS is defined as a “body politic and corporate” created by Article 15 of the Illinois Pension
Code.
4
SURS currently employs approximately 132 staff, located in 2 offices in Champaign and Naperville, Illinois. Two
SURS employees are in the Naperville office. The remaining SURS employees are situated in the Champaign
office.
A copy of SURS’ most recent Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CAFR) is available for review, or to
download, at www.surs.org.
The Illinois Governmental Ethics Act, 40 ILCS 420, provides guidelines for ethical practices concerning state and
local pension plans. Respondent providers should be familiar with the provisions of this Act.
Section 1‐109.1(6) of the Illinois Pension Code (40 ILCS 5/1‐109.1(6)) encourages Illinois public pension systems
like SURS to utilize businesses owned by “minorities”, “women”, and “persons with disabilities” for all
contracts and services, as those terms are defined in the Business Enterprise for Minorities, Women, and
Persons with Disabilities Act (“BEMWPD”,30 ILCS 575). Additionally, Section 1‐109.1(10) of the Illinois Pension
Code (40 ILCS 5/1‐109.1(10)) sets an aspirational goal of not less than 20% of contracts awarded to such
businesses for "information technology services", "accounting services", "insurance brokers", "architectural
and engineering services", and "legal services" as defined by the BEMWPD. Accordingly, businesses that meet
these definitions are strongly encouraged to submit responses to this RFP.
A section of the Illinois Procurement Code concerning prohibitions of political contributions for vendors, 30
ILCS 500/50‐37, may or may not apply to SURS service providers. However, each service provider should be
familiar with the provisions of this section and comply with this section if the service provider deems it
appropriate.
Further legal requirements that vendors should be familiar with are contained in the Addendum to Contract
under Appendix D.
Background specific to this RFP:
In June 2013 SURS installed a new Cooling system including a SMARDT Chiller. This system provides cooling for
the facility located at 1901 Fox Drive. The system is no longer functioning and cooling for the facility is being
provided by a temporary/portable system. Note: this Chiller does not service the climate‐controlled network
data center.
III. ServicesRequired
SURS is soliciting responses from qualified contractors for the following services: Review all
design/specification documents as provided by engineering/design Project Manager. Research, select, order,
install and commission new Chiller system after removing and disposing of old chiller and appurtenances. The
new chiller needs to be installed and operational as soon as possible, while weather conditions are still
permissible. A complete Statement of Work can be found in Appendix F.
IV. MinimumQualifications
The responder’s key professionals and/or organization must not have material conflicts with the SURS
Board.
Contractors must have appropriate accreditations and proven experience, be in business for at least 5
years, an EMR safety rating of .8 or less, and employees with proper certifications who are
compensated at the prevailing wages.
5
V. ProposalContent
At a minimum, the proposal must include the following information to be considered for the engagement. For
ease of review, each requirement should be addressed separately.
CoverLetterA cover letter, which will be considered an integral part of the proposal package, in the form of a standard
business letter, must be signed by an individual authorized to bind the proposer contractually. This cover
letter must indicate the signer is so authorized and must indicate the signer’s title or position. An unsigned
proposal will be rejected. The cover letter must also include:
a. A statement that the proposal meets all requirements of this RFP, and that the offer
tendered by the proposal will remain in full force and effect until and may be accepted by
SURS at any time prior to 30 days beyond the deadline for submittal.
b. A disclosure of any current business relationship or any current negotiations for prospective business with SURS, or with any member of the Board of Trustees or SURS staff, or any party currently rendering services to SURS.
c. A statement that the proposer acknowledges that all documents submitted in response to this RFP may be subject to disclosure under the Illinois Freedom of Information Act and/or the Illinois Open Meetings Act.
d. A statement that upon completion the Chiller will meet and comply with all required codes and regulations
StatementofMinimumQualificationsProposers must complete and return the Minimum Qualifications Certification in the form contained in
Appendix A.
ReferenceChecksReference checks will be conducted for each finalist.
QuestionnaireThe questionnaire contained in Appendix B to this RFP must be completed and returned as part of the proposal
FeeProposalProposers must submit a fixed‐cost proposal in the format prescribed in Appendix C. Any deviation from the
prescribed format which in the opinion of SURS is material and may result in the rejection of the proposal. The
proposed fee shall include all costs and expenses for providing the services and equipment as described in this
RFP, and any agreed‐upon extended warranties that are associated with initial installation. Once finalists are
selected, fees may be subject to a “best and final” offer process to be determined at the discretion of the
System.
The fee proposal must expressly state that the proposed fees are guaranteed for the term of any resulting
contract.
ContractThis Request for Proposal is neither a contract nor meant to serve as a contract. It is anticipated that one or
more of the proposals submitted in response to this Request for Proposal may be selected as the basis for
negotiation of a contract with the proposer. Such a contract is presently contemplated to contain, at a
minimum, the terms of the proposal submitted, as finally negotiated and approved by the System. SURS
reserves the right to negotiate additions, deletions, or modifications to the terms of proposals submitted.
6
However, the terms contained in Appendix D, Addendum to Contract, must be agreed to and accepted by the
candidate or organization selected to perform the work contemplated by this RFP. A copy of our standard
contract can be found in Appendix E.
ProjectScheduleThe submission must include a preliminary project schedule based on the number of calendar days required to
perform the work following the award of the contract.
VI. SubmissionofProposals
All proposals must be received no later than the deadline stated in the Anticipated Timeline and Contact
Information section. Submissions must be made via email to the identified contact person by the stated
deadline. Only email submissions will be accepted.
The proposals become the property of SURS upon submission. All costs for developing proposals and attending
presentations and/or interviews are entirely the responsibility of the proposer and shall not be chargeable to
SURS.
Only one proposal from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof, will be
considered for this assignment.
VII. EvaluationProcess
Pre‐EvaluationReviewAll proposals will be reviewed to determine if they contain all the required submittals specified in this RFP.
Those not submitting all required information in the prescribed format will be rejected.
ProposalEvaluationAll proposals received by the SURS representative on or before the deadline listed above will be reviewed to
determine whether they meet the minimum requirements of this RFP.
All proposals received by deadline and pass the pre‐evaluation review will undergo an evaluation process
conducted by SURS staff. They will be reviewed to determine whether they meet the requirements of this RFP.
SURS will consider the following factors in the evaluation process, ranked in no specific order, and will render a
decision based on the perceived best fit and best value for the engagement. Fees will be one of the
determining factors in this decision but will not be the primary determinative. Proposals will be evaluated
based on criteria including:
• Understanding of the services requested
• Timeline for recommended solution to be implemented
• Proposed methodology and work plan to be used in the process
• Proposed deliverables
• Relevant knowledge, experience and qualification of firm and team members including established record of success in similar work
• Commitment to diversity
• Willingness to negotiate contract terms
• Independence
• Cost
• Warranty
7
• References
Proposals that contain false or misleading statements or that provide references which do not support an
attribute or condition claimed by the proposer will be rejected. Issuance of the Request for Proposal creates no
obligation to award a contract or to pay any costs incurred in the preparation of a proposal. Nothing in this
RFP or any resulting contract shall preclude SURS from procuring services similar to those described herein
from other sources.
During the evaluation process, proposers may be requested to provide additional information and/or clarify
contents of their proposal. Other than information requested by SURS, no proposer will be allowed to alter the
proposal or add new information after the filing date.
Once finalists are selected, fees may be subject to a “best and final” offer process to be determined at the
discretion of the System.
VIII. AnticipatedTimelineandContactInformation
Schedule Dates
Quiet Period Begins October 22, 2018
RFP Issued October 22, 2018
Pre‐Bid Meeting, 10 a.m. November 6, 2018
Deadline for Responder Questions November 9, 2018
Response to Questions November 13, 2018
RFP Responses due 4:30 p.m. CT November 19, 2018
Evaluations November 20‐22, 2018
Candidate Interviews November 26‐28, 2018
Selection November 30, 2018
SURS RFP Contact Information Procurement Officer [email protected] SURS 1901 Fox Drive Champaign, IL 61825‐2710
IX. SubmissionProcess
DeadlineTo be considered for selection, proposals must be received via e‐mail in Adobe Acrobat format at
[email protected] no later than 4:30 p.m. CT, November 19, 2018. Please reference the “Chiller
8
Installation RFP Response ‐ Name of Responder” in your communications. An email confirmation will be sent
confirming receipt of the proposal.
WithdrawalA proposal may be withdrawn any time prior to the deadline by written notification signed by the individual
applicant or authorized agent of the firm and received at [email protected] no later than the
deadline of 4:30 p.m. CT, November 19, 2018. Please reference the “Chiller Installation RFP Response ‐ Name
of Responder” in your communications. An email confirmation will be sent confirming withdrawal of the
proposal. The proposal may be resubmitted with any modifications no later than the deadline. Modifications
offered in any other manner will not be considered.
QuestionsTo clarify any issues in this Request for Proposal, SURS will respond only to questions that are presented in
writing via e‐mail to [email protected]. All questions should be submitted to SURS by 4:30 p.m.
CT, November 9, 2018. Please reference the “Chiller Installation RFP Response ‐ Name of Responder” in your
communications. These questions will be consolidated into a single Q&A document and responded to by SURS
on, or about, November 13, 2018. The Q&A document will be posted on the SURS web site at
www.surs.org/rfp without indicating the source of the query.
X. GeneralConditions
FreedomofInformationActDisclosure
All materials submitted in response to the RFP become property of SURS. Proposals remain confidential during
the selection process. However, upon completion of the selection process, all responses, including that of the
individual, vendor or firm selected, will be a matter of public information and will be open to public inspection
in accordance with the state of Illinois Freedom of Information Act (FOIA).
If, in response to this RFP, trade secrets or commercial or financial information are furnished under a claim that
they are proprietary, privileged or confidential and that disclosure of the trade secrets or commercial or
financial information would cause competitive harm to the person or business responding to this RFP, such
claim must be clearly made, and such information must be clearly identified. (5 ILCS 140/7 and 7.5) Responses
to this RFP with every page marked as proprietary, privileged or confidential will not satisfy this
requirement. Bidders are required to make a good faith attempt to properly identify only those portions of the
response that are truly furnished under a claim that they are proprietary, privileged or confidential and that
disclosure of the trade secrets or commercial or financial information would cause competitive harm to the
person or business responding to this RFP.
RedactedVersionofRFPResponseIn the event the Responder believes certain materials in the submitted response are exempt from public
disclosure in accordance with the language in the Freedom of Information Act Disclosure section above,
Responders are asked to provide a redacted version of the response it believes will be suitable for release
under the Illinois Freedom of Information Act. (5 ILCS 140/7 and 7.5)
However, any claim of privilege from disclosure is not definitive. SURS has the right and legal obligation to
determine whether such information is exempt form disclosure under the Illinois Freedom of Information Act
and no information will be considered or determined by SURS to be proprietary, privileged or confidential
unless it is identified and separated as indicated herein. (5ILCS 140/7 and 7.5)
9
OrdinaryCourseofBusinessCommunicationsAllowedOther than existing normal business matters, respondents, potential respondents, or their representatives
should not contact anyone at SURS (including SURS staff, members of the SURS advisory committees and
members of the SURS Board) other than the listed RFP contact. In addition, respondents must not discuss this
RFP with any employee of SURS, trustee of SURS, employee of SURS’ custodian, managers, legal counsel, or
other advisors or persons/entities having contracts or other affiliations with SURS.
SURSQuietPeriodPolicyPlease note the following Quiet Period Policy establishing guidelines by which the SURS Board of Trustees and
SURS Staff will communicate with prospective vendors or service providers during a search process. The Quiet
Period for this RFP began on the date the RFP was issued: October 22, 2018.
1. The quiet period shall commence upon Committee action (or Board action if the selection is not initiated
through a Committee) to authorize a search for a service provider and end once a selection has been made
by the Board and accepted by the service provider;
2. Initiation, continuation and conclusion of the quiet period shall be publicly communicated via the SURS
website (www.SURS.org) to prevent inadvertent violations;
3. All Board members, and SURS staff not directly involved in the search process, shall refrain from
communicating with potential service providers regarding any product or service related to the search
offered by the provider throughout the quiet period and shall refrain from accepting meals, travel, hotel, or
other value from the providers;
4. Throughout the quiet period, if any Board member or SURS staff member is contacted by a potential service
provider, the Board member or SURS staff member shall refer the provider to the SURS staff member
directly involved in the search process;
5. All authority related to the search process shall be exercised solely by the relevant Committee or Board as a
whole, and not by individual Board Members;
6. All information related to the search process shall be communicated by SURS staff to the relevant
Committee or Board as a whole, and not to individual Board Members;
7. The quiet period does not prevent Board approved due diligence, client conference attendance, or
communications with an existing service provider that happens to be a provider in the ordinary course of
services provided by such service provider; however, discussions related to the pending selection shall be
avoided during those activities;
8. The provisions of this policy will apply to potential service providers throughout the quiet period and shall
be communicated to providers in conjunction with any competitive proposal process; and
9. A potential service provider or vendor may be disqualified from a search process for a violation of the Quiet
Period or any portion of this policy.
RightsReservedSURS reserves the right to amend any segment of the RFP prior to the announcement of a selected
vendor/contractor. In such an event, all respondents will be afforded the opportunity to revise their proposals
to accommodate the RFP amendment.
SURS reserves the right to remove any or all services from consideration for this contract. At its discretion,
SURS may issue a separate contract for any service or groups of services included in this RFP. SURS may
negotiate additional provisions to the contract awarded pursuant to this RFP.
10
SURS may request additional information from any or all bidders to assist in the evaluation of proposals, and
SURS reserves the right to conduct background investigations of selected individuals or firms prior to awarding
a contract under this RFP.
SURS does not bear any obligation to complete the RFP process or to select any individual(s) or firm(s). SURS
also reserves the right without prejudice to reject any or all proposals submitted.
SURS will NOT reimburse any expenses incurred in responding to this RFP.
EqualOpportunitySURS does not discriminate because of race, color, religion, creed, sex, sexual orientation, age, marital status,
military status, certain unfavorable discharges from military service, political affiliation, citizenship, ancestry,
national origin, physical or mental handicap or disability or any other characteristic protected by law. It is the
System’s intent to comply with all state, federal, and local equal employment and opportunity laws and public
policies.
TermsandConditionsFollowing a review of submitted materials, if requested, selected individuals or organizations must be prepared
to make a presentation or otherwise participate in an in‐person interview in Champaign, IL or in Chicago, IL
with SURS staff members and/or members of the SURS board of trustees at a date and location to be
determined by SURS. SURS will not provide reimbursement for any costs incurred by the individuals or
organizations associated with this presentation. Prior to the award of a contract pursuant to this RFP, selected
individuals or firms must provide all requested documentation.
AppendixA:StatementofMinimumQualifications
(Firm Name) certifies that it meets the following
minimum qualifications.
Please initial each as applicable.
1. _________ The responder’s key professionals and/or organization has no material conflicts with the SURS
Board.
2. _________ As of December 31, 2017, contractors have been in business a minimum of five (5) years, have
current and valid licenses and certifications applicable to this project, EMR safety rating of .8 or less, and
pay prevailing wage.
Signed: Date:
Title:
11
AppendixB: Questionnaire
The following questionnaire must be completed and included with your response to this RFP. Type your responses in the same order as the questionnaire, listing the question first followed by your answer.
ContactandCompanyInformation:
Name of Individual / Organization:
Mailing Address:
City: State: Zip Code: Phone:
Fax:
Federal Employer Identification Number:
Contact Person(s):
Name: Phone: Title:
Fax: Email:
Website:
OrganizationBackground:
1. Please provide a general description and history of the organization, its operations (please include any history of mergers and/or acquisitions), year founded, ownership structure, biographies of the principals and percentage ownership by current employees.
2. Provide a brief, descriptive statement detailing evidence of the respondent’s ability to deliver the goods or services sought under this RFP.
3. Is Respondent a “Minority owned business,” meaning a business which is at least 51% owned by one or more minority persons, or in the case of a corporation, at least 51% of the stock in which is owned by one or more minority persons; and the management and daily business operations of which are controlled by one or more of the minority individuals who own it? If so, please provide a detailed explanation.
12
4. Is Respondent a “Female owned business,” meaning a business which is at least 51% owned by one or more females, or, in the case of a corporation, at least 51% of the stock in which is owned by one or more females; and the management and daily business operations of which are controlled by one or more of the females who own it? If so, please provide a detailed explanation.
5. Is Respondent a “Business owned by a person with a disability,” meaning a business that is at least 51% owned by one or more persons with a disability and the management and daily business operations of which are controlled by one or more of the persons with disabilities who own it? A not‐for‐profit agency for persons with disabilities that is exempt from taxation under Section 501 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 is also considered a "business owned by a person with a disability". If so, please provide a detailed explanation.
13
AppendixC:Proposal
Please include detail regarding scope and cost of services, deliverables and timeframe for completion of the
project.
FIRM NAME: _______________________________________________________
ADDRESS: _______________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE: _______________________________________________________
REPRESENTATIVE: __________________________________________________
1. Review of project design, specifications
2. Sourcing of chiller unit and related equipment
3. Cost of chiller unit and related equipment
4. Timeframe for completion
5. Extended warranty
Indicate project duration and frequency of visits below.
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
BASE BID: THE BIDDER AGREES TO PERFORM ALL WORK FOR THE ABOVE TRADE, EXCLUSIVE OF
ALTERNATE BIDS, FOR THE SUM OF:
TOTAL Time & Materials (Base Bid) NOT TO EXCEED Amount: $______________________________
ALTERNATE BID 1 ‐ EXTENDED WARRANTY AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 01 78 36:
TOTAL Time & Materials (Alternate Bid 1) NOT TO EXCEED Amount: $______________________________
14
ALTERNATE BID 2 ‐ EXTENDED WARRANTY AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 01 78 36:
TOTAL Time & Materials (Alternate Bid 2) NOT TO EXCEED Amount: $______________________________
Cost for additional meetings, if requested by SURS: $______________________________
The Bidder acknowledges the following Addenda, if any, note below (Failure to acknowledge may cause bid rejection.)
NO. ___ , DATED ____ NO. ____ , DATED ____
NO. ___ , DATED ____ NO. ____ , DATED ____
I, _________________________________________, a licensed contractor in the State of Illinois and an
authorized representative of the above‐indicated firm, have reviewed and understand the SURS Chiller
Replacement Request for Proposal, and I/we am/are prepared to provide the required services for the above
costs.
__________________________________
(SEAL)
ATTACH A MINIMUM OF TWO PROJECT REFERENCES, SIMILAR IN DESIGN AND SCOPE.
ATTACH LIMITS OF COVERAGE FOR PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY INSURANCE.
In accordance with State policy, Contractors must list all known subcontractors and suppliers who will be
employed on this project. Attach additional sheets if necessary
SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER NAME TIN (FEIN or SSN)
1
2
3
4
5
15
AppendixD:AddendumtoContract
ADDENDUM TO CONTRACT
In consideration of SURS entering into such contract, the Vendor/Contractor also agrees to the following:
1) If the Contractor is an individual, he or she certifies that he or she is not in default on an educational
loan as provided in Section 3 of the Educational Loan Default Act, 5 ILCS 385/3.
2) The Contractor certifies that it is not barred from being awarded a contract or subcontract because of a
conviction or admission of guilt for bribery or for bribing an officer or employee of the State of Illinois or
any other state in that officer or employee’s official capacity as provided in Section 50‐5 of the Illinois
Procurement Code, 30 ILCS 500/50‐5.
3) The Contractor certifies that it will provide a drug free workplace by engaging in the conduct
prescribed in Section 3 of the Drug Free Workplace Act, 30 ILCS 580/3.
4) The Contractor certifies that it is not barred from contracting with SURS because of a violation of either
Section 33E‐3 (bid‐rigging) or 33E‐4 (bid rotating) of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS
5/33E.
5) The Contractor certifies that neither it nor any substantially owned affiliated company is participating or
shall participate in an international boycott in violation of the provisions of the
U.S. Export Administration Act of 1979 or the regulations of the U.S. Department of Commerce
promulgated under that Act.
6) The Contractor certifies that no fees, commissions, or payments of any type have been or will be paid to any
third party in connection with the contract to which this is an addendum, except as disclosed in the contract
or an exhibit thereto as provided in 30 ILCS 500/50‐25 and in 40 ILCS 5/1‐
145. The Contractor shall promptly notify SURS if it ever has reason to believe that this certification is no
longer accurate.
7) To the extent Illinois law is applicable to Contractor, pursuant to 775 ILCS 5/2‐105, Contractor agrees to:
a) Refrain from unlawful discrimination and discrimination based on citizenship status in employment and
undertake affirmative action to assure equality of employment opportunity and eliminate the effects
of past discrimination;
b) Comply with the procedures and requirements of the Illinois Department of Human Rights’
regulations concerning equal employment opportunities and affirmative action;
c) Provide such information, with respect to its employees and applications for employment, and
assistance as the Illinois Department of Human Rights may reasonably request; and
d) Have written sexual harassment policies that shall include, at a minimum, the following
information:
i) The illegality of sexual harassment;
ii) The definition of sexual harassment under State law;
16
iii) A description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples;
iv) Contractor’s internal complaint process including penalties;
v) The legal recourse, investigative and complaint process available through the Illinois
Department of Human Rights and the Illinois Human Rights Commission;
vi) Directions on how to contact the Illinois Department of Human Rights and the Illinois Human
Rights Commission; and
vii) Protection against retaliation as provided by Section 6‐101 of the Illinois Human Rights Act. A
copy of the policies shall be provided to the Illinois Department of Human Rights upon request.
8) To the extent it applies to Contractor and this contract, Contractor agrees to comply with the Illinois
Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/1, et seq.
9) Contractor shall maintain, for a minimum of five (5) years after the completion of the contract, adequate
books, records, and supporting documents to verify the amounts, recipients, and uses of all disbursements
of funds passing in conjunction with the contract. Contractor shall further make all such books, records, and
supporting documents related to the contract available for review and audit by the internal auditor of SURS
and by the Illinois Auditor General and shall cooperate fully with any audit conducted by the internal auditor
of SURS and the Illinois Auditor General and will further provide the internal auditor of SURS and the Illinois
Auditor General full access to all relevant materials.
10) Contractor agrees to notify the SURS Ethics Officer if it solicits or intends to solicit for employment any of
the employees of SURS during the term of the contract.
11) Contractor understands that SURS and this contract are subject to the provisions of the Illinois Open Meetings Act (5 ILCS 120/1, et seq) and the Illinois Freedom of Information Act (5 ILCS 140/1, et seq).
12) Counterparts. This Agreement and Addendum may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be
deemed to be an original, but all of which, taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement.
The counterparts of this Agreement and Addendum may be executed and delivered by facsimile or other
electronic signature by any of the parties to any other party and the receiving party may rely on the receipt
of such document so executed and delivered by facsimile or other electronic means as if the original had
been received.
Under penalties of perjury, Contractor certifies that is
its correct Federal Taxpayer Identification Number.
Contractor is doing business as a(n) (please circle applicable entity):
Individual Sole Proprietorship Partnership
Corporation Not‐for‐Profit
Corporation
Medical and Health Care
Services Provider
Corporation
Real Estate Agent Governmental Entity Tax Exempt Organization
(IRC 501(a) only)
Trust or Estate Other: _____________
AppendixE:SURSStandardContract
CONTRACTOR SERVICES AGREEMENT
THIS CONTRACTOR SERVICES AGREEMENT (“Agreement” and “contract”), between CONTRACTOR (“CONTRACTOR” and “contractor”) and the State Universities Retirement System, a body politic and corporate created under Article 15 of the Illinois Pension Code (“SURS”) is entered into and effective as of __________, 20___. In consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. SCOPE OF SERVICES
CONTRACTOR agrees to provide the goods, equipment and services to SURS as described in this Contractor Services Agreement, as outlined in CONTRACTOR’s Bid Tabulation Form and Exhibits thereto (“Bid”) attached hereto as “Exhibit A” and as outlined in the SURS RFP/Invitation to Bid for said services, including the drawings and specifications prepared by ________________________________________________ as contained therein, all of which is attached hereto as “Exhibit B.” This project (also referred to herein as the “work”) shall include ________________________________________________ and PROJECT NAME as referenced in the attached exhibits that are also referred to herein as the “contract documents.”
1.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform the work in accordance with the contract documents.
1.2 Any changes to the scope of services to be provided under this Agreement shall be contained in a written amendment serving as a change order that must be signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties and attached as an Exhibit to this Agreement. Any such change order must include a detailed description of the change in the work to be performed, the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the agreed upon contract sum/price, and the extent of the adjustment, if any, to the agreed upon completion date/time of the project.
1.3 Any changes to the scope of services to be provided under this Agreement shall be performed under the applicable provisions of the contract documents and CONTRACTOR shall proceed promptly with completion of the approved changes.
2. CHARGES FOR SERVICES
SURS agrees, for and in consideration of the receipt of the electrical contracting services, equipment and products used and provided by CONTRACTOR as described in “Exhibit A,” in “Exhibit B” or in any subsequent amendments to this Agreement that is approved, in writing, by duly authorized representatives of both parties, to pay compensation to CONTRACTOR as follows:
2.1 Installation of the Project. After work on this project begins, CONTRACTOR shall submit monthly invoices as described herein, __________________________________________.
18
The total amount of the contract price for the Project is $______________. Each monthly invoice shall include a description of the pro-rata share of the work completed on the project as of the invoice date and said invoice shall also include an estimate of the percentage of completion of the overall project as of the date of the invoice. The final monthly invoice shall be submitted upon completion of CONTRACTOR’s work to be performed on this project.
2.2 PROJECT NAME. CONTRACTOR shall submit one invoice for the total amount due and owing for the PROJECT NAME in the amount of $_________________. Said invoice shall be submitted upon completion of CONTRACTOR’s work to be performed on this project.
3. BILLING
CONTRACTOR shall invoice SURS for any services performed under this Agreement prior to payment.
3.1 By submitting an invoice, CONTRACTOR certifies that the services provided and consumables delivered meet all of the requirements of the Agreement and that the amount billed is as allowed under the terms of this Agreement.
3.2 Invoices submitted by CONTRACTOR for services performed must be presented to SURS within thirty (30) days of the completion of services rendered or by the agreed upon billing schedule as referenced herein.
3.3 The parties agree that CONTRACTOR shall not bill SURS for any taxes as the parties acknowledge that SURS is a tax exempt entity and the Illinois sales tax exemption number issued to SURS by the Illinois Department of Revenue is - - .
4. PAYMENT
Payments shall be paid in accordance with Title 80, Section 1600.130(e)(3) of the Illinois Administrative Code. Final payment may be adjusted by SURS if such adjustment is supported by a SURS audit. All recordkeeping shall be in accordance with sound accounting standards. SURS shall not be liable to pay for any goods, equipment or services under this Agreement unless the cost of said goods or services is agreed upon by the parties in writing. Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the total Agreement price as referenced herein, shall be made to CONTRACTOR when:
4.1 CONTRACTOR has fully performed the Agreement except for CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to correct work as provided herein, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment.
19
5. ADDITIONAL TERMS, EXHIBITS, SCHEDULES
The parties agree that any additional terms contained in CONTRACTOR’s Bid Tabulation Form attached hereto as “Exhibit A” in SURS RFP/Invitation to Bid and the drawings and specifications included therein and attached as “Exhibit B” and in the Identification of Initial Decision Maker attached as “Exhibit C” shall be construed as part of this Agreement to the extent that the terms contained therein have been fully agreed upon by the parties, in writing, and do not conflict with the terms of this Contractor Services Agreement. In any case of conflicting terms, the terms contained in this Contractor Services Agreement (not those contained in “Exhibit A” or “Exhibit B”) shall control.
6. TERM OF AGREEMENT
The term of this Agreement shall begin on the effective date noted above and shall expire on ___________, 20___ unless the parties agree that there is a justifiable reason to extend the time in which the work shall be completed. Any such extension must be referenced in a written agreement, signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties and included as an Amendment to this Agreement. 7. ENTIRE AGREEMENT, AMENDMENT OR MODIFICATION
7.1 Entire Agreement. This Agreement, in conjunction with “Exhibit A,” “Exhibit B” and the drawings and specifications contained therein and “Exhibit C” attached hereto constitutes the full and final expression of the agreement between the parties and supersedes all previous agreements and understandings, whether written or oral, relating to goods, equipment or services to be provided pursuant to this Agreement, to “Exhibit A” and “Exhibit B” attached hereto.
7.2 Amendment or Modification. This Agreement may be amended by mutual consent of the parties. No amendment or modification of this Agreement shall be valid or binding unless set forth in writing and executed by duly authorized representatives of both parties hereunder.
8. COUNTERPARTS
This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, by fax, email or wet signature, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which, taken together, shall constitute one and the same agreement. The counterparts of this Agreement may be executed and delivered by email, by facsimile or by other electronic means by any of the parties to any other party and the receiving party may rely on the receipt of such document so executed and delivered by facsimile or other electronic means as if the original had been received.
9. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE
CONTRACTOR acknowledges that time is of the essence in performing its obligations hereunder. By agreement, the work to be performed to complete the PROJECT NAME shall be
20
completed on or before ___________, 20___. This date is also referred to herein as the “completion date” or “contract time.” 10. USE OF SUBCONTRACTORS, ASSIGNMENTS, TRANSFERS. Subcontracting, assignment or transfer of all or part of the interests of CONTRACTOR in the work covered by this Agreement is prohibited without the prior written consent of SURS.
10.1 In the event that SURS gives such consent, the terms and conditions of this Agreement shall apply to and bind the party or parties to whom such work is subcontracted, assigned or transferred as fully and completely as CONTRACTOR is hereby bound and obligated.
10.2 CONTRACTOR shall require each SURS approved subcontractor, to the extent of the work to be performed by the subcontractor, to be bound to CONTRACTOR by terms of the contract documents and to assume toward CONTRACTOR all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the subcontractor’s work, which CONTRACTOR, by this Agreement, assumes toward SURS. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of SURS under the contract documents with respect to the work to be performed by the subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights and shall allow to the subcontractor, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against CONTRACTOR that CONTRACTOR has against SURS. Where appropriate, CONTRACTOR shall require each subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with sub-subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall make available to each proposed subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the contract documents between SURS and CONTRACTOR to which the subcontractor shall be bound and upon written request of the subcontractor, shall identify the subcontract terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement between CONTRACTOR and subcontractor that may differ from the contract documents between SURS and CONTRACTOR. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed sub-subcontractors.
10.3 CONTRACTOR shall not employ any person or persons employed by SURS at any time during the term of this Agreement for any work required by the terms of this Agreement.
11. ADDITIONAL DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR 11.1 Supervision and Construction Procedures. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the
work on the projects identified herein, using CONTRACTOR’s best skill and attention. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means and methods, techniques, sequences and procedures for coordinating all portions of the work under this Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall evaluate jobsite safety and shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If CONTRACTOR determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, CONTRACTOR shall give timely written notices to SURS and shall not proceed with that portion of the work without further written instructions from SURS. If CONTRACTOR is then instructed to proceed with the
21
required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by CONTRACTOR, SURS shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from the SURS required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures unless the parties received direction from the Initial Decision Maker to proceed with the original means and methods specified.
11.2 Responsibility for employees and subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of its employees, subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the work for, or on, behalf of CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors or sub-subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall enforce strict discipline and good order among CONTRACTOR’s employees and other persons carrying out the work on the projects identified herein. CONTRACTOR shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in the tasks assigned to them.
11.3 Inspection of Portions of work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection of portions of work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work.
11.4 Documents and Samples. CONTRACTOR shall maintain at the site for SURS one copy of the drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders (if any) and other modifications (if any), in good order and marked currently to indicate filed changes and selections made during the project, and one copy of approved shop drawings, product data, samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to SURS throughout the entire project timeframe and shall be delivered to SURS upon completion of the projects as a record of the completed work.
11.5 Use of Site. CONTRACTOR shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, and the contract documents and CONTRACTOR shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.
11.6 Cutting and Patching. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the contract documents.
11.7 Cleaning Up. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Agreement. At completion of the work, CONTRACTOR shall remove waste materials, rubbish, CONTRACTOR’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the project site. If CONTRACTOR fails to clean up as provided herein, SURS may do so and SURS shall be entitled to reimbursement from CONTRACTOR for the time and cost expended for said clean up.
22
12. LABOR AND MATERIALS
Unless otherwise provided in this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery and all other items or services necessary for proper execution and completion of the work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the work. 13. WARRANTY AND DUTY OF CARE 13.1 CONTRACTOR represents and warrants that all services provided will be performed in a
good, workmanlike, timely and professional manner. CONTRACTOR shall provide personnel who have the appropriate technical skills and experience. If proper consent is given to use subcontractors or sub-subcontractors, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the negligent and/or willful acts or omissions of its agents, employees, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors and all claims arising therefrom. CONTRACTOR further represents and warrants that the services provided will conform to the descriptions and statements forth in “Exhibit A” and in “Exhibit B” attached hereto. In the event that SURS determines that any individual performing services for CONTRACTOR is not providing such skilled services, it shall promptly notify CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR shall promptly replace that individual.
13.2 CONTRACTOR warrants that materials and equipment furnished under this Agreement will be of good quality and new unless the contract documents require or permit otherwise. CONTRACTOR further warrants that the work will conform to the requirements of the contract documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the work the contract documents require or permit. Work, materials, equipment or services not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. CONTRACTOR’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the work not executed by CONTRACTOR, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by SURS, CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment used in these projects.
14. PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS 14.1 Permits. Unless otherwise provided herein, CONTRACTOR shall secure and pay for the
building permit as well as for any other permits, fees, licenses and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper completion of the work, if any, that are customarily secured after execution of the Agreement and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.
14.2 Notices. CONTRACTOR shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the work.
14.3 Laws. If CONTRACTOR performs work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities, CONTRACTOR shall assume appropriate responsibility for such work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
23
15. CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS If CONTRACTOR encounters conditions at SURS that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the contract documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the contract documents, CONTRACTOR shall promptly provide notice to SURS before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. SURS will retain appropriate personnel to investigate such conditions and, if it is determined that said conditions differ materially and would cause an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, SURS will recommend an equitable adjustment in the contract sum and/or contract completion date. If it is determined by SURS that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the contract documents and that no change in the terms of the Agreement is justified, the reasons supporting said conclusion will be presented to CONTRACTOR in written form and work shall resume as previously scheduled and at the agreed upon price. CONTRACTOR may dispute any such conclusion per the Initial Decision Maker and other dispute provisions contained herein. 16. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 16.1 Safety Precautions and Programs. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating,
maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of this Agreement.
16.2 Safety of Persons and Property. CONTRACTOR shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
i. Employees and agents performing the work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
ii. The work itself and materials and equipment to be incorporated there, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors or sub-subcontractors;
iii. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
16.3 Notice of Laws. CONTRACTOR shall comply with and give notices required by
applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rule and regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protections from damage, injury or loss.
16.4 Safeguards. CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Agreement, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying SURS, its employees, visitors and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
24
16.5 Use of Hazardous Materials or Equipment. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the work, CONTRACTOR shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
16.6 Remedy Damage and Loss. CONTRACTOR shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property (other than damage and loss insured under property insurance as required by the contract documents) caused in whole or in part by CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or sub-subcontractors, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which CONTRACTOR is responsible under the terms contained within this Agreement; except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of SURS or anyone directly or indirectly employed by SURS for whose acts SURS may be liable and not attributable to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR. The foregoing obligations of CONTRACTOR are in addition to CONTRACTOR’s indemnification obligations contained herein in section 38.
16.7 Notice of Injury or Damage to Persons or Property. If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an alleged act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party may be legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding twenty-one (21) days after discovery of said injury or damage. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. The notice shall include the name, date of birth, address and phone numbers of the persons injured, the specific location of the personal injury or property damage, the names, addresses and phone numbers of all persons who witnessed or overheard any part of the incident giving rise to the injury or property damage, the date and time of the incident giving rise to injury or property damage and the names of all of CONTRACTOR’s employees, agents or subcontractors who were on site on the date of the occurrence regardless of whether they witnessed or overheard any part of the personal injury or property damage.
16.8 Hazardous Materials. CONTRACTOR is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the contract documents regarding hazardous materials. If CONTRACTOR encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the contract documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop work in the affected area and report the condition to SURS in writing. Upon receipt of said written notice, SURS shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by CONTRACTOR and in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless.
25
17. FAILURE TO PERFORM WORK IN A TIMELY MANNER AND/OR WITHIN AGREED UPON PERFORMANCE EXPECTATIONS
Except for delays caused by acts of Force Majeure, as described herein or delays due to changes to the timing of deliverables that is otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, CONTRACTOR agrees to provide the services outlined in this agreement, in Exhibit “A” and in Exhibit “B” in a timely manner and within agreed upon performance expectations as outlined in this Agreement, in “Exhibit A” and in “Exhibit “B” attached hereto. A failure to complete either or both of the projects covered by this agreement by the date specified herein shall result in a 5% reduction in the agreed upon amount to be paid to CONTRACTOR for the services to be provided for the PROJECT as outlined by this Agreement.
18. FORCE MAJEURE
Neither party shall be responsible for delay or failure to perform hereunder to the extent such delay or failure is due to unforeseeable circumstances beyond its reasonable control and not due to its negligence including acts of nature, acts of terrorism, riots, labor disputes, fire, flood, explosion, governmental prohibition, major equipment failures, fluctuations or non-availability of electrical power or telecommunications equipment, or other conditions beyond the control of the parties. If CONTRACTOR’s performance is delayed by force majeure, CONTRACTOR will discuss the situation with SURS as soon as the situation is identified and together the parties will determine whether the Agreement term may be extended for full performance. If an event of force majeure continues for more than thirty (30) days, either party may, at its option, terminate the Agreement. Per the termination clause contained herein, if either party elects to terminate the contract as a result of force majeure, CONTRACTOR agrees to cooperate with SURS to provide for an orderly transition of the services to SURS at the time of any such termination. CONTRACTOR will render a final bill to SURS for the pro-rata share of work properly performed up to and including the date the notice of termination for force majeure is received and for any work specifically approved by SURS to be completed by CONTRACTOR between the date the termination notice is received and the actual termination date. SURS will pay CONTRACTOR in accordance with the compensation and billing terms contained herein for the pro-rata share of the work performed up to and including the date the notice of termination is received and for any work specifically approved by SURS to be completed by CONTRACTOR between the date the termination notice is received and the actual termination date.
19. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR STATUS
CONTRACTOR’s personnel are not, and shall not be considered, employees of SURS for any purpose whatsoever. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for payment of all taxes, fees, and claims, including without limitation workers’ compensation, and any other liabilities related to CONTRACTOR’s business operations.
26
20. INSURANCE
CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain insurance and bonds to properly cover this PROJECT as identified herein and in “Exhibit A” and in “Exhibit B.”
20.1 Contractor Liability Insurance. CONTRACTOR shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the State of Illinois such insurance as will protect CONTRACTOR from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR’s operations and completed operations under the contract documents and for which CONTRACTOR may be legally liable, whether such operations be by CONTRACTOR or by a subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
i. Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the work to be performed under the contract documents;
ii. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of CONTRACTOR’s employees;
iii. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of any person other than CONTRACTOR’s employees;
iv. Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
v. Claims for damages, other than to the work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
vi. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
vii. Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
viii. Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR’s obligations under the indemnification provisions found in section 38 contained herein.
20.2 Liability Limits. CONTRACTOR agrees that the insurance required by section 20.1 shall be written for not less than $1 Million Dollars per person, per occurrence or as otherwise required by law, whichever is greater. Coverages, whether written or on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to CONTRACTOR’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the contract documents.
20.3 Deductibles. If the property insurance maintained by CONTRACTOR requires deductibles, CONTRACTOR shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.
27
20.4 Certificates of Insurance. Certificates of Insurance shall be filed with SURS prior to commencement of the work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by section 20 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to SURS. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final invoice for final payment as identified in Section 2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required herein. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR with reasonable promptness.
20.5 Required terms. CONTRACTOR shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the contract documents to include (1) SURS, its Executive Director, its Board of Trustees and Others noted as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by CONTRACTOR’s willful and/or negligent acts or omissions during CONTRACTOR’s operations; and (2) SURS, its Executive Director, its Board of Trustees and Others noted as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by CONTRACTOR’s willful and/or negligent acts or omissions during CONTRACTOR’s completed operations.
20.6 SURS’ Liability Insurance. SURS shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining SURS’ usual liability insurance.
20.7 Property Insurance. Unless otherwise provided, SURS shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in Illinois, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial contract sum/price, plus value of subsequent contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the contract documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in section 2 or until no person or entity other than SURS has an insurable interest in the property required by this section to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of SURS, CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR’s subcontractors and sub-subcontractors and any others noted on this project.
20.8 “All-risk” Coverage. Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for CONTRACTOR’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
28
20.9 Owner’s Refusal to Obtain Required Insurance. If SURS does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by this Agreement and with all of the coverages in the amounts described above, SURS shall so inform CONTRACTOR in writing prior to the commencement of the work. CONTRACTOR may then obtain insurance that will protect the interests of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors and sub-subcontractors in the work, and by appropriate change order the cost of said insurance shall be charged to SURS. If CONTRACTOR is damaged by the failure or neglect of SURS to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying CONTRACTOR in writing, then SURS shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
20.10 Deductibles. If the property insurance maintained by SURS requires deductibles, SURS shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.
20.11 Off-site Storage. This property insurance shall cover portions of the work stored off the site, and also portions of the work in transit.
20.12 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. SURS shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the contract documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by SURS; this insurance shall include interests of SURS, CONTRACTOR, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors and any others noted in the work. CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and any others noted shall be named as a loss payee to the extent of its interest in the property.
20.13 Loss of Use Insurance. SURS may at its option, purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure SURS against loss of the use of SURS’ property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. SURS waives all rights of action against CONTRACTOR for loss of use of SURS’ property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.
20.14 Special Insurance. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, SURS shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate change order.
20.15 Copies of Policies. Before an exposure to loss may occur, SURS shall file with CONTRACTOR a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by section 20. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this project.
20.16 Settlements. SURS, as fiduciary, shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless CONTRACTOR shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to SURS’ exercise of this power. If such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner outlined in this Agreement.
29
21. PERFORMANCE BONDS AND PAYMENT BONDS
CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain performance and payment bonds as referenced in “Exhibit A” to cover this PROJECT NAME as identified in “Exhibit A” and in “Exhibit B.”
21.1 Upon request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.
22. CORRECTION OF WORK 22.1 Before or After Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR shall promptly correct work that
fails to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the cost of necessary services and expenses made necessary thereby shall be at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
22.2 After Substantial Completion. In addition to CONTRACTOR’s obligations under section 13 if, within, one year after the date of substantial completion of the work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under section 13, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the contract documents, any of the work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents, CONTRACTOR shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from SURS to do so unless SURS has previously given CONTRACTOR a written acceptance of such condition. SURS shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of work, if SURS fails to notify CONTRACTOR and give CONTRACTOR an opportunity to make the correction, SURS waives the rights to require correction by CONTRACTOR and to make claim for breach of warranty. If CONTRACTOR fails to correct nonconforming work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from SURS, SURS may correct it in accordance with the terms contained herein.
22.3 Definition of Substantial Completion. For all purposes where there is a reference to “substantial completion,” this term shall mean that “substantial completion” is the stage in the progress of the work when the work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the contract documents so that SURS can occupy or utilize the work for its intended use.
22.4 Extensions. The one-year period for correction of work shall be extended with respect to portions of work first performed after substantial completion by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual completion of that portion of the work. However, the one-year period for correction of work shall not be extended by corrective work performed by CONTRACTOR before substantial completion.
30
22.5 Contractor’s Cost. CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of SURS caused by CONTRACTOR’s correction or removal of work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
22.6 Limitations. Nothing in this section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations CONTRACTOR has under the contract documents.
22.7 Acceptance of Non-conforming Work. If SURS prefers to accept work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents, SURS may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the contract sum/price will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
23. SURS’ RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
If CONTRACTOR fails to correct work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents or repeatedly fails to carry out work in accordance with the contract documents, SURS may issue a written order to CONTRACTOR to stop the work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of SURS to stop the work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of SURS to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other person or entity.
24. SURS’ RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
If CONTRACTOR defaults or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the contract documents and fails within a 10 day period after receipt of written notice from SURS to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, SURS may, without prejudice to other remedies SURS may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate change order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due to CONTRACTOR the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including SURS’ expenses and compensation for additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by SURS and amounts charged to CONTRACTOR are both first subject to approval by the Initial Decision Maker as identified herein before any other remedies shall be available. If payments then or thereafter due to CONTRACTOR are insufficient to cover such amounts, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to SURS.
25. BANKRUPTCY
CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify SURS if CONTRACTOR becomes insolvent, files a petition in bankruptcy, becomes a party to an involuntary bankruptcy proceeding, or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors. In such an event, SURS may immediately terminate all or any portion of this Agreement upon prompt written notice.
31
26. WAIVER AND WAIVER OF DEFAULT 26.1 General. No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of any party, any
right, power or privilege hereunder will operate as a waiver thereof. No single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege hereunder will preclude any party from further exercise of the same right or the exercise of any other right.
26.2 Waiver of Default. Waiver by any party of default of the other party will not be deemed to be a waiver of any other default irrespective of whether such default is similar.
26.3 No action or failure to act by SURS or CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under this Agreement, nor shall such an action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
27. SEVERABILITY
Should any term of this Agreement, for any reason be held to be illegal or unenforceable, the remaining terms of this Agreement will continue in full force and effect, and the offending term will be limited or deleted to the extent necessary, to make it enforceable. The parties agree to negotiate in good faith to agree upon a modified term which reflects the original intent of the parties.
28. CONFIDENTIALITY
Both parties acknowledge that in the negotiation and performance of this Agreement, confidential and proprietary information of each may be made available to the other. CONTRACTOR shall at all times comply with all security regulations applicable to the information it receives from SURS. Materials belonging to SURS shall be safeguarded by CONTRACTOR in compliance with all applicable federal and State of Illinois privacy laws. All membership information shall be kept in the strictest of confidence and appropriately safeguarded. CONTRACTOR shall not release any membership records/information, regardless of the form in which it is stored or appears, to outside parties for any reason, except when required by law or allowed by SURS in compliance with the SURS Confidential Information Disclosure Statement which in included in its entirety within this section. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify SURS if there is a breach of confidential SURS information. Neither party will disclose the information to any third party without prior written consent from the other party. The information receives from SURS will only be used by CONTRACTOR’s employees, agents and consultants whose duties justify the need for access to the information provided by SURS and who have agreed to abide by the obligations of secrecy and limited use commensurate with this Agreement. These obligations will apply to verbal information as well as to all written documentation received from SURS. CONTRACTOR and SURS agree that the following terms and conditions apply when one of the parties (“Discloser”) discloses confidential information (“Information”) to the other (“Recipient”) under this Agreement. Both parties agree that our mutual objective under this
32
Agreement is to provide appropriate protection for confidential information while maintaining our ability to conduct our stated mission and business activities. 28.1 Disclosure of Confidential Information. Confidential Information may be disclosed in a
number of ways. An authorized agent, employee, or contractor may disclose information:
i. in writing;
ii. by delivery of items;
iii. posted or within view within a party’s facilities;
iv. by initiation of access to Information, such as may be contained in a database or computer system;
v. by oral or visual presentation Confidential information may be marked with a restrictive legend of the confidentiality. Confidential information may be unmarked, but of the type that appears to be account numbers, social security numbers, or confidential employee or account holder or other member information. If a contractor or business partner is in doubt, they should ask their contact to verify the confidentiality of the information.
28.2 Obligation of Confidentiality. The Recipient shall use the same care and discretion to avoid disclosure, publication or dissemination of Information as it uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose, publish or disseminate. The Recipient may use confidential information for purposes of approved business by Discloser or authorized agents thereof that does not violate such obligation of confidentiality.
The Recipient may disclose Information to:
i. its employees and employees of its parent and subsidiary companies who have a need to know; and
ii. Any other party with the Discloser’s prior written consent. Before disclosure to any of the above parties, the Recipient will have a written agreement with such party sufficient to require that party to treat confidential information in accordance with this agreement.
The Recipient may disclose information to the extent required by law. However, the
recipient must (unless prohibited by applicable law or governmental authority from doing so) give the Discloser prompt notice and the opportunity to review the request, to redact confidential information not required to be disclosed, to respond to the request for disclosure and the opportunity to make a reasonable effort to obtain a protective order if deemed necessary by the Discloser prior to disclosure.
28.3 Confidentiality Period. Disclosed confidential information of members, or employees continues to be subject of this Agreement indefinitely following the disclosure date. Other disclosed confidential information not of a personal nature (account numbers, member information or employee information) continues to be subject of this agreement for a period of two (2) years after the completion of work or contract termination.
33
28.4 Exceptions. No obligation of confidentiality applies to any information that the Recipient:
i. already possesses without obligation of confidentiality;
ii. develops independently; or
iii. rightfully receives without obligation or confidentiality from a third party and is not comprised of account numbers, employee information or confidential member information.
29. TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BY CONTRACTOR 29.1 Termination by CONTRACTOR for 30 day delay. CONTRACTOR may terminate the
contract if the work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no fault of the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the work under direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR, for any of the following reasons:
i. Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all work to be stopped;
ii. An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all work to be stopped;
iii. If applicable, because the architect or some other certifying individual or entity has not issued a certificate of payment within the time stated in the contract documents.
29.2 Termination by CONTRACTOR for repeated delays, suspensions. CONTRACTOR may terminate the contract if, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the work under direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days OR if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire work by SURS constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.
29.3 If any of the reasons described in 29.1 or 29.2 exist, CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days written notice to SURS, terminate the contract and recover from SURS payment for work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages if proven.
30. TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BY SURS FOR CAUSE 30.1 SURS may terminate the contract if CONTRACTOR:
i. Repeatedly fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
ii. Fails to make payment to subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between CONTRACTOR and subcontractors;
iii. Repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rule and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or
34
iv. Otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the contract documents.
30.2 When any of the above reasons exist, SURS, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of SURS and after giving CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s surety, if any, seven (7) days written notice, terminate employment of CONTRACTOR and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
i. Exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by CONTRACTOR;
ii. Accept assignment of subcontracts; and
iii. Finish the work by whatever reasonable method SURS may deem expedient. Upon written request of CONTRACTOR, SURS shall furnish CONTRACTOR a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by SURS in finishing the work.
30.3 When SURS terminates the contract for any of the reasons above, CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the work is finished.
30.4 If the unpaid balance of the contract sum/price exceeds the cost of finishing the work, including all other damages incurred by SURS and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to SURS. The amount to be paid to CONTRACTOR or to SURS shall be determined through the dispute process outlined in this Agreement and upon application for the same. The obligation for payment shall survive termination of the contract.
31. SUSPENSION OF THE AGREEMENT BY SURS FOR CONVENIENCE
SURS may, without cause, order CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the work in whole, or in part, for such period of time as SURS may determine. If such a suspension occurs, the contract sum/price and the completion date shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by the suspension, delay or interruption. Adjustment of the contract sum/price shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:
i. that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible; or
ii. that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the contract.
32. TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BY SURS FOR CONVENIENCE
SURS may, at any time, terminate the contract for SURS’ convenience and without cause. Upon receipt of written notice from SURS of such termination for SURS’ convenience, CONTRACTOR shall:
i. Cease operations as directed by SURS in the notice;
ii. Take actions necessary, or that SURS may direct, for the protection and
35
preservation of the work; and
iii. Except for work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into further subcontracts and purchase orders.
32.1 In case of such termination for SURS’ convenience, upon application, CONTRACTOR
shall be entitled to receive payment for work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the work not executed.
33. CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 33.1 Definition. A claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of
right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the contract. The term “claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between SURS and CONTRACTOR arising out of or relating to the contract. The responsibility to substantiate claims shall rest with the party making the claim.
33.2 Notice of Claims. Claims by either SURS or CONTRACTOR must be initiated by written notice to the other party within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever is later.
33.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or if notice to terminate or suspend is given by SURS as outlined herein, CONTRACTOR shall proceed diligently with performance of the contract and SURS shall continue to make payments in accordance with the contract documents.
33.4 Claims for Additional Cost. If CONTRACTOR wishes to make a claim for an increase in the contract sum/price, written notice as provided herein shall be given. Prior notice is not required for claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property.
33.5 Claims for Additional Time. If CONTRACTOR wishes to make a claim for an increase in the contract time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. CONTRACTOR’s claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probably effect of delay on progress of the work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one claim is necessary.
33.6 Adverse Weather Conditions. If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a claim for additional time, such claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
33.7 Notice to Surety. In the event of a claim against CONTRACTOR, SURS may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the claim. If the claim relates to a possibility of a default by CONTRACTOR, SURS may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.
36
33.8 Mechanic’s Lien. If a claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.
34. ADDITIONAL RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
Duties and obligations imposed by the contract documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 35. INITIAL DECISION MAKER PROCESS 35.1 Initial Decision Maker. Claims and disputes excluding those relating to hazardous
materials, emergencies, mechanic’s liens and all other issues relating to the proper and timely completion of all projects referenced herein, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for an initial decision. The parties agree that ___________________________ of _______________________ shall serve as the Initial Decision Maker to render decision for said claims and disputes identified herein between CONTRACTOR and SURS that arise under this Agreement. (See “Exhibit C” attached hereto) An initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to a claim proceeding to mediation and then to litigation and must be issued before the date the final payment is due under this Agreement, unless 30 days has passed after the claim was referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. The Initial Decision Maker shall not decide disputes that relate to required bonds, sureties or insurance, mechanic’s liens, personal injury, death or tangible property damage. The Initial Decision Maker shall not decide disputes between CONTRACTOR and persons or entities other than SURS.
35.2 Review of Claim Relating to Dispute. The Initial Decision Maker will review claims and within ten (10) days take one or more of the following actions:
i. Request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,
ii. Reject the claim in whole or in part,
iii. Approve the claim,
iv. Suggest a compromise, or
v. Advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the claim.
35.3 Investigation of Claim. In evaluating claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request that SURS authorize retention of such persons at SURS’ expense.
37
35.4 Requested Information. If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response to the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting date will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the claim in whole or in part.
35.5 Decision. The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. The initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties of any change in the contract sum/price, contract time or both. The initial decision shall satisfy the first step of the dispute process but if either party desires, the dispute is then subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, the dispute is subject to litigation or to any other remedy available to either party under the law.
35.6 Demand for Mediation. Either party may within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party participate in mediation within 60 days of the initial decision per the mediation terms outlined herein. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to agree to participate in mediation within the time required, then the party requesting mediation can petition the court for an order requiring the other party to participate in mediation as identified in section 39 or said party can proceed directly to litigation to resolve the dispute.
35.7 Notification of Surety. In the event of a claim against CONTRACTOR, SURS may, but is not obligated to notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the claim. If the claim relates to a possibility of CONTRACTOR’s default, SURS may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.
35.8 Mechanic’s Lien and other Exempt Claims. If the claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien or if the claim stems from any of the theories excluded in section 35.1, the party asserting such claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law, within applicable statutes of limitations or statutes of repose and within applicable mechanic’s lien notice filing deadlines.
36. DAMAGES
Each party shall be liable to the other party for that portion of any direct damages that result from such party’s willful misconduct, negligence, breach of contract or other wrongful conduct arising out of or relating to this Agreement. In no event shall either party be liable to the other party or to any third party, whether in contract or tort (including negligence), warranty or otherwise, for any indirect, incidental, special, consequential, exemplary or punitive damages arising out of or relating to the Contract, even if the party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
38
37. GOVERNING LAW; VENUE
This Agreement and CONTRACTOR’s obligations and services hereunder must be performed in compliance with all applicable federal and state laws. This Agreement shall be enforced, governed and construed in all respects in accordance with the laws of the State of Illinois to the extent such laws are not pre-empted by the laws of the Unites States of America. CONTRACTOR agrees that it will bring any suit, action, claim or proceeding in, and will submit to (and consents and waives any objection to) the jurisdiction of the Illinois Court of Claims in connection with any claim asserted against SURS arising out of, or in connection with, this Agreement. In addition, CONTRACTOR hereby submits to (and consents and waives any objection to) the jurisdiction of each of the Sixth Judicial Circuit of Illinois, Champaign County, Urbana, Illinois and the United States District Court for the Central District of Illinois in Urbana, Illinois in respect of any suit, action, claim or proceeding brought by SURS arising out of, or in connection with, this Agreement. SURS does not waive sovereign immunity by entering into this Agreement.
38. INDEMNIFICATION AND IMMUNITIES
To the fullest extent allowed by law, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless at all times SURS, its trustees, officers, employees and agents, against, any and all loss, claims, damages, liabilities joint and several, expenses, judgments, fines, settlements and other amounts (“Losses”) that the SURS may incur or suffer as a result of (i) any breach of this Agreement by CONTRACTOR , (ii) any material misrepresentation made by CONTRACTOR, (iii) any negligent or willful act or negligent or willful failure to act by any CONTRACTOR personnel, subcontractors or sub-subcontractors that is attributable to any death, illness, personal injury, or injury to or destruction of tangible property caused by CONTRACTOR, its officers, agents, employees or subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall pay, as incurred, all damages, costs, fees and expenses (including reasonable attorneys' fees of counsel chosen by SURS) relating to any claim, action, suit or other proceeding brought against SURS.
38.1 SURS reserves, and CONTRACTOR recognizes such reservation of, all immunities, defenses, rights or actions arising out of the SURS’ sovereign status, including those arising under the Eleventh Amendment to the United States Constitution. No provision of the Agreement or any other agreement related to the Agreement shall be construed as a waiver or limitation of the immunities, defenses, rights or actions described in the previous sentence
38.2 SURS shall give prompt notice of any such claim for which SURS requires indemnification and shall provide CONTRACTOR with all reasonable assistance, at CONTRACTOR's expense, that CONTRACTOR may reasonably request in connection with the defense of such claim. SURS, at its sole expense, shall have the right also to participate in the defense of any such claim through additional counsel of its choosing. No settlement that imposes any liability or obligation on SURS shall be made without the prior written consent of the Board of Trustees of SURS.
39
38.3 INDEMNIFICATION LIMITS OF SURS. SURS maintains that the Illinois Pension Code may limit its authority to indemnify third parties. CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that SURS shall not have any obligation to indemnify any party pursuant to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby to the extent prohibited by laws, statutes, regulations and judicial interpretations in effect as of the date of this Agreement.
39. ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION
39.1 Mediation. If after obtaining a decision from the Initial Decision Maker (if required under the terms of this Agreement) the parties are unable to resolve any disputes concerning the enforcement of this Agreement and any issues relating to said Agreement between themselves, any such disputes shall be subject to non-binding mediation before either party may commence any legal action against the other regarding said disputes as outlined in section 35 contained herein. Together the parties shall select a Mediator and the parties shall agree in advance as to the maximum amount of time they will participate in mediation in an effort to resolve their disputes. Duly authorized and necessary agents of both parties agree to be physically present and actively participating in the mediation. All associated mediation fees will be shared equally by the parties (50/50). Any agreements reached between the parties will be memorialized, in writing, in a Memorandum of Understanding (“MOU”), before the mediation concludes and said MOU will be signed by duly authorized agents representing both parties. If either party refuses to mediate after reasonable requests for mediation have been made, the other party may obtain the court’s assistance to enforce this provision of the Agreement and order the parties to participate in mediation. The mediation shall take place in the county where the project is located unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in the jurisdiction/venue identified as governing this Agreement.
39.2 Arbitration. The parties to this Agreement have no right to pursue arbitration of any disputes concerning the terms and enforcement of this Agreement. If the parties are unable to resolve their disputes after mediation, either party may pursue legal action or any other remedy legally available to them to resolve any issues in dispute concerning the Agreement.
40. ATTORNEY’S FEES, COSTS AND EXPENSES
The parties shall bear the cost of their own attorney’s fees, associated costs and all other expenses incurred in any matter relating to the enforcement of this Agreement or relating to the breach of this Agreement except as to those matters referenced in section 38 above where CONTRACTOR would owe indemnification to SURS.
41. SECTION HEADINGS
Section headings have been included in this Agreement merely for convenience of reference. They are not to be considered part of this Agreement or to be used in the interpretation hereof.
40
42. NOTIFICATION
Notices and any other communication provided for herein shall be given in writing to the contacts designated below by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, by receipted hand delivery, by courier (UPS, Federal Express, or other similar and reliable carrier), by email, or by fax showing the date and time of successful receipt. Each such notice shall be deemed to have been provided at the time it is actually received. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery, to the last business address known to the party giving notice as identified below. By giving notice, either party may change the following contact information: Contractor: CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACTOR ADDRESS CONTRACTOR CITY, STATE ZIP Attention: __________________________
Phone: (___) ______-__________
Fax: (___) ______ - __________
Email: _____________________________
SURS: State Universities Retirement System
Attention: Executive Director and General Counsel 1901 Fox Drive P.O. Box 2710 Champaign, Illinois 61820
Phone: 217-378-8825 Fax: 217-378-9801 Email: [email protected] and [email protected]
43. STATUTORY PROVISIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
By executing this contract and by signing at the end of this specific section, attests to and certifies to the following:
43.1 If CONTRACTOR is an individual, he or she certifies that he or she is not in default on an educational loan as provided in Section 3 of the Educational Loan Default Act, 5 ILCS 385/3.
43.2 CONTRACTOR certifies that it is not barred from being awarded a contract or subcontract because of a conviction or admission of guilt for bribery or for bribing an officer or employee of the State of Illinois or any other state in that officer or employee’s official capacity as provided in Section 50-1 of the Illinois Procurement Code, 30 ILCS 500/50-1.
43.3 CONTRACTOR certifies that it will provide a drug free workplace by engaging in the
41
conduct prescribed in Section 3 of the Drug Free Workplace Act, 30 ILCS 580/3.
43.4 CONTRACTOR certifies that it is not barred from contracting with SURS because of a violation of either Section 33E-3 (bid-rigging) or 33E-4 (bid-rotating) of Article 33E of the Criminal Code of 1961, 720 ILCS 5/33E.
43.5 CONTRACTOR certifies that neither it nor any substantially owned affiliated company is participating or shall participate in an international boycott in violation of the provisions of the U.S. Export Administration Act of 1979 or the regulations of the U.S. Department of Commerce promulgated under that Act.
43.6 CONTRACTOR certifies that no fees, commissions, or payments of any type have been or will be paid to any third party in connection with this contract, except as disclosed in the contract or in an exhibit thereto. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify SURS if it ever has reason to believe that this certification is no longer accurate.
43.7 To the extent Illinois law is applicable to CONTRACTOR pursuant to 775 ILCS 5/2-105, agrees to:
i. Refrain from unlawful discrimination and discrimination based on citizenship status in employment and undertake affirmative action to assure equality of employment opportunity and eliminate the effects of past discrimination;
ii. Comply with the procedures and requirements of the Illinois Department of Human Rights’ regulations concerning equal employment opportunities and affirmative action;
iii. Provide such information, with respect to its employees and applications for employment, and assistance as the Illinois Department of Human Rights may reasonably request; and
iv. Have written sexual harassment policies that shall include, at a minimum, the following information:
a. The illegality of sexual harassment;
b. The definition of sexual harassment under State law;
c. A description of sexual harassment, utilizing examples;
d. ’s internal complaint process including penalties;
e. The legal recourse, investigative and complaint process available through the Illinois Department of Human Rights and the Illinois Human Rights Commission;
f. Directions on how to contact the Illinois Department of Human Rights and the Illinois Human Rights Commission; and
g. Protection against retaliation as provided by Section 6-101 of the Illinois Human Rights Act. A copy of the policies shall be provided to the Illinois Department of Human Rights upon request.
42
43.8 To the extent it applies to CONTRACTOR and this Contract, agrees to comply with the Illinois Prevailing Wage Act, 820 ILCS 130/1, et. seq.
43.9 CONTRACTOR shall maintain, for a minimum of five (5) years after the completion of the contract, adequate books, records, and supporting documents to verify the amounts, recipients, and uses of all disbursements of funds passing in conjunction with the Contract, shall further make all such books, records and supporting documents related to the Contract available for review and audit by the internal auditor of SURS and by the Illinois Auditor General and shall cooperate fully with any audit conducted by the internal auditor of SURS and the Illinois Auditor General and will further provide the internal auditor of SURS and the Illinois Auditor General full access to all relevant materials. See section 9.1 above for additional agreement terms regarding return of documents, data and records.
43.10 CONTRACTOR agrees to notify the SURS Ethics Officer if it solicits or intends to solicit for employment any of the employees of SURS during the term of the Contract.
43.11 CONTRACTOR understands that SURS and this Contract are subject to the provisions of the Illinois Open Meetings Act (5 ILCS 120/1, et. seq.) and the Illinois Freedom of Information Act (5 ILCS 140/1, et. seq.).
Under penalties of perjury, certifies that Federal Tax ID is its correct Federal Taxpayer Identification Number. CONTRACTOR certifies that it is doing business as a(n) (please circle the applicable entity):
Individual
Sole Proprietorship
Partnership
Corporation
Not for Profit Corporation
Medical and Health Care Services Provider Corporation
Real Estate Agent
Government Entity
Tax Exempt Organization (IRC 501(a) only)
Trust or Estate
Other (please specify): ______________________________
Certified / Dated this _____________ day of ____________________________, 201____.
43
Contractor: CONTRACTOR By: _____________________________ Name: ___________________________ Title: ____________________________
44. PROJECT REPRESENTATIVES
The following individuals shall serve as project representatives for purposes of the project itself. All other notifications regarding the Agreement shall be submitted to the persons identified in Section 42. Neither representative shall be changed without ten (10) days written notice to the other party.
44.1 SURS’ Representative for the project is:
Dave Scott
Telephone Number: 217-378-9800 Email address: [email protected]
44.2 CONTRACTOR’s Representative for the project is:
AUTHORIZED SIGNATOR
Telephone Number: (___) ______ - ________ Email address: _____________________________
45. THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES
This Agreement is for the benefit of the parties to the Agreement and it does not confer any rights or privileges upon any Third Parties other than to _______________ to the extent contractual benefits may be provided to them by the contract terms contained herein.
46. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
SURS and CONTRACTOR respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors and assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the contract documents. Neither party to the contract shall assign the contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Agreement.
44
47. DULY AUTHORIZED SIGNATURES
For SURS: The undersigned, Martin M. Noven is the Executive Director of State Universities Retirement System and has such been duly authorized by SURS to sign this Agreement on behalf thereof. He and anyone he may designate in the future as being authorized to sign any amendments presented under this Agreement on behalf of SURS will have the same authority. Given the amount to be paid to CONTRACTOR under this Agreement, SURS’ Chief Financial Officer, Tara Myers and SURS’ General Counsel, Bianca Green are also authorized and required to sign this contract. For CONTRACTOR: The undersigned, ______________________ is the _________________________ of CONTRACTOR and has such been duly authorized by Contractor Authority to sign this Agreement on behalf thereof. He/She and anyone he/she may designate in the future as being authorized to sign any amendments, transaction documents, statements of work or schedules presented under this Agreement on behalf of CONTRACTOR will have the same authority. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the State Universities Retirement System of Illinois and CONTRACTOR have caused this contract to be executed with the effective date referenced on page one of this Agreement. SIGNED for and on behalf of: STATE UNIVERSITIES RETIREMENT SYSTEM Date By: Martin M. Noven Executive Director Date By: Tara R. Myers , Chief Financial Officer Date By: Bianca T. Green, General Counsel
45
SIGNED for and on behalf of: CONTRACTOR Date By: AUTHORIZED SIGNATOR _____________________________________ Print name _____________________________________ Title
46
AppendixF:ProjectScopeofWork
SURS CHILLER REPLACEMENT PROJECT
STATE UNIVERSITIES RETIREMENT SYSTEM OF ILLINOIS
CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS
1. PROJECT OBJECTIVE
Objective is to replace the existing chiller and corresponding air-cooled condenser with new replacement equipment complying with the specifications. The project also includes replacement of the existing piping as described in the construction documents. The scope of work will be performed as directed by SURS. Piping associated with the existing chiller and condenser shall be demolished per construction documents. New replacement piping associated with the new chiller and condenser shall be provided. Electrical Work complying with the Electrical Specification shall be included in the Contractor’s base bid. General Work as described in the specifications shall be included in the Contractor’s base bid.
2. SUGGESTED WORK SEQUENCE
a. Submit shop drawings and obtain approval on long lead-time items (new replacement chiller and condenser).
b. Submit project schedule. c. Demolish existing chiller and condenser. d. Demolish existing associated piping as indicated on drawings. e. Disconnect existing electrical service as shown on electrical drawings. f. Provide new vibration equipment structure for new replacement air-cooled condenser.
Provide required roof work. Refer to drawings for existing roof warranty. g. Provide new additional structural support at roof for new replacement air-cooled
condenser. h. Install new chiller and condenser. i. Provide new piping between new chiller and condenser. j. Provide new pipe and conduit support above roof. Refer to drawings for existing roof
warranty. k. Provide new power and control wiring in accordance with the construction documents. l. Provide startup of new chiller and condenser. m. Provide test and balance of the newly installed chiller and condenser including new
piping. n. Provide commissioning of new chiller and condenser.
3. SCOPE OF WORK – MECHANICAL
a. Coordinate the installation of work with other trades, such as the test and balance contractor and instrumentation and controls contractor. Refer to the construction drawings and specifications for extent of mechanical work to be provided.
b. Submit all product literature, indicating exact model numbers and quantities intended for use. See the specification section on submittals.
47
4. SCOPE OF WORK – ELECTRICAL
a. Disconnect power to existing chiller and condenser. b. Remove conduit and wire back to the source in accordance with the construction drawings
and specifications. Conduits may be reused when of appropriate size and not shared with other loads.
c. Disconnect the associated control panel. d. After the mechanical contractor has provided the new replacement chiller and condenser,
reconnect existing power and control wiring that are to be reused. Provide new per construction drawings and specifications. Refer to the chiller and condenser shop drawing for wiring diagrams.
e. Provide all electrical work per construction drawings and specifications. 5. SCOPE OF WORK – GENERAL WORK
a. Refer to the construction drawings and specifications for general work to be provided. b. Refer to the construction drawings and specifications for required roof work to be
provided. 6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Bidders can subcontract part of the work, acting as a prime Contractor, and bearing sole responsibility in the execution of the contract. Contractor shall provide all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, and materials required to complete the work specified herein and as shown on the drawings.
b. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all items and systems specified
except those that are specifically indicated as “WORK BY OTHERS.” c. The Contractor shall follow all applicable SURS specifications. d. The Contractor shall read and be totally familiar with the SURS RFP including the Project
Manual. e. Bidders are required to visit the project site to verify and familiarize themselves with actual
conditions that may affect his/her proposal. Site visits shall also be used to become familiar on how to relate the difficulties and arrangement of the work required and its limitations. Claims of extras resulting from Contractor’s failure to include, in his bid, all incidental work required for a complete installation, shall not be compensated. Arrange such visits with the Project Engineer or Site Engineer.
f. Examine all drawings and documents pertaining to this Contract. Drawings are schematic
and diagrammatic to show general arrangements, locations and interconnections of components and shows basic design. Take all field measurements and obtain all data necessary to confirm work scope without interference to that of existing. Obtain clarification from the SURS engineer for any questions concerning the nature or extent of work to be performed. Once this contract is awarded, claims of ignorance to any of these conditions shall not be allowed for extra compensations.
g. The Contractor is cautioned that drawings attached hereto and the “Scope of Work,” as
written, does not specifically list all incidental work or appurtenances required for a complete installation. The Contractor shall be held responsible to know the intent of the project and shall include in his bid the cost of all incidental work, accessories or equipment, although not mentioned or specified, but necessary for a complete installation. Any relocation work not indicated in the construction documents that will be required to complete work must be addressed at the time of bidding.
48
h. The Contractor shall note that the drawings and specifications are complementary to one another, what is called for on one is meant to be called for on all. Where conflicts exist between the specifications and/or drawings, the Contractor shall refer to the SURS Engineer to clarify and resolve the conflict before any material is purchased or work commences. Code requirements shall not be considered a minimum standard. Where Materials shown on the drawings or indicated in the specifications exceed code requirements, the plans and specifications shall govern.
i. Contractor shall be responsible for Site Safety. j. Coordinate installation of all new work with other trades. Install equipment and materials to
provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the locations of equipment and devices with access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.
k. SURS Engineer shall have the right at all times to inspect and test the work and shall for this
purpose have access to the work whenever it is in preparation or in progress. The Contractor shall provide necessary labor and proper facilities for such access, inspection and testing, and shall provide complete information concerning all materials entering into this work.
l. The Contractor shall furnish material and labor necessary to correct, at his expense,
any items considered improperly installed. m. All equipment and materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the instruction of
the manufacturer unless more stringent requirements are specified by SURS or are shown on the drawings.
n. The Contractor is responsible for all equipment on the job site until final operational acceptance
by SURS. o. The Contractor shall provide all required guarantees and certification of terms of work and
systems installed under this contract. p. The Contractor shall provide all hoisting, rigging and scaffolding for complete installation
of all specified work under this contract. q. The Contractor shall furnish and install all required equipment, piping and duct supports. The
Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous and auxiliary steel required to support any equipment provided in this contract whether shown on the drawings or not but considered necessary for the complete installation.
r. The Contractor shall ensure all SURS work permits are approved before starting work. s. Specifications and Standards referenced herein shall be made a part of this project
specification. Familiarize its content and conform to the minimum applicable requirements thereof.
t. The Contractors are not allowed in areas other than where work is taking place unless
specifically allowed by the SURS Engineer. u. No storage of materials is allowed in the building except those materials that will be used
that day, unless specifically allowed by the SURS Engineer. Excess materials will be removed at the Contractor’s expense.
v. Contractors are responsible to keep their work areas clean on a daily basis. Contractors found
not in compliance will be warned once, after which SURS will periodically perform a general housekeeping, at which time any materials left unattended in the work area will be thrown
49
away. The Contractor shall post safety instructions, provide a first aid kit, and all safety equipment including that necessary to comply with OSHA’s 10 ft. rule.
w. A designated gang box and cutting area will be identified at bid award. This will be
the only acceptable area for such activities. x. The Contractor shall field verify all routes and dimensions before fabrication. Coordinate all
work with existing field conditions. All obstructions are not shown on the drawings. Verify existing field conditions to coordinate installation with piping, plumbing, sheet metal, steel, I&C, electrical, etc.
y. Any damage to wall panels, roof, structures, etc., caused by the Contractor shall be
repaired and/or replaced by the Contractor with like materials at their expense. z. The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule within two weeks after award of
contract for review by the project team. aa. Bids shall be figured with all work performed on regular time unless indicated otherwise. If long
days will improve the time of project completion, SURS will work with the contractor for longer days during installation of new equipment.
bb. The Contractor shall attend all construction coordination meetings as scheduled by SURS
Engineer. cc. The Contractor shall notify the SURS Engineer immediately upon discovering any work
believed to be required to complete the project, but outside of their responsibilities as described in these specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall not provide additional work without written approval from the SURS Engineer in the form of a SURS Field Order.
dd. At the completion of the project the Contractor shall provide detailed red line as-built drawings
of the contract drawings to SURS. 7. SUBMITTALS
a. The Contractor shall provide electronic copies of shop drawings and product submittals for all Contractor supplied items for review and approval by Owner or Owners representative.
8. PRODUCTS
a. All materials and accessories shall conform to the specifications referenced herein.
9. EXECUTION
a. All work shall conform to the Specifications. 10. SPECIFICATIONS
a. Refer to the Project Manual for the list of Specification Sections. 11. SUBMITTAL OF PROPOSAL
a. Refer to the Project Manual for proposal submittal requirements.
12. MILESTONE SCHEDULE
a. The Contractor shall comply with the milestone schedule as set forth by SURS. END OF DOCUMENT
AppendixG:ChillerReplacementSpecifications
PROJECT MANUAL
SURS CHILLER REPLACEMENT STATE UNIVERSITIES RETIREMENT SYSTEM OF ILLINOIS CHAMPAIGN, ILLINOIS
State of Illinois
USING AGENCY: STATE UNIVERSITIES RETIREMENT SYSTEM OF ILLINOIS 1901 FOX DRIVE CHAMPAIGN, IL, 61821
BY: MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC 140 E. WASHINGTON ST. EAST PEORIA, IL 61550 MIDWEST #20180141
DATE: October 22, 2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
PROJECT MANUAL TOC - Table of Contents
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC 140 East Washington Street East Peoria, Illinois 61611 309-222-8600
PROJECT MANUAL FOR SURS CHILLER REPLACEMENT STATE UNIVERSITIES RETIREMENT SYSTEM OF ILLINOIS MIDWEST PROJECT NO. 20180141
DATE: October 22, 2018
DIVISION
00
DOCUMENT
00 01 15
TITLE
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIRMENTS
Drawings, Schedules, & Details Listing
PAGES
00 01 15-1 – 2
00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 11 13-1 – 2 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 41 00-1 – 2 00 41 06 Bid Bond 00 41 06-1 – 2 00 41 07 Product Substitution Form 00 41 07-1 – 2 00 72 20 Assignment 00 72 20-1 – 2
01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00
Project Summary
01 11 00-1 – 2 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 29 00-1 – 4 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 01 29 73-1 – 2 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 31 19-1 – 2 01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 00-1 – 2 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples 01 33 23-1 – 4 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures 01 35 16-1 – 2 01 35 53 Security 01 35 53-1 – 2 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 41 00-1 – 2 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 01 51 00-1 – 4 01 51 50 Use of Existing Facilities 01 51 50-1 – 2 01 54 00 Construction Aids 01 54 00-1 – 2 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls 01 57 19-1 – 2 01 66 00 Storage & Protection 01 66 00-1 – 2 01 73 28 Cutting & Patching 01 73 28-1 – 2 01 74 23 Final Cleaning 01 74 23-1 – 2 01 78 23 Operating & Maintenance Data 01 78 23-1 – 2 01 78 36 Extended Warranties & Bonds 01 78 36-1 – 2 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 78 39-1 – 2
23
MECHANICAL
23 00 00 23 00 05
General Requirements Selective Demolition for HVAC
23 00 00-1 – 423 00 05-1 - 6
23 05 10 Common Work Results for Heating, Ventilating, andAir Conditioning
23 05 10-1 – 2
23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13-1 – 2
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 TOC - 1 10/22/18
23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 23 05 19-1 - 223 05 23 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 05 23-1 - 223 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 29-1 - 223 05 48
23 05 53
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping andEquipment Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 48-1 - 2 23 05 53-1 - 4
23 05 93.10 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93.10-1 - 423 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 07 19-1 - 423 08 00 HVAC System Commissioning 23 08 00-1 - 1423 09 00 Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC 23 09 00-1 - 823 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 09 93-1 – 1823 20 02 HVAC Piping and Pumps 23 20 02-1 - 423 21 13 Hydronic Piping 23 21 13-1 - 223 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 23 00-1 – 223 64 16 Air Cooled Split Centrifugal Chiller 23 64 16-1 – 6
26 ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
26 00 00-1 - 6 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-1 - 4 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 – 2 26 05 29.10 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29.10-1 – 2 26 05 33.20 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.20-1 - 4 26 05 33.30 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.30-1 - 4 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 – 2 26 08 10 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 08 10-1 – 2 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-1 - 2 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13-1 - 4 26 29 25 Mechanical Equipment Connections 26 29 25-1 - 2
SPECIFIER: David L. Horton, P.E.; Midwest Engineering Associates, Inc.; Phone: 309-222-8600.
PROJECT MANUAL Table of Contents - Continued
END TOC.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest # 20180141 TOC - 2 10/22/2018
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS DOCUMENT 00 01 15 - LIST OF DRAWINGS
SHEET TITLE
HVAC:
H1.0 HVAC NOTES AND SYMBOLS HD1.1 MECHANICAL ROOM AND ROOF – HVAC DEMOLITION H1.1 MECHANICAL ROOM AND ROOF – HVAC NEW WORK H2.1 MECHANICAL CONTROLS AND SCHEDULE – BASE BID
ELECTRICAL:
ED1.1 MECHANICAL ROOM AND ROOF – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION E1.1 MECHANICAL ROOM AND ROOF – ELECTRICAL NEW WORK
ALL DRAWINGS DATED OCTOBER 15, 2018
END 00 01 15.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 01 15 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 01 15 - 2 10/22/18
BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Document 00 11 13 - Advertisement for Bids
State Universities Retirement System of Illinois will receive sealed bids for: MWEA PROJECT #: 20180141 TITLE: SURS Chiller Replacement LOCATION: State Universities Retirement System USER AGENCY: State Universities Retirement System of Illinois COUNTY: Champaign
PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Replace existing air-cooled chiller in Mechanical room and accompanying condensing unit on roof above Mechanical room as specified in contract documents.
TRADE COST RANGE BID DATE/TIME HVAC under $ 700,000 As listed in SURS RFP
BID LOCATION: State Universities Retirement System of Illinois 1901 Fox Drive Champaign, IL, 61820 Attn: Dave Scott
Minority & Female Business Subcontractor/Supplier Participation is encouraged.
Bidding Documents will be provided by SURS Procurement officer: Bid Documents are on file for reference at the following locations:
1. Request access from David Horton at [email protected] for access to the Chiller Replacement Project
2. From SURS Procurement Officer
Obtain Bidding Documents From: Midwest Engineering Associates, Inc.
140 East Washington Street East Peoria, IL, 61611 Ph: 309-222-8600
Pre-Bid Meeting: A pre-bid meeting will be held as noted in the SURS RFP document at the State Universities Retirement Systems office located at 1901 Fox Drive in Champaign, Illinois. Attendance is strongly encouraged, but not mandatory. INFORMATION TO BIDDERS: 1. Contractor and subcontractors are required to pay prevailing wages as determined by the Illinois 2. Contact the A/E to obtain electronic version of the bid documents and/or for the location of plan rooms where documents are on file.
State Universities Retirement System of Illinois Dave Scott, Chief Operating Engineer Phone: 217-378-8890 Email: [email protected]
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 11 13 - 1 10/22/2018
Attn: David Horton
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 11 13 - 2 10/22/2018
BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Document 00 41 00 - Bid Form (HVAC)
*FAILURE TO USE THE CORRECT BID FORM MAY SUBJECT THE BIDDER TO DISQUALIFICATION. Use the BID FORM located in the SURS RFP document. This form will not be submitted.
NAME OF FIRM: _
FOR HVAC WORK
BID FOR: MWEA PROJECT NUMBER: 20180141
PROJECT TITLE: SURS Chiller Replacement
BID TO: State Universities Retirement System
THE BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGES THE FOLLOWING ADDENDA: (Failure to acknowledge may cause bid rejection.)
NO. ___ , DATED ____ NO. ____ , DATED ____ NO. ____, DATED_ ___ NO. ____ , DATED ____ EACH BID SHALL INCLUDE:
A. THE BID FORMS – As shown in Appendix C. B. BID SECURITY C. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM (at Bidder’s Option)
Note: The decision to purchase the extended warranty (accept Alternative Bid 1 or 2) will be made by SURS at the time of contract award. The extended warranty may, or may not, be purchased for any of the options, depending upon its cost.
Note: Any qualifying or conditional statements included on the bid form or attached to the bid form may result in rejection of the bid unless rescinded by the bidder.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM ATTACHED: The bid allows submittals from manufacturers of “like” capacity and technology to be considered. SURS is open to possible eligible products as the preferred install conditions will be difficult to accommodate.
THE BIDDER AGREES TO:
1. Hold this bid open for 60 calendar days after bid opening date or as required in the project manual. 2. Enter into and execute a contract with SURS if awarded on the basis of this bid. 3. Comply with the Contract Documents with respect to all bonds, insurance, work requirements and schedule. 4. Complete the work in a timely manner. Once started, the work will continue without interruption until completed. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 00 - 1 10/22/2018
THE BIDDER MAKES THE FOLLOWING REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS: A surety company has agreed to issue Bonds required by the Bid Documents for this work if this bid is accepted. The Bidder is not barred from contracting with any unit of state or local government as a result of violating the bid rigging or bid rotating provisions contained in 720 ILCS 5/33E-3 & 720 ILCS 5/33E-4. The Bidder is not barred from contracting with the State of Illinois as a result of a bribery conviction per 30ILCS 505/10.2. The Bidder is not delinquent in the payment of any debt to the state per 30 ILCS 210/5. Bidder has listed all known subcontractors and suppliers on the bid form in the space provided on the bid form. The Bidder certifies that it is aware of the requirements of Public Act 95-635, 820 ILCS 130/5.5, and that, if awarded a contract, it is or will be in full compliance with the law prior to beginning work, including the requirement to file with SURS a written substance abuse plan which meets or exceeds the requirements of the Act.
END 00 41 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 00 - 2 10/22/2018
BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Document 00 41 06 – Bid Bond
as Principal, and
a corporation of the State of
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the State of Illinois as Obligee, in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the amount of the base bid for the payment of which Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, to this agreement.
Principal has submitted to Obligee a bid to enter into a written contract, for MWEA Project Number: 20180141 Division of Work: HVAC in accordance with bidding documents for the project, which contract is by reference made a part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as "the Contract".
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is that if Principal, upon acceptance by Obligee of its bid within the period of time specified for acceptance, shall comply with all post award requirements as required by the terms of the bid within the time specified after date of the Notice of Award, or in the event of the failure to comply with all post award requirements, if Principal shall pay Obligee (1) for all costs of procuring the work which exceeds the amount of its bid, or (2) shall pay Obligee the amount of this bond as liquidated damages in the event Principal is a sole bidder and after an attempt to secure other bids by re-advertising none can be obtained, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
Surety hereby agrees that its obligation shall not be impaired by any extensions of time for Obligee's acceptance or compliance with post award requirements. Surety hereby waives notice of such extensions.
Signed and sealed this day of , 20 .
CONTRACTOR SURETY
BY BY
SIGNATURE OFFICER OF THE SURETY
Title ATTEST:
Title
CORPORATE SECRETARY (Corporations only)
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
JURAT (Notary's Statement Authenticating Signature)
I, , a Notary Public in and for said county, do hereby certify that (Insert Name of Attorney-In-Fact for SURETY)
who is personally known to me to be the same person whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument on behalf of SURETY, appeared before me this day in person and acknowledged respectively, that he/she signed, sealed, and delivered said instrument as his/her free and voluntary act for the uses and purposes therein set forth.
Given under my hand and notarial seal this DAY OF A.D. 20
My commission expires
Notary Signature
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 06 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 06 - 2 10/22/18
BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Document 00 41 07 Product Substitution Form
The Bidder should include this form with the Bid Forms if a material substitution is offered at that time.
The Base Bid and Alternate Bids are based on the manufacturer as shown in the plan documents. Following is a list of substitute products which bidder proposes to furnish on this project, with the difference in price being deducted from the Base Bid or Alternate Bids.
NOTE: SURS WILL ACCEPT SUBSTITUTIONS FOR THE PROPOSED CHILLER AND APPURTENANCES WITH THE UNDERSTANDING THAT THE CONTRACTOR IS REPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT THE UNITS FIT THE AVAILABLE AREA IN THE MECHANICAL ROOM AND ON THE ROOF. ANY ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL LOAD WILL REQUIRE SIGN OFF BY AN ILLINOIS LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ANY OTHER ROOF MODIFICATIONS OR MECHANICAL ROOM MODIFICATIONS WILL REQUIRE APPROVAL OF SURS AND THE ENGINEER AND BE INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE BASE BID SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. A MAXIMUM UNIT WEIGHT FOR THE ROOF IS LISTED IN THE PLAN SET.
Bidder understands that acceptance of any proposed substitution is at SURS's option. Approval or rejection of any substitutions listed below will be indicated prior to executing the Contract.
MANUFACTURER'S NAME AND PRODUCT DEDUCT
EVALUATION. Contract award will be made in accord with the Standard Documents for Construction.
BIDDER'S NAME:
TRADE:
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 07 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 41 07 - 2 10/22/18
BIDDING & CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 00 72 20 – Assignment
ARTICLE 12: ASSIGNMENT
12.01. ASSIGNMENT AND SUPERVISION
A. SURS will assign to the Prime Contractor identified in Division 01, Section 01 11 00, SURS’s rights, in and to all contracts between SURS and other contractors.
B. When contracts are assigned, SURS retains the right to:
1. Make payments directly to the assigned contractors, subject to the terms herein provided. 2. Execute changes in the work of an assigned contractor. 3. Pursuant to the General Conditions, Article 3, paragraphs:
a. 3.03. Right to carry out the work. b. 3.04. Right to terminate the Contract. c. 3.06. Right to order acceleration. d. 3.08. Use and possession prior to completion.
C. The Prime Contractor shall manage the entire project by supervising, coordinating and expediting
the assigned contractors’ work. The Prime Contractor shall inspect the work as it is performed to assure conformance with the contract documents. The assigned contractors shall direct their project site superintendents to supervise their work in accordance with the instructions of the Prime Contractor subject to the terms herein provided. Supervision and direction of the work of all the assigned contractors by the Contractor shall not relieve the assigned contractor from his duty to supervise and direct his own work in accordance with the contract documents. 1. PROJECT SUPERINTENDENT. In accordance with the General Conditions, paragraph
5.05.B., the Prime Contractor’s superintendent shall direct the operations of his own work force and those of all assigned contractors. The Prime Contractor’s superintendent shall have not less than five years’ experience in responsible field supervision of projects of comparable size and complexity. In the event the superintendent or the Prime Contractor fails to perform his duties under the contract requirements, SURS may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove the superintendent from the project, the Prime Contractor shall provide a competent replacement.
D. Other than the duty to supervise, coordinate and expedite the work of the assigned contractors
and the entire project, the Prime Contractor will have no obligations or liability for the assigned contractor’s contracts or for the assigned contractor’s obligations for the payment of labor and materials in connection with the performance of their contracts.
E. The other contractors and the Prime Contractor agree to be bound by the provisions of this Article
12.
F. All costs and expenses incurred as a result of this Article 12 are construed to have been included in the base bid.
12.02. BOND REQUIREMENTS FOR ASSIGNMENT
A. The bonds required to be furnished under Article 6, the General Conditions shall include all the
obligations relating to this Article 12.
B. The Prime Contractor and each Assigned Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond in the sum of the full amount of his Contract covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. By execution of the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, the Contractor and his surety agree to all provisions of the Contract, including those relating to Assignment.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Prime Contractor, in the event of default by any assigned
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 72 20 - 1 10/22/18
contractor, to work in concert with SURS and the surety for the defaulted assigned contractor so as to ensure project completion in accordance with the Contract. In the event the Prime Contractor fails to act in accordance with the Contract and in concert with SURS and the surety of defaulted assigned contractor, then all expenses incurred by SURS on the project because of the Prime Contractor’s failure to properly act shall be at the loss, cost and expense of the Prime Contractor and his surety.
12.03. CHANGE ORDERS: The Prime Contractor shall review all assigned contractor’s proposals for
change and conformance with the request for change and with the contract documents; process the proposals and make its recommendation to the Architect/Engineer. For such services the Prime Contractor shall be allowed a fee of not to exceed 2-1/2% of any adjustment to the assigned contractor’s contract.
12.04. INSURANCE: Each contractor shall provide and maintain the insurance required by the General
Conditions, Article 6 except as otherwise required by Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01010.
12.05. DUTY TO INDEMNIFY: The indemnification requirements of an assigned contractor under the
General Conditions, Article 7, shall include the Prime Contractor as a party to whom indemnification is due.
12.06. PROJECT SCHEDULE: The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for the development and
maintenance of the project schedule in accordance with Division 1 and for the orderly prosecution and completion of the project work within the contract time.
12.07. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for the scheduling and giving notice for all required
inspections and testing and for the successful completion of all project work in accordance with the contract documents.
B. When the assigned contractor believes that the work or any part is substantially or finally
complete, he shall request the Prime Contractor to review the work and recommend a substantial or final completion inspection.
C. The Prime Contractor shall schedule, give notice of inspection, participate in the inspection and
recommend substantial completion and final acceptance of the work of all contractors.
12.08. PAYMENT: The Prime Contractor shall review and approve for payment all Assigned Contractor’s requests for payment in accordance with the General Conditions.
END 00 72 20.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 00 72 20 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 - Project Summary
1. GENERAL
A. STANDARD DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION: General Conditions of the Contract for Construction as described herein shall apply to this project except as noted herein.
2. GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION:
A. DESCRIPTION: Replace an existing 120 ton chiller and all required appurtenances to have
a complete and operational chiller system at the State Universities Retirement System building in Champaign, Illinois.
B. EXISTING CONDITIONS:
1. This facility will remain occupied during construction. Be advised that the continued and proper functioning of this building is critical to the safety of the occupants of this facility.
C. RELATED WORK:
1. 01 35 53 - Security 2. 01 74 23 - Final Cleaning 3. 01 78 23 - Operating & Maintenance Data 4. 01 78 36 - Extended Warranties & Bonds
3. SUBSTANCE ABUSE PREVENTION ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS ACT
A. Effective January 1, 2008, contractors and subcontractors on State projects must submit a
substance abuse plan to SURS as part of the post award process to the extent they are not party to a collective bargaining agreement which addresses substance abuse.
B. The plan must, at a minimum, meet the requirements set forth in Public Act 95-635.
4. DELINQUENT DEBT
A. The State of Illinois has instituted a policy to ensure that no vendor, or potential state vendor,
receives a state contract if that vendor owes a delinquent debt to any state agency. B. “Delinquent debt” is any cumulative amount of money totaling $1,000 owed to state agencies that
are at least 90 days past due. This includes taxes or payments of any kind. C. This policy not only covers individuals, businesses or entities that seek to enter into a state
contract, but any subcontractor employed by that individual, business or entity at the time a state contract is sought.
D. The policy also can be retroactive following a contract award. If a contract is awarded to a vendor,
and during the term of the contract the vendor or a subcontractor incurs a delinquent debt with the state, SURS will notify the vendor. At its discretion, the agency can give the vendor or subcontractor 30 days to pay the delinquent debt. If the debt is not paid during this grace period, the contract or subcontract will be cancelled.
E. Bidders are required to list all subcontractors that the vendor knows will be employed as part of a
state contract, along with all applicable Federal Employee Identification Numbers or Social Security Numbers on the bid form.
F. Before awarding a contract, SURS will check the bidder and listed subcontractors and suppliers
against the delinquent debt list in the Comptroller’s Office to determine if the bidder is eligible for a contract award. If a delinquent debt is found during the check with the Comptroller’s Office, the contract award will be denied.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 11 00 - 1 10/22/2018
5. CONTRACT TIME:
SPECIAL NOTICE - DEADLINE FOR COMPLETION. Contractor shall commence work immediately upon receipt of the Authorization to Proceed and shall submit shop drawings for equipment within 1 week of Authorization to Engineer for review. Upon Engineer’s review with no exceptions, Contractor shall order the equipment to minimize the lead time and to allow for completion of all work through Substantial Completion in accord with the contract no later than February 19, 2019. The Contractor shall complete all work in accord with the contract (Final Acceptance) no later than March 1, 2019. Contractor shall complete all work in accordance with the construction schedule on sheet H2.1. Contractor shall submit a construction schedule at the Pre-Construction meeting detailing equipment lead times and planned demolition and installation dates. Adjustments to the final completion schedule will be allowed depending on equipment lead times. SURS reserves the right to direct the date on which this work is to commence based on acceptable maximum ambient daytime high forecast temperature(s).
6. CONTRACT(S):
Construct project under single HVAC contract.
7. PRE-BID CONFERENCE.
Pre-bid conference to be held on November 6th at 10:00 AM, attendance is optional. The pre-bid meeting will be held at SURS, 1901 Fox Drive, Champaign, Illinois. All subcontractors who plan to perform work on the project are strongly encouraged to attend the meeting and walk-thru.
8. BID SECURITY
Bid security must be submitted with each bid equal to 10 percent of the base bid and must be in the form of a bid bond, certified check, cashier’s check or bank draft. Refer to Article 00 41 06 of this specification booklet.
9. BUILDERS RISK INSURANCE, DESIGNATED PURCHASER. Contractor shall purchase and
maintain builder’s risk insurance, with State Universities Retirement System of Illinois named as co-insured, in accord with General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement or any damage due to contractor’s negligence.
END 01 11 00. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 11 00 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 29 00 - Payment Procedures
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B. Related Requirements: 1. 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Schedule
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect/Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later
than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3. Sub-schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.
4. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide sub-schedules showing values coordinated with each element.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values similar to the AIA Document format. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 00 - 1 10/22/18
b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-
hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity.
9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect/Engineer and paid for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the fifteenth of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by
Architect.
D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 or approved equal as form for Applications for Payment.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 00 - 2 10/22/18
E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect/Engineer and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.
F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect/Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether
or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.
H. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
I. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect/Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
J. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
K. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 00 - 3 10/22/18
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.
4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.
L. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
M. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
N. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" or approved
equal. 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" or approved equal. 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment" or approved equal. 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 29 00
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 00 - 4 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 29 73 – Schedule Of Values
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Mechanical Contractor: 1. Submit Schedule of Values to Owner/Engineer at least fifteen (15) business days prior to
submitting first application for payment. 2. Support values given with data that will substantiate their correctness. 3. Use approved Schedule of Values as only basis for application for payment.
B. Payment for materials stored on or off site will be limited to those materials listed in Schedule of
Values. For payment, the actual invoice for the materials stored will be required.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures 2. 01 32 00 – Construction Progress Schedule
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTAL
A. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on a standard form.
B. Use Project Manual Table of Contents as basis of format for listing costs of work.
1.4 PREPARATION
A. Itemize separate line item cost for each of following cost items: 1. Overhead and profit 2. Bonds 3. Insurance 4. General Requirements
B. Itemize separate line item cost for work specified in each section of the specifications. Identify
work of: 1. Contractor’s own labor forces 2. All subcontractors 3. All major suppliers of products or equipment
C. Break down installed costs into:
1. Delivered cost of product, with taxes paid 2. Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit
D. For each line item which has installed value of more than $500, provide separate CSV entry
including contractor, subcontractor, supplier, specification section number, description of work or material, quantity, unit price, scheduled value, and percentage of contract.
E. Round off figures as appropriate to project size.
A. Make sum of total costs of all items listed in Schedule equal to total contract sum.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 73 - 1 10/22/18
G. Submit separate Schedule of Values for clearly defined stages.
1.5 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL
A. After review by Owner, revise and resubmit Schedule as directed.
B. Follow original submittal procedure.
1.6 DISTRIBUTION
A. After approving Schedule of Values, Owner will distribute copies to the prime contractor.
1.7 UPDATE
A. Update Schedule of Values when change of subcontractor, supplier, product, or equipment occurs.
END 01 29 73.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 29 73 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Each Contractor: 1. Attend specified meetings 2. Ensure attendance of subcontractors and suppliers as specified or directed.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 – Project Summary of Work 2. 01 29 73 - Schedule of Values 3. 01 32 00 - Construction Progress Schedule 4. 01 33 23 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples 5. 01 35 53 - Security Procedures 6. 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data 7. 01 78 36 – Extended Warranties & Bonds 8. 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. SURS will schedule after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance:
1. SURS Project Manager, FEP Official. 2. Architect/Engineer/and his consultants 3. Contractor(s) 4. Major subcontractors of all contractor(s)
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Project Directory: a. Major subcontractors, etc.
2. Critical work sequencing, scheduling (See Section 01 32 00). 3. Designation of responsible personnel 4. Interrelation and coordination of contractors 5. Establish chain of authority 6. Processing of field decisions and change orders 7. Adequacy of distribution of contract documents 8. Submittals: (See Section 01 33 23)
a. Schedules b. Shop drawings, product data and samples c. Test reports d. Manufacturer’s certification of products e. Schedule of values
9. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents 11. Use of premises:
a. Office and storage areas b. Access c. SURS’s requirements
12. Safety and first aid procedures 13. Security (See Section 01 35 53). 14. Housekeeping procedures (See Section 01 74 23). 15. Construction Trailer (See Section 01 74 00). 16. Pay Meetings, including dates, time, and location. 17. A/E Observation. 18. Barriers (See Section 01 56 00).
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 31 19 - 1 10/22/18
19. Access Roads (See Section 01 55 00). 20. Construction Aids (See Section 01 54 00). 21. Construction Photographs (See Section 01 32 33). 22. Temporary Utilities (See Section 01 51 00).
1.4 PAYMENT AND PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. SURS/Engineer will schedule and administer payment, progress, and coordination meetings.
1. Prepare agenda 2. Distribute written notice and agenda of regular meetings prior to meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Record minutes; include significant proceedings and decision. 5. Distribute copies of minutes to participants after meetings.
B. Architect/Engineer will ascertain that work is expedited consistent with construction schedule and
Contract.
C. Attendance: 1. SURS 2. Engineer 3. Contractor 4. Subcontractors and suppliers (if required)
D. Minimum agenda:
1. Review, approve minutes of previous meeting 2. Review work progress since last meeting; review schedule. 3. Review applications for payment 4. Status of Pending RFPCO’s.
1.5 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Prime Contractor/Engineer will schedule and administer coordination meetings.
1. Prepare agenda 2. Distribute written notice and agenda of meetings in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings 4. Preside at meetings 5. Record minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Distribute copies of minutes of meetings to participants and SURS after meeting
B. Attendance:
1. Engineer 2. Prime Contractor 3. Subcontractors and suppliers as pertinent to agenda
C. Minimum agenda:
1. Review, approve minutes of previous meeting 2. Review work progress since last meeting 3. Note field observations, problems and decisions 4. Identify problems which impede planning progress 5. Review off-site fabrication problems 6. Develop corrective measures and procedures to maintain/regain schedule. 7. Discuss maintenance of construction schedule 8. Plan progress during next work period 9. Review coordination problems. 10. Review submittal schedules, expedite to maintain schedule 11. Maintaining of quality and work standards 12. Review changes proposed by SURS for:
a. Effect on construction schedule b. Effect on completion date
END 01 31 19.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 31 19 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 32 00 - Construction Schedule
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE:
A. The contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed project schedule as described below.
B. The project schedule shall be the contractor’s working schedule; used to execute the work and record and report actual progress. It shall show how the contractor plans to complete the work within the contract time and meet any contractually specified intermediate milestone dates.
1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 – Project Summary 2. 01 29 00 – Payment Procedures 3. 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values 4. 01 31 19 – Project Meetings 5. 01 33 23 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
1.03. FORM OF SCHEDULE
A. The project schedule shall be in the form of an activity oriented network diagram (Critical
Path Method). Precedence format is not acceptable. The schedule shall be mathematically analyzed initially and at every update or revision and tabulation for each activity shall include: 1. Preceding and following events by number. 2. Activity description and duration. 3. Earliest start and finish calendar dates for each activity. 4. Latest start and finish calendar dates. 5. Actual start and finish calendar dates
B. The schedule shall provide sufficient detail and clarity so that the contractor can plan and
control the work and SURS and the A/E can readily monitor and follow the progress of all portions of the work. The critical activities must be clearly shown. The degree of detail must be satisfactory to the A/E and SURS.
1.04. CONTENTS OF SCHEDULE
A. The schedule must be inclusive of all installation tasks of the work.
B. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and material samples as well as delivery dates of major
equipment shall be included in the project schedule.
C. Activity duration shall be in whole working days.
1.05. UPDATING
A. The project schedule shall be updated bi-weekly (if necessary).
B. Actual activity completion dates shall be reported and recorded on the schedule.
C. Progress on uncompleted activities shall be reported.
D. Projected completion dates and activities shall be reviewed and revised if necessary. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 32 00 - 1 10/22/2018
1.06. REPORTS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days of the Authorization to Proceed, the contractor shall submit the project schedule to
the A/E and SURS.
B. Three (3) days prior to the pay/progress meeting, the contractor shall submit the current updated schedule to the A/E and SURS.
C. The schedule shall be presented on 11" by 17" sheets. Each sheet shall be clearly titled.
Intermediate milestones shall be clearly indicated.
D. A management narrative report indicating the progress of the work, any revisions since last reporting period, any lost time required to be made up and the contractors' plan to maintain the schedule and meet the milestone dates and contract completion will accompany the updated schedule. The report will identify any potential delays and problem areas and their impact on project completion.
1.07. Reviews
A. The A/E and SURS shall review and may comment on the schedule at the pay/progress meeting.
They may also attend the update meetings. The contractor(s) shall revise the schedule as directed by the A/E for compliance with the requirements herein.
B. Payment and reduction of retainage may be denied by SURS for failure to submit a proper
schedule and maintaining work progress according to the project schedule.
C. Neither the A/E's nor SURS's review and/or comments shall indicate approval/disapproval of the schedule. Since the schedule is dependent on the contractors' proprietary information and commitments, the A/E and SURS cannot and will not warrant the schedule to be correct and sufficient to meet the required contract dates.
END 01 32 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 32 00 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 33 23 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor shall make submittals to A/E in accordance with this Section. The Contractor shall maintain a master list of submittals.
1.02. COORDINATION
A. Review assigned contractors' submittals within 3 business days.
1. Verify field dimensions 2. Verify compliance with contract requirements
B. Certify review.
C. Transmit reviewed and Contractor stamped submittals to Engineer (A/E).
1.03. DEFINITIONS
A. Shop drawings: Shop drawings are original drawings prepared by contractor, subcontractor, sub-
subcontractor, supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection details. 1. Prepared by qualified detailer. 2. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on contract drawing. 3. Reproductions for submittals: Full size drawings that do not require any special equipment for
reproduction and copying. 4. One electronic copy is required to be submitted to the A/E. Contractor is responsible for
reproducing any paper copies they require, and as outlined elsewhere in this specification.
B. Product data 1. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings, edited to fit this project. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts,
illustrations and other standard descriptive data. a. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models. b. Show dimensions and clearances. c. Show wiring diagrams and controls.
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Number of submittals required: B. One electronic copy is required to be submitted to the A/E. Contractor is responsible for
reproducing any paper copies they require, and as outlined elsewhere in this specification. 1. Product data: Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires for
distribution plus one (1) copy which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 2. Samples: Two identified samples (three for color selections) to be furnished unless stated
otherwise in the Project Manual.
C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. The number of shop drawings, product data and samples submitted. 5. Notification of deviations from Contract 6. Other pertinent data
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 33 23 - 1 10/22/2018
D. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates 2. Project title and number 3. Names of:
a. Engineer b. Subcontractor c. Supplier d. Manufacturer e. Separate detailer when pertinent
4. Identification of product or material 5. Relation to adjacent structure or material 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Specification section and page number 8. Specified standards, such as ASTM number or ANSI 9. Identification of previously approved deviation(s) from contract documents. 10. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of field
measurements and compliance with Contract.
1.05. RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
A. Resubmit all shop drawings, product data, and samples as requested by the A/E.
B. Shop Drawings 1. Revise initial drawings as directed and resubmit in accordance with submittal procedures. 2. Indicate on drawings all changes which have been made.
C. Product data and samples: Submit new data and samples as specified for initial submittal.
D. Make all resubmittals within 3 business days of receipt of request.
1.06. DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW
A. The Contractor will distribute copies of shop drawings and product data to: 1. Contractor’s file 2. Job site file 3. Record documents file 4. Subcontractors 5. Suppliers/Fabricators
B. Distribute samples as directed in accordance with contract documents.
1.07. RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission to the next level of
authority.
B. Verify: 1. Field dimensions 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data
C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of:
1. The work 2. The contract documents 3. The work of subcontractors
D. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by Architect/Engineer's review of submittals.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 33 23 - 2 10/22/18
E. Prior to submission, notify Architect/Engineer and Using Agency in writing of all proposed
deviations in submittals from contract requirements. Substitution of materials or equipment may only be approved by change order.
F. Do not begin any work which requires submittals without Architect/Engineer's approval.
G. After Engineer's review, make response required by Engineer's stamp and distribute copies. Indicate by transmittal that copy of approved data has been delivered to installer.
1.08. ENGINEER'S DUTIES
A. Review submittals within reasonable promptness and in accord with schedule.
B. Review for project design concept and Compliance with contract documents.
C. Review all requests for proposed deviations. Obtain SURS concurrence and respond to Contractor's request.
D. Affix stamp, date and initials or signature certifying to review of submittal, and with instructions for
contractor response.
E. Return submittals to sender for response or distribution.
1.09. SCHEDULE
A. Specified submittals 1. See the following pages. Using Agency or the Architect/Engineer may require additional
submittals at any time.
B. Nomenclature for Submittal Schedule: 1. ITR: Inspections, Test Reports, Procedures 2. MC: Manufacturer’s Certifications 3. MI: Manufacturer’s Instructions 4. OMD: Operating & Maintenance Data 5. PD: Product Data 6. SAM: Samples 7. SCH: Schedules 8. SD: Shop Drawings 9. SP: Spare Parts 10. WB: Warranties & Bonds
C. CONTRACTOR:
ITR
MC
MI
MD
OM
D
PD
SA
M
SC
H
SD
SP
WB
23 05 00 - General Requirements for HVAC
X
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 33 23 - 3 10/22/2018
C. CONTRACTOR:
ITR
MC
MI
MD
OM
D
PD
SA
M
SC
H
SD
SP
WB
23 09 13 - Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC
X X X
23 05 23 – General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
X X
X
23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation X X
X
23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps X X
X
23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping X X
X
23 23 00 – Refrigerant Piping X X
X
23 63 13 – Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
X X
X
23 64 16 – Centrifugal Water Chillers X X
X
2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3. EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END 01 33 23.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 33 23 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 35 16 - Alteration Project Procedures
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE:
A. Contractor: 1. Coordinate work of employees and subcontractors. 2. Schedule elements of remodeling and renovation work to expedite completion. 3. Schedule noisy or hazardous work before 7:00 AM or after 6:00 PM to avoid problems with
SURS’s operations. 4. In addition to demolition, cut, move or remove existing construction to provide access or to allow
remodeling and new work to proceed. Include: a. Repair or remove hazardous or unsanitary conditions. b. Remove abandoned piping, conduit and wiring. c. Remove unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as abandoned
furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete.
d. Clean surfaces. Remove surface finishes to install new work and finishes. 5. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material,
with a neat transition to adjacent new construction. 6. SURS has complete authority to direct contractor’s work.
1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 01 32 00 - Construction and Progress Schedules 3. 01 35 53 - Security 4. 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities 5. 01 51 50 - Use of Existing Facilities 6. 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls 7. 01 73 28 - Cutting & Patching 8. 01 74 23 - Final Cleaning
1.03. SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES
A. Submit a detailed sub-schedule for alterations work, coordinated with Construction Schedule.
1.04. ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION
A. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, plaster or metals, by methods to terminate surfaces in a
straight line at a natural point of division.
B. Protect existing and new work from weather and temperature extremes. 1. Maintain existing interior work above 60°F. 2. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control to prevent damage to
remaining existing work and to new work. 3. Contractor shall submit weekly, daily documentation on temperature and humidity readings in
interior and exterior work areas. Documentation shall be kept on site for verification.
C. Note: Items of construction, furnishings and articles having a historic or private value discovered during progress of the work shall remain in SURS’s possession and ownership. 1. Promptly notify Engineer. 2. Protect items from damage from weather and work. 3. Inventory all items 4. Engineer will promptly transmit SURS’s decision for disposition of discovery. 5. Store items to be retained by using agency in a safe, dry place on site. Dispose of items which
the using agency releases.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 35 16 - 1 10/22/2018
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. SALVAGED MATERIALS
A. Contractor to scrap all materials. Materials to be removed within three days. B. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed materials to replace damaged work, when material is
not readily obtainable on current market. 1. Use particular care in removal and salvage of all materials and inventory all items. 2. Store salvaged items in a dry, secure place on site. 3. Items not specified for use in repair work shall become responsibility of contractor for proper
disposal. 4. Do not use salvaged or used material in new construction except with prior written authorization
from Engineer. 2.02. MATERIALS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. Ensure that work is complete:
1. Provide same materials or types of construction as that in existing structure, to patch, extend or match existing work.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
3.02. PERFORMANCE. Patch and extend existing work using skilled craftsmen capable of matching
existing quality of workmanship. For patched or extended work, provide quality equal to that specified for new work.
3.03. ADJUSTMENTS
A. Where work is performed, patch floors, walls and ceilings with finish materials to match
existing as closely as possible. 3.04. DAMAGED SURFACES
A. Patch and replace all portions of existing finished surfaces found to be damaged, lifted, discolored or showing other imperfections, with matching material. 1. Provide adequate support prior to patching the finish. 2. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform color
and texture over entire surface. 3. When existing surface cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
3.05. TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK
A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance as closely as possible.
3.06. CLEANING
A. Perform construction cleaning as specified in 01 74 23. 1. Clean User occupied areas daily. 2. Clean all spillage, overspray and heavy dust collections in User occupied areas immediately.
B. At completion of work of each craft, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive crafts. Roof to be clear of debris at all times.
C. At completion of alterations work in each area, provide final cleaning in accord with 01 74 23 and return space to a condition suitable for use of User.
END 01 35 16.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 35 16 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 35 53 - Security
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor: 1. Protect work, stored materials and construction equipment from theft and vandalism. 2. Protect premises from entry by unauthorized persons. 3. Comply with requirements for SURS control of egress. 4. Protect SURS’s operations at site from theft, vandalism or damage from Contractor’s work or
employees.
1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 31 19 – Project Meetings 2. 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities 3. 01 66 00 - Storage & Protection
1.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification to each person authorized to enter project premises, showing: a. Personal photograph b. Name of individual and assigned number c. Employer’s name d. Expiration date B. Require that identification badges be displayed by all persons entering, leaving or on premises. C. Exclude improperly identified persons from site.
1.05. ENTRANCE CONTROL
A. Provide control of all persons and vehicles entering and leaving project site.
1. Require display of proper identification by each person. 2. Allow no visitors except with issuance of temporary identification. 3. Maintain log of all visitors.
B. All workers on site to sign in with SURS daily. A visitation badge will be issued by SURS to
workers.
C. Workers will only be allowed in mechanical room and on roof above. Workers will not be allowed in other areas of the building.
D. SURS will control deliveries and vehicles related to its own operations. E. All contractor/construction personnel are to be bonded for this project.
END 01 35 53.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 35 53 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 35 53 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor complies with all laws, rules and regulations governing the work. 1. When Contractor observes that contract documents are at variance with specified codes,
notify Engineer in writing immediately. Engineer will process changes in accord with General Conditions.
2. When Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that the work is contrary to such laws, rules and regulations, and fails to so notify the Engineer, Contractor shall pay all costs arising there from. However, it will not be the Contractor’s primary responsibility to make certain that the contract documents are in accord with such laws, rules, and regulations.
1.02. DEFINITIONS & ABBREVIATIONS
A. Definitions: 1. Dates: Reference Codes, Regulations and Standards are the issue current at date of bidding
documents unless otherwise specified. 2. Codes: Codes are rules, regulations, or statutory requirements of government agencies. 3. Standards: Standards are requirements set by authorities, custom or general consent and
established as accepted criteria.
B. Abbreviations: 1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. AGCI Associated General Contractors in Illinois 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute 4. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers 5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials. 6. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (Federal) 7. FED Federal Agencies 8. FM Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation 9. IAGO Illinois Attorney General’s Office 10. IBC International Building Code 11. IDOL Illinois Department of Labor 12. IDPH Illinois Department of Public Health 13. IEPA Illinois Environmental Protection Agency 14. IMC International Mechanical Code 15. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 16. OSFM Office of State Fire Marshal 17. IBC International Building Code 18. IMC International Mechanical Code 19. IECC International Energy Conservation Code 20. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Architect/Engineer has designed the project with full knowledge of code requirements and has copies of all specified codes available for Contractor’s inspection.
B. Contractor:
1. Ensure that copies of specified codes and standards are readily available to Contractor’s personnel. Copies are available at Contractor’s expense from source or publisher.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 41 00 - 1 10/22/2018
2. Ensure that Contractor’s personnel are familiar with workmanship and installation requirements of specified codes and standards.
1.04. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Source and requirements: 1. State of Illinois
a. Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, as amended (30 ILCS 565/1 et. seq.). b. Illinois Purchasing Act, as amended (30 ILCS 505/1 et. seq.)
2. IDPH: a. Illinois State Plumbing Code. (2009) (with amendments) b. Illinois Asbestos Abatement Act (105 ILCS 105/1 et. seq.). c. Rules and Regulations for the Asbestos Abatement Act - Title 77, ch. I, subch. p. Part
855. 3. IDPR: Illinois Roofing Industry Licensing Act, as amended (225 ILCS 335/1 et. seq.). 4. IEPA:
a. Noise Pollution Standards. (2003) b. Hazardous Waste Crane and Hoisting Equipment Operators Licensing Act, 225 ILCS
220/1 et. seq. 5. IBC: International Building Code 2012 6. IMC: International Mechanical Code 2012 7 . OSFM:
a. Illinois Rules and Regulations for Fire Prevention and Safety, NFPA 101 8. STANDARDS:
a. ANSI No. C-2, National Electrical Safety Code, b. ASHRAE No. 62.99, Standard for Natural and Mechanical Ventilation c. ASHRAE No. 90.1, Energy Conservation in New Building Design d. ASHRAE No. 15, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. e. NFPA:
1. National Fire Codes, current edition 2. National Electrical Code, current edition 3. Chapter 101, Life Safety, current edition
f. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) g. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
B. The Architect/Engineer or SURS may reference other codes or standards throughout the Project
Manual when deemed appropriate for proper compliance with regulatory requirements.
END 01 41 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 41 00 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE. Designated contractor provide and maintain specified temporary utilities during construction period.
A. HVAC Contractor provides:
1. Toilets. 2. Telephone Service and Telephones. 3. Payment of all utility, telephone, and fuel bills, except charges specifically identified as the
responsibility of other Contractors. 4. Temporary Ventilation and smoke exhaust. 5. All utilities required in excess of those specified, or exceed capacity of existing or permanent
system(s). 6. Hoses and fittings from temporary standpipes or water service connection. 7. Drinking water for his own forces.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 – Project Summary
B. Furnished by others:
1. SURS will authorize use of existing facilities or services for temporary use. a. Electrical power service b. Work, security, safety lighting c. Water service
2. SURS will pay all costs of consumables used for construction purposes for utilities it furnishes.
3. Contractor requiring SURS furnished services provide and pay for extension or modification of services to perform the work, and for restoration of services at completion of work.
4. Parking will be provided by SURS. Contractor and workers are to park in the far Northwest corner of SURS’s lot.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Temporary Heat: Provision, operation and maintenance of approved portable heating devices
including costs of fuel. From start of construction until the structure has been certified as substantially complete and the permanent system, including permanent metered fuel line (except electric) is, in the Architect/Engineer’s and installing contractor’s opinion, sufficiently completed to allow safe operation, and SURS gives written authorization for its use.
B. Temporary Ventilation: Provision, operation and maintenance of approved portable fans, louvers,
ductwork, dampers necessary from start of construction until structure has been certified as substantially complete, and the permanent system is in the Architect/Engineer’s and installing contractor’s opinion, sufficiently completed to allow safe operation, and SURS gives written authorization for its use.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF UTILITY SYSTEMS
A. HVAC System: 1. Provide a specified heating in enclosed areas throughout construction period to:
a. Facilitate progress of work b. Protect work and products against dampness and cold c. Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces d. Provide specified ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish materials.
2. Heat field offices for SURS’s representative and Architect/Engineer. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 00 - 1 10/22/18
3. Minimum heating temperatures: a. 24 hours a day: 45 degrees F. b. 24 hours a day during placing, setting and curing of cementitious materials: In accord
with specification section for each product. c. 24 hours a day, 65 degrees F, 48 hours prior to and during placing of interior finishes;
woodwork, resilient floors, carpet, painting and finishing. d. 24 hours a day after application of interior finishes: 65°F.
B. Ventilating System:
1. Provide specified temporary ventilating in enclosed areas throughout construction period to: a. Facilitate progress of work. b. Protect work and products against dampness and heat. c. Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces. d. Provide suitable ventilation for installation and curing of finish materials. e. Provide adequate ventilating to meet health regulations for safe working environment f. Prevent hazardous accumulation of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas
occupied during construction 2. Duration of ventilating operations:
a. At all times personnel occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements.
b. Continue operation of ventilating system after cessation of work to assure removal of harmful elements.
C. Electrical system:
1. Provide and maintain specified primary electric power system throughout specified construction needs throughout construction period. a. Provide main distribution panel, complete with meter:
(1) Capacity of: (a) volts (b) amperes (c) phase (d) Hertz
(2) Circuit protected feeders for: (a) Operation and testing of heating system (except electric heating). (b) Operation and testing of ventilation system (except electric chillers). (c) Pumping, dewatering. (d) Specified secondary power centers. (e) Temporary lighting.
(3) All other connections are to be made at secondary power centers. 2. Provide secondary power centers for miscellaneous hand tools and equipment used in
construction work. a. Provide weatherproof distribution box with grounded outlets: b. Provide circuit protection for each circuit. c. Provide ground fault protection for each circuit. d. Each contractor and each subcontractor using the secondary power centers shall provide
their own grounded, UL listed extension cords and other accessories from secondary power centers to the point of operation.
3. Contractors who require primary power, secondary power centers or service connections in excess of the specified may, at their option: a. Make arrangements with Electrical Contractor for excess service and pay all associated
costs there, including consumables, or b. Make arrangements with Power Company for separate service and pay all costs thereof,
including consumables.
D. Lighting: 1. Provide temporary lighting for:
a. Construction needs b. Safety lighting c. Security lighting
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 00 - 2 10/22/18
2. Security lighting: a. Within the buildings, illuminate all stairways, corridors and entrances 24 hours per day. b. Outside the building(s) provide:
(1) An illuminated route for site entrance to project area for security guard or emergency access.
(2) Illumination of all main electrical switching equipment, other equipment for which emergency access is specified.
3. Safety lighting: a. Provide watts over barriers and other obstacles which are not apparent as safety
hazards. 4. Basic requirements, all lighting:
a. Lamps: (1) Covered with safety guard or deeply recessed in reflector. (2) Not suspended by their electric cords unless cord and fixture designed for that
purpose. 5. Contractors or subcontractors who require lighting in excess of that specified: Make
arrangements with Electrical Contractor and pay all costs thereof.
E. Water service: 1. Provide and maintain temporary water service connection throughout construction period.
a. For construction purposes b. For other purposes:
(1) Cleaning c. Non-potable water:
(1) Use only where permitted. (2) Identify outlets for non-potable water with signs to indicate clearly that water is unsafe.
Do not use for drinking, washing or cooking purposes. 2. Water Source:
a. Supplier: SURS.
F. Toilets: 1. Provide temporary toilet facilities for use of all workmen and authorized parties throughout
construction period.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Only on SURS’s prior written authorization, obtain: 1. Permits and inspections required by (governing authorities -identify). 2. Temporary easements required across property other than that of SURS (at Contractors
expense). 1.6 USE OF PERMANENT SYSTEMS FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A. Obtain SURS’s prior written authorization. Contractor’s request for authorization shall indicate:
1. Reason for use 2. Conditions of use 3. Which parts of system may be used 4. Modifications necessary 5. Isolation of elements not authorized for use
B. Modifications necessary shall be at contractor’s expense, since use of permanent systems is for
contractor’s benefit.
C. Upon completion of need to use permanent system, or when directed by Architect/Engineer restore permanent system to specified condition prior to substantial completion. 1. Provide all new filters in heating and ventilating systems 2. Replace all burned out or defective lamps 3. Repair or restore all damaged parts or components 4. Clean all ducts and coils
D. SURS’s authorization for use of permanent systems will not relieve Contractor’s responsibility for
warranties in accordance with the General Conditions.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 00 - 3 10/22/18
E. The above does not prohibit installing contractor from normal test and check out of system.
1.7 USE OF SURS’S EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Make all arrangements with SURS’s representative.
B. Modify, supplement, and extend system to meet temporary utility requirements for project, subject
to approval of Architect/Engineer and SURS.
C. Limitations: 1. Do not overload systems. When project requirements exceed system capacity, provide
separate system to meet needs. 2. Prevent interference with SURS’s normal use of system.
D. Maintain strict supervision of use of temporary facilities.
1. Enforce conformance with SURS’s regulations 2. Use only designated facilities, systems or portions thereof.
E. Upon completion of need to use existing systems, or when directed by Architect/Engineer, restore
existing systems to specified permanent condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS. May be new or used, but shall be adequate for purposes used, shall not create
unsafe or unsanitary conditions, nor violate specified codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Heating and Ventilating: Locate units to meet project progress, and as directed by Engineer Avoid interference with: 1. Work or traffic areas 2. Materials handling or storage areas 3. Stairwells, access ramps and ladders
B. Electrical:
1. Do not run branch circuits on floor or on ground. 2. Verify proper operation of all safety devices.
C. Water service:
1. Do not run piping on floor or on ground. 2. Provide drip pan under each water service connection located within building. 3. Provide insulation, or other means, to prevent pipes from freezing. 4. When necessary to maintain pressure, provide temporary pumps, tanks and compressors.
3.2 REMOVAL
A. Upon SURS’s prior written authorization, completely remove temporary materials and equipment.
B. Repair all damage caused by temporary utilities’ installation. Restore to original conditions.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance of permanent system when used for construction purposes: 1. Permanent systems shall be maintained by installing contractor so as to prevent any damage
thereto.
END 01 51 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 00 - 4 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 51 50 - Use of Existing Facilities
1. GENERAL
1.01. The project will be construction at an occupied facility. This Section governs the Contractor’s use of existing facilities. These requirements supplement the Standard Conditions.
1.02. State Universities Retirement System will occupy area(s) to continue normal operation of the
facility.
1.03. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor provides: 1. Scheduling 2. Construction aids 3. Temporary enclosures and barriers 4. Close-out
1.04. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 01 35 53 - Security 3. 01 66 00 - Storage & Protection 4. 01 74 23 - Final Cleaning
2. EXECUTION
2.01. SCHEDULING
A. Schedule the work to allow the SURS to occupy and use the building without encumbrance or
hindrance from construction activities. 1. Each stage of work; occupancy dates of areas. 2. Date of Substantial Completion for each area of work.
B. Schedule early completion of designated area(s) for SURS’ usage prior to substantial
completion of entire project:
C. Schedule noisy or hazardous work to avoid problems with SURS’s operations. SURS has authority over scheduling of this work.
2.02. SECURITY AND SITE REGULATIONS
A. See section 01 35 53 – Security
B. Radios will not be allowed on site.
2.03. CONSTRUCTION AIDS except as noted, Contractor provide and maintain construction aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of work.
2.04. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND BARRIERS - Contractor:
A. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from existing building and from areas
occupied by SURS.
B. Provide and maintain suitable barriers to prevent unauthorized entry, and to protect the work.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 50 - 1 10/22/2018
2.05. CLOSEOUT
A. Upon completion of need to use existing user-provided facilities, or when directed by Architect/Engineer, restore each to original or specified condition.
B. At completion of work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable
for use of User.
END 01 51 50.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 51 50 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 54 00 - Construction Aids
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor: Provide and maintain constructions aids and equipment for common use and to facilitate execution of the work:
1. Chutes. 2. Platforms. 3. Railings. 4. Ramps. 5. Runways. 6. Stairs. 7. Temporary enclosures. 8. Hoists and Cranes
B. Contractor: Provide and maintain for his own forces all other construction aids required to complete
this work.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS. Materials may be new or used. Comply with specified codes and standards.
2.02. CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings for use by construction personnel.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. PREPARATION
A. Consult with Architect/Engineer, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work.
3.02. REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment and services:
1. When construction needs can be met by authorized use of permanent construction or when authorized by the A/E.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Repair all tire track
marks left in yard by crane, and clean any fluids left by crane.
C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition.
END 01 54 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 54 00 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 54 00 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. HVAC Contractor: 1. Provide controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and related areas
under the Contractor’s control. 2. Remove physical evidence of temporary controls at completion of work or as directed.
1.2 NOISE CONTROL
A. Noise shall be kept to reasonable levels for the project.
1.3 DUST CONTROL
A. Provide dust control materials to minimize dust from construction operations. Prevent air-borne
dust from dispersing into the atmosphere.
1.4 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Prevent contaminations of soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
B. Provide equipment and personnel, perform emergency measures to contain all spillages, and to
remove contaminated soils or liquids. 1. Excavate and dispose of all contaminated earth off-site. Replace with suitable compacted fill
and topsoil.
C. Take measures necessary to prevent pollutants from entering public waters. 1. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals or other such substances adjacent to
streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers.
D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. 1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere.
E. If a spill occurs, contractor is responsible for all fines and restoration to existing conditions.
F. If as a result of actionable environmental incident, contractor shall be liable for any fines levied by
a regulatory agency.
END 01 57 19.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 57 19 - 1 10/22/18
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 57 19 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 66 00 - Storage & Protection
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor makes arrangements with SURS’s Representative for storage of materials and equipment to be installed in project. Protection and security for stored materials and equipment, on and off site is solely contractor’s responsibility. See section 01 35 53 for additional requirements.
1.02. OFF-SITE AUTHORIZATION. Payment for materials/equipment stored off-site will be permitted
only on SURS’s prior written authorization.
1.03. SUBMITTALS.
A. In accordance with 01 33 23, submit: 1. Request for allocation of storage space. 2. List of materials and equipment to be stored. 3. Proposed location for storage. 4. Special storage requirements. 5. Schedule of anticipated storage dates.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. PROTECTIVE MATERIALS
A. For duration of storage period, provide materials which will provide proper protection against the elements or other harmful environmental conditions.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. LOCATION
A. Where authorized by Engineer or SURS.
B. Contractor will resolve conflicts in storage requirements of all trades.
3.02. PREPARATION.
A. Fill and grade sites for temporary storage sheds to provide drainage.
3.03. INSTALLATION
A. Mount fire extinguishers in prominent locations with clear access to use.
B. Mount identifying signs adjacent to entrance doors, in conspicuous locations.
3.04. MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
A. Provide continuous maintenance for all temporary structures.
3.05. REMOVAL
A. Remove all temporary storage contents and utilities, at completion of construction activities, or as
directed by the Architect/Engineer.
END 01 66 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 66 00 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 66 00 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 73 28 - Cutting & Patching
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor: Provide final cleaning: 1. At completion of work, or at such other times as directed by the Architect/Engineer, remove all
waste, debris, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Clean all sight exposed surfaces; leave work clean and ready for occupancy.
1. GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Each Contractor:
1. Execute cutting (including excavating), filling or patching of work to:
a. Install specified work. b. Remove samples of installed work specified for testing. c. Remove and replace defective work.
2. In addition, upon written instructions of Architect/Engineer or SURS:
a. Uncover work to provide for observation of covered work. b. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. c. Remove work to provide for alteration of existing work.
3. Do not cut or alter work of another contractor without written consent of Architect/Engineer.
1.02 PAYMENT FOR COSTS
A. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective work, or work not conforming to contract documents,
including costs for additional services of Architect/Engineer: Party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or non-conforming work.
B. Work done on instructions of Architect/Engineer (by change order), other than defective or non-
conforming work: SURS.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS.
A. For replacement of work removed: Comply with specifications for type of work to be performed.
3. EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during: 1. Cutting and patching.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 73 28 - 1 10/22/2018
B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prior to cutting:
1. Provide shoring, bracing and support to maintain structural integrity of project. 2. Provide protection for other portions of the project. 3. Provide protection from elements.
3.03 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified
tolerances, finishes.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work.
C. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in
accord with contract documents.
D. Refinish entire surfaces to provide an even finish.
1. Continuous surfaces: To nearest intersection(s). 2. Assembly: Entire refinishing.
END 01 73 28.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 73 28 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 74 23 - Final Cleaning
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. Contractor: Provide final cleaning: 1. At completion of work, or at such other times as directed by the Architect/Engineer, remove
all waste, debris, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Clean all sight exposed surfaces; leave work clean and ready for occupancy.
B. Contractor:
1. Supervise and coordinate the cleaning operations of all trades. 2. At project completion, leave project clean, ready for occupancy.
2. PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
3. EXECUTION
3.01. FINAL CLEANING
A. Contractor: Employ experienced workmen for final cleaning.
B. Contractor: Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, protection and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to specified finish.
C. Contractor: In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of
sight-exposed interior surfaces, and of concealed spaces to ensure performance.
D. Contractor: Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.
E. Contractor: Soft broom clean all exposed concrete surfaces clean; other paved areas with soft or
stiff broom as directed. Rake clean other surfaces on grounds.
F. Contractor: sweep and mop clean all flooring in the area of construction.
G. Contractor maintain finally cleaned areas until project, or designated portion thereof, is accepted by SURS.
H. Contractor: Sweep and clear all debris from roof.
END 01 74 23.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 74 23 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 74 23 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Schedule 01 78 23 - Operating & Maintenance Data
1. GENERAL
Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data for the new equipment.
2. NUMBER OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
Provide SURS 2 copies of all O&M manuals for the new equipment.
3. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A/E – SURS shall identify any special requirements such as video-taped training sessions or video O&M manuals here.
4. REQUIRED SUBMITTALS-
4.01. CONTRACTOR
A. Section 23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations 1. Inspections, Test Reports, Procedures 2. Manufacturer’s Certifications 3. Operating & Maintenance Data 4. Product Data 5. Shop Drawings 6. Warranties & Bonds
END 01 78 23.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 23 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 23 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Schedule 01 78 36 - Extended Warranties & Bonds
1. GENERAL
A. Contractor shall warrant their work in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. In Addition, the following extended Warranties and Bonds shall be provided as specified.
B. Warranty start date shall be date of Substantial Completion.
C. The decision to purchase the extended warranty will be made by SURS at the time of contract
award. The extended warranty may, or may not, be purchased for any of the options, depending upon its cost. They are included herein as Alternate Bids.
2. EXTENDED W ARRANTIES AND BONDS
2.01. Contractor
A. Section 23 64 16 – Centrifugal Water Chiller
1. Base Bid: a. The manufacturer’s equipment warranty shall be for a period of (1) One year from date of
equipment start up or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first. b. Provide a 5 year extended warranty on parts and labor on entire chiller and condenser. The
warranty shall include parts and labor costs for the repair and/or replacement of defects in components or workmanship.
2. Alternate Bid Number 1 a. The manufacturer’s equipment warranty shall be for a period of (5) Five years from date of
equipment start up. b. Provide a 5 year extended warranty on parts and labor on entire chiller and condenser. The
warranty shall include parts and labor costs for the repair and/or replacement of defects in components or workmanship.
3. Alternate Bid Number 2 a. The manufacturer’s equipment warranty shall be for a period of (10) Ten years from date of
equipment start up. b. Provide a 10 year extended warranty on parts and labor on entire chiller and condenser.
The warranty shall include parts and labor costs for the repair and/or replacement of defects in components or workmanship.
4. This warranty’s shall include parts and labor for the complete chiller, including all components.
Chiller shall include a factory warranty of number of years specified above on parts and labor for the chiller, and on the compressor.
5. Any standard factory warranty for included as part of the Base Bid that extends beyond the
Base Bid or Alternate Bid scenarios shall still apply.
END 01 78 36.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 36 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 36 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents
1. GENERAL
1.01. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE
A. HVAC Contractor:
1. At project site, maintain one record copy of: a. Contract drawings, including separate volume(s) of details. b. Project Manual. c. Interpretations and supplemental instructions. d. Addenda. e. Reviewed, approved shop drawings and product data. f. Other modifications to contract. g. Field test records. h. All schedules. i. Correspondence file.
2. Store documents in temporary field office, apart from documents used for field construction. 3. Provide files and racks for document storage. 4. File documents in format in accord with Project Manual Table of Contents. 5. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. 6. Do not use record documents for field construction purposes. 7. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and SURS.
1.02. RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 33 23 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples. 2. 01 78 23 - Operating & Maintenance Data. 3. 01 78 36 – Extended Warranties & Bonds.
1.03. RECORDING
A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS" in 2" high printed letters.
B. Keep record documents current.
C. Do not permanently conceal any work until specified information has been recorded.
D. Contract drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:
1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.
2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Changes made by change order. 4. Details not on original contract drawings.
E. Specifications and addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment
actually installed. 2. Changes made by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 39 - 1 10/22/2018
F. Shop drawings: Maintain as record documents; legibly annotate drawings to record changes made after review.
G. A/E will periodically review documents to confirm they are up-to-date. Contractor payment may be
withheld or reduced if record documents are not current.
1.04. SUBMITTAL
A. At completion of project, deliver record documents to A/E.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:
1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document. 5. Certification that each document submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of contractor, or his authorized representative.
END 01 78 39.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA # 20180141 01 78 39 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 00 00 - General Requirements
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. The work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, construction plant and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Examine all drawings and all sections of the specifications to ascertain to what extent other contracts affect work. a. HVAC Contractor to provide all HVAC work shown on the HVAC drawings and
specified herein. b. Electrical Contractor to provide all electrical work shown on the Electrical drawings and
specified herein. B. Alternate Bids:
1. The work to be performed under this Division shall include all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, construction plant and facilities necessary to provide a complete and satisfactory system ready to use. Examine all drawings and all sections of the specifications to ascertain to what extent other contracts affect work. a. HVAC Contractor to provide all HVAC work shown on the HVAC drawings and
specified herein. b. Electrical Contractor to provide all electrical work shown on the Electrical drawings and
specified herein.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere: The following documents, when issued by the Owner, are hereby incorporated herein:
1. 00 11 13 - Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid 2. 00 41 00 - Bid Form 3. 00 41 06 – Bid Bond 4. 00 72 20 - Assignment
B. Work by others:
1. The Owner will provide for shutdown and startup of existing systems that may be affected, extended or modified by the remodeling of various system components.
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of contractor: All materials and equipment shall be new and all work shall be
executed with the maximum speed consistent with current accepted trade practices. Furnish materials and equipment promptly after authorization to proceed, and proceed with work in progress with the other contractors on the project. Perform all work included in contract in a manner that will not cause interferences or delays to, or interfere with, the progress of other contractors.
B. Requirements of regulatory agencies:
1. Permits: Arrange and pay for all permits, inspections and utility connections required.
C. Referenced standards: 1. Comply with specified codes and standards. If conflict exists between codes or
standards and drawings, project manual or addenda requirements, request clarification from Engineer.
2. Conform to the installation rules and regulations of the standards listed including all subsequently published amendments thereto issued prior to the date of the bidding documents.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 00 - 1 10/22/2018
3. Conform to the requirements of all local, state and federal agencies which have authority over this project. Include all items of labor and material required to meet such requirements regardless of the failure to specify in the project manual or indicate on the drawings each individual item.
4. All equipment, apparatus and systems shall be rated, tested, fabricated and installed with the applicable industry standards.
5. The applicable portions of the latest editions of following standards form a part of this project manual to the same force and effect as if repeated herein. a. American Gas Association, Inc. (AGA) b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) c. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) d. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) e. American Water Works Association (AWWA) f. National Electrical Code (NEC) g. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) h. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) i. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) j. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) k. Illinois Standard Specifications for Water & Sewer Main Construction. l. Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (IEPA) m. Illinois Department of Public Health (IDPH) n. BOCA National Mechanical Code, 1987 o. Illinois Plumbing Code, 2004
1.04. COORDINATION & SUBMITTALS
A. All contractors shall provide 1/4” = 1’-0” coordination drawings showing locations, dimensions and
height of installation of all major pieces of equipment, ductwork and piping provided under their respective contracts. The contractor shall overlay their respective drawings and resolve all conflicts before actual installation begins. Order of space preference throughout the building shall be: 1. Recessed light fixtures 2. Duct work 3. Soil, waste, vent and storm piping 4. Domestic water piping 5. Electrical conduit
B. Exception: Plumbing lines below or behind plumbing fixtures shall have precedence over all other work. Electrical conduit above or below switchgear, panel boards and control panels shall have precedence over all other work. Do not install any fluid conveying piping over electrical or elevator equipment.
C. Shop Drawings: 1. After receiving approval of equipment manufacturers, prior to delivery of any material to job
site, and sufficiently in advance to allow the Engineer ample time for checking, submit ten (8) copies of detailed, dimensioned shop drawings or cuts, showing construction, size, arrangement, operation clearances, performance characteristics, and capacity of equipment and material. The Engineer’s review of such submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors.
2. Submit shop drawings for the following: a. Centrifugal Water Chiller b. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit c. Chilled Water Pumps
D. Submit the following Certifications: 1. Welding 2. Insulation 3. Air & Water Balance 4. Domestic Water Disinfection
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 00 - 2 10/22/2018
E. Operation & Maintenance Manual: 1. Upon completion of the work, provide the Owner with three (3) copies of a hardbound
operating manual for all equipment furnished and installed under this work. The manual shall, however, first be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
2. The manual shall include manufacturer’s lubricating and operating instructions and parts list and serial numbers for all operating machinery, including drive information, and motor horsepower, amperage, and voltage readings on all phases. One set of tools necessary for lubrication shall be delivered to the Owner.
3. The following items shall be included in the Operating & Maintenance Manual: a. Centrifugal Water Chiller b. Air-Cooled Condensing Unit c. Chilled Water Pumps
F. As-Built Drawings: During the progress of the work, record all changes or deviations from the original drawings and layout of the work and record critical dimensions of buried or concealed work and submit to Architect/Engineer.
1.05. JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing conditions:
1. In order to become familiar with the scope of the work involved, visit the existing site, before submitting bid, and carefully examine the existing condition in order to have full knowledge and understanding of the conditions and restrictions affecting the performance of the work required. Include in bid all work which is reasonably inferred by the contract drawings and specifications, whether specifically shown or not, as a result of existing conditions, construction, irregularities and interferences which may affect work. No additional compensation will be considered for misunderstanding the conditions to be met.
2. The layout shown on the drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as other work will permit. Changes from these drawings required to make this work conform to the building construction shall be made only with prior written approval of the Engineer. All proposed changes shall be shown on shop drawings. All measurements shall be verified by actual observation and all work shall fit in place meeting the approval of the Engineer.
B. Sequencing, scheduling:
1. Confer with the other contractors regarding the location and size of pipes, equipment, ducts, openings and special architectural treatments in order that there may be no interferences between the installation or the progress of the work of any contractor on the project. The order of space preference shall be as listed above.
2. In the case of interconnection of the work of two or more contractors, verify at the site or on shop drawings all dimensions relating to such work. All errors due to the failure to so verify any such dimensions shall be promptly rectified.
3. All line voltage wiring and final connections to complete mechanical systems shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. All electrical conduit, wire, and connections relating to mechanical equipment controls and all wiring associated with starter holding coils, shall be the responsibility of the contractor installing the mechanical equipment unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. The contractor installing the mechanical equipment shall be responsible for magnetic motor starters where such starters are part of the control package of the equipment supplied. All other starters shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. The contractor installing the starters that are part of a control package shall coordinate starter requirements with Division 16 of the specifications.
4. Access panels, in walls or ceilings, required for access and maintenance (i.e., automatic or manual damper, fire or smoke damper, coil or control instrument mounted in a duct or pipe) shall be provided by the respective contractor. Access panels are not required in areas where the ceiling system is lay-in tile; however, sufficient space must be available in and through the ceiling system to allow maintenance and adjustment of dampers, and cleaning of coils as necessary, or a suitable access panel shall be provided for that purpose. Access panels shall be approximately 15 inches by 18 inches wherever possible and shall be provided with flush trim and an allenkey operated camlock fastener. Panels shall be manufactured by Karp, Milcor or Bilco. Installation of access panels shall be coordinated with the General Contractor.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 00 - 3 10/22/2018
5. Items of equipment may be specified in the singular however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings and as required for a complete system.
6. Each contractor shall provide excavating, pumping, backfilling, and compacting required for the installation of their respective work as shown on the drawings.
7. Equipment and devices furnished and installed by mechanical contractors which have factory prime coat or final surface finish shall be replaced, repaired or refinished if defective or damaged during installation.
8. Arrange all work so a minimum period of interruption or outages will occur in the temporary or permanent transfer of services as required for all mechanical revisions. Not less than 48 hours notification to the Owner shall be required before approval will be granted for any disruption of gas, water, or sanitary services. The outage request shall include the extent of the work to be done, length of outage time required, and the time at which the outage is to begin. No allowance will be made for extra payment as a result of scheduling “overtime” work necessary to perform before or after normal or regular working hours to accomplish the work intended.
9. Submit a “Sequence of Work Schedule” in respect to all temporary and permanent utility and service cutovers after final determination. This schedule shall be submitted for approval to the Architect/Engineer. The submittal shall designate priority order, service or utility affected, date of cutover, and time of day to start and finish.
1.06. OPENINGS IN CONSTRUCTION
A. Openings required in new and existing construction that may be necessary for the installation of
mechanical work shall be provided by the respective contractor and all patching and repairing shall be done by workmen competent in the trade required, at the expense of the respective contractor. The respective contractor shall be responsible for arranging the work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess materials involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor. Cutting through the floor or roof systems or load bearing walls shall be done only with the prior written approval of the Engineer so as to avoid damaging the structural system.
1.07. TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING
A. Confirm compliance with Manufacturer’s recommendation for all equipment installations. B. See Section 23 05 93.10 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
1.08. CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the contract all remaining materials and rubbish shall be removed from the building and premises and the work areas shall be left clean and free from stains, mortar, paint spots, etc.
B. All switches, controls, and safety devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with embossed
or printed plates as to purpose and as to operation and shall be tested in the presence of the Owner’s designated representative to insure that their function and purpose is understood.
C. Upon completion of the work, put systems into service maintaining responsibility for the equipment during all testing operations including the lubricating and turning on and off of such apparatus.
1.09. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S DESIGNATED PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall provide for two (2), four-hour sessions, one week apart, for instructional periods with the Owner’s designated representative.
1.10. WARRANTY
A. Guarantee all work including labor, material and equipment for this project for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner.
END 23 00 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 00 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 00 05 – Selective Demolition for HVAC
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Demolition and removal of selected HVAC equipment and related piping. B. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure related to the demolition and
removal of selected HVAC equipment. C. Demolition and removal of selected electrical and controls items related to the demolition and
removal of selected HVAC equipment. D. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere: The following documents, when issued by the Owner, are hereby incorporated herein:
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 015100 “Temporary Utilities” for temporary utilities that are affected by selective demolition. 3. Section 017328 Cutting & Patching for cutting and patching procedures. 4. Section 013516 "Alteration Project Procedures" for general protection and work procedures for alteration projects. 5. Section 017423 “Final Cleaning” of equipment and other items that are affected by selective demolition.
B. Definitions:
1. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
2. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
3. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
4. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
5. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
1.03. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes the property of the Contractor.
1.04. PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 1 10/22/2018
1.05. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.
D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's
partial occupancy of completed Work. E. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including
finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.
1.06. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.07. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.
1.08. FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that are
known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished because of building operations or processes performed there.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 2 10/22/2018
F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.09. WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
1.10. COORDINATION
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner’s operations.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous
material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.
C. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities. D. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for de-tensioning. E. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition
operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings
preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or
video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or
duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.03 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Mechanical contractor shall provide SURS with best salvage value for failed SMARTDT Chiller System and include as a line item in his/her price schedule.
B. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 3 10/22/2018
C. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug
remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to
and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing
construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified
in Section 015100 “Temporary Utilities” and Section 015719 “Temporary Environmental Controls".
B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.05 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective
demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall
and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 4 10/22/2018
9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
3.06 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.
C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.
D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove.
E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings."
F. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.
2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
3.07 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 5 10/22/18
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END 23 00 05.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 00 05 - 6 10/22/18
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 10 – Common Work Results for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bids: 1. Mechanical Contractor to provide all HVAC work shown on the HVAC drawings and
specified herein.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. Division 23 - Mechanical
1.03. REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment furnished and installed under this contract shall be in accordance with
the following applicable technical society, organization or body. 1. American Gas Association, Inc. (AGA) 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 5. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Associations, Inc. (SMACNA) 10. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 11. Illinois Department of Public Health - Plumbing Code 12. Factory Mutual (FM)
B. Reference to standards shall mean and intend the latest edition of such standards adopted and
published at the date of bidding documents.
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with 01 33 23: 1. Product Data
a. Pipe b. Valves c. Fire Hydrants d. Test Data
1.05. GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year in accordance with the
General Conditions.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. General 1. All equipment and material for permanent installation shall be new unless specifically
indicated otherwise. In addition, material shall: a. Be without blemish or defect. b. Not be used for temporary service without prior written authorization from Owner.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 10 - 1 10/22/2018
c. Be in accordance with applicable standards. d. Bear Factory Mutual Label where subject to FM label service.
B. Identification
1. Each length of pipe, pipe fitting, trap, fixture, device, and appurtenance used in a plumbing system shall have cast, stamped or indelibly marked on it the maker’s mark or name, weight, type, class of product and the standard that applies.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. WALL, ROOF AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AND SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Provide sleeves for piping as shown on drawings. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to extend
through the wall, roof or floors. Wall sleeves shall have ends flush with finished thickness of walls and floor sleeves shall extend 1” above finish floor. Interior diameter of sleeves shall provide 1/2” clearance all around conduit.
B. Set all wall, roof and floor sleeves during the construction of same in new construction.
C. Below grade wall and roof penetration shall be made watertight. Below grade wall penetration
shall be sealed with compression type conduit sealing bushings. Roof penetration shall be sealed and flashed per roofing manufacturers published recommendations.
3.02. PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect work from injury by keeping all piping capped and plugged or otherwise protected. This
includes damage by freezing and/or stoppage from building materials, sand, dirt, or concrete.
B. Protect all equipment from damage during the project, provide all tarpaulins, drop cloths, barricades, or auxiliary equipment.
END 23 05 10.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 10 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provides:
a. High efficiency motors for pumps, cooling tower and chiller as specified herein and shown on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps 2. 23 64 16 – Centrifugal Water Chillers
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. GENERAL-PURPOSE ELECTRIC MOTORS 1/3 THROUGH 200 HORSEPOWER
A. General: Provide motors for the range of 1/3 through 200 horsepower complying with the
following requirements, unless indicated otherwise on drawings or schedules: 1. Motors shall be general-purpose, single-phase or three-phase (as scheduled on the
drawings), ac, squirrel-cage, induction motors for heavy commercial and industrial service. 2. Motors shall be Design B, normal-starting torque, normal-starting current, low slip for full-
voltage starting from a 208, 220 or 460-volt, single-phase or three-phase, part winding or across-the-line start, 60-Hertz supply (as scheduled on the drawings).
3. Motors shall be continuous rated with 1.15 service factor. Insulation shall be rated for motor- temperature rise within NEMA limits in a 40°C ambient environment. Windings and leads shall be copper. Rotors shall be copper bar.
4. Motors shall be ball bearing, single speed, 1,800 rpm, unless indicted otherwise. Enclosures shall be totally enclosed, unless indicated otherwise. Motors rated two horsepower and larger shall be fan-cooled, high-efficiency design.
5. All motor-supporting (frame) elements, including stator housing, bearing brackets (end bells) and mounting feet, shall be cast iron. No substitutes are acceptable. Cooling fans shall be positively engaged and clamped to the motor shaft; press fits for fans are not acceptable.
6. “U”-frame motor nameplate rating shall not be less than the brake horsepower of equipment to be driven, through the full range of operating conditions, not including service factor in the motor rating.
7. Other frame designation (e.g., “T”-frame) motor nameplate rating shall be selected such that the brake horsepower of equipment to be driven, through the full range of operating conditions, not including service factor in the motor rating, does not exceed 85 percent of the nameplate horsepower rating.
8. Motors connected to variable frequency drives (VFD) shall meet the following requirements: a. Motor shall be inverter duty rated. b. Motor shall be NEMA MG-1, Part 31 compliant c. Motor shall have a minimum of 1600 V insulation d. Motor shall have an insulated bearing on the non-drive end (NDE) e. Motor shall be rated for variable torque use with a 4:1 speed range (15 Hz to 60 Hz) f. Motor shall not have any carrier frequency or lead length restrictions. If restrictions
cannot be eliminated, any restrictions must be appropriate for the specified and scheduled motor application.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 13 - 1 10/22/2018
3. EXECUTION 3.01. MOTOR DYNAMIC BALANCING
A. Perform dynamic balancing and test motors for vibration after manufacture. Self-excited vibration velocity of motors shall not exceed 0.157/0.06 inches per second at bearing caps.
3.02. START UP
A. Inspect, test and start each motor and align (when motor is coupled to compressor pump or fan shaft) with a dial indicator to 0.002”.
END 23 05 13.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 13 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 19 – Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provides thermometers & gauges for:
a. Chilled water piping specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps 2. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers shall be all 300 Series stainless steel welded construction, 5” antiparallax dial with bold black on nonreflective satin or white background, hermetically sealed and weatherproof, vibration dampened bimetallic actuation, over range protection of 50 percent full scale up to 500 degrees F. and 10 percent above 500 degrees F., external recalibrator, 1 percent full scale accuracy. Thermometers shall be of the variangle stem configuration to maintain perpendicular orientation of the dial face to the User’s vision. Temperature ranges shall be: cooling systems, 0/20-140 degrees F.; HVAC systems, 20/30-240 degrees F.; unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings.
B. Acceptable products: Tel-Tru Manufacturing #AA575R, Marshall Town Figure 254, or A. A. Weiss
& Sons #5VBM.
2.02. PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be selected so that normal operating pressures fall at approximately midscale and so that continuous operation does not exceed 75 percent of full scale. Pressure gauges located at circulating pumps shall be of a compound range capable of measuring 30” Hg vacuum to 60 psi or greater pressure if required.
B. Pressure gauges for steam applications shall be 4-1/2” dial type with bold black markings on white
background, aluminum or phenolic solid front pressure relieving case, phosphor bronze brazed or stainless steel welded Bourdon tube, stainless steel bushed movement, provision for zero shift calibration without removing or bending the pointer. Accuracy shall be ANSI Grade AA per ANSI B40.1 1980. Acceptable products: AMETEK/U. S. Gauge 1900 Series, Marshall Town 175 through 179 Series, or A. A. Weiss & Sons #UG-1 Series.
C. Pressure gauges for HVAC applications shall be 4-1/2” dial type with bold black markings on white
background, aluminum or steel pressure relieving case, phosphor bronze brazed Bourdon tube, bronze and stainless steel movement, provision for zero shift calibration without removing or bending the pointer. Accuracy shall be ANSI Grade A per ANSI B40.1 1980. Acceptable products: AMETEK/U. S. Gauge 5000 Series, Marshall Town Figures 42 and 224, or A. A. Weiss & Sons #PG-1 Series.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 19 - 1 10/22/2018
2.03. GAUGE COCKS
A. Gauge cocks shall be brass with 1/4 inch NPT female threads and lever or T handles. They shall be rated for service at 600 pounds WOG and 150 pounds saturated steam pressure. All gauge cocks shall be the same.
B. Acceptable products: AMETEK/U. S. Gauge Figure 520, Dresser Industries Figure 1095, or
Parker Hannifin #V500P-4.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers in piping and equipment in solid bar thermowells filled with nonsolidifying heat conduction paste. Wells and sensing elements shall be located in the path of moving fluid, not in stagnant or dead end positions. Pipes one inch and smaller shall be increased at least one pipe size. Provide extension necks on thermometers mounted on insulated piping, vessels, or equipment. Provide thermometers at each water inlet and outlet of each water heating coil, boiler, circulating pump and elsewhere as specified or indicated on the drawings.
B. Install gauges in straight runs of piping so they may be read from the floor or operating platform.
Install all gauges with gauge cocks. Gauges installed in steam lines shall also be installed with pigtail steam siphons. Gauges installed on the discharge of pumps or reciprocating compressors shall also be installed with a self-cleaning pulsation dampener.
END 23 05 19.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 19 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 23 – General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provides valves for:
a. Refrigerant system b. Chilled water system as specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. All valves shall be designed for operation with not less than 125 lbs. working pressure, and of a type permitting repacking while under pressure. Gate valves shall be used except where other types of valves are specifically required. Rising stems shall be used wherever possible. Provide valves to allow control of all major branches. All valves 2-inches and larger installed 7 feet on centerline or higher above the floor shall have chain operators.
B. All gate valves in steel lines 2-inches and smaller shall be all brass screwed. Acceptable
products: Jenkins Fig. 47 or 1242, Crane Fig. 428, or Stockham Fig. B107.
C. All gate valves in steel lines 2-1/2-inches and larger shall be flanged iron body, brass trim, renewable seat rings, and rising stem. Acceptable products: Jenkins Fig. 651A, Crane Fig. 465- 1/2, or Stockham Fig. G623.
D. Gate valves in copper water lines shall be all brass. Acceptable products: Jenkins Fig. 1242,
Crane Fig. 1324, Powell Fig. 1821, or Nibco/Scott Fig. T or S 124.
E. Where globe and check valves are indicated, they shall be of the same materials and jointing as those specified for gate valves.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be located on both sides of all major pieces of equipment, control valves and strainers and shall be located to allow proper access for operation and for servicing.
B. Backflow preventer assemblies shall be installed with top of valves at no more than 5’-0” above finished floor.
C. Pipe relief drain to open-site connection at nearest floor drain.
END 23 05 23.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 23 - 1 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 23 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 29 - Hangers & Supports for HVAC Piping & Equipment
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provides hangers and supports for:
a. Chilled water piping b. Refrigerant Piping as specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps 2. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and supports shall conform to recommendation of Standard Practice No. 58 (63) and 69 (66) of Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry.
B. Hangers for pipes shall be clevis and adjustable rod hangers for single pipes or trapeze hangers
for supporting more than one pipe on the same hanger. Trapeze hangers shall be made of 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4-inch thick structural steel channels with legs down, and steel blocking of varying thickness welded to the channel under each pipe shall be used to obtain proper pitch.
C. Pipe covering protection saddles shall be the weld on type, and protection shields shall be half
round heavy gage galvanized sheet metal with heavy density weight bearing insulation where required.
D. Hanger rods shall be 3/8-inch for pipe 2-inch and smaller, 1/2-inch for pipe 2-1/2-inch and larger.
Acceptable manufacturers: Crawford, B-Line, Elcen Metal Products Co., or Fee & Mason.
E. Nickel plated spring ceiling plates shall be provided for all hanger rods in all exposed areas. Acceptable manufacturers: Grinnell, Crawford, B-Line or Elcen.
F. Electrolysis: Prevent electrolysis to copper tubing with rubber or neoprene lined pipe ring isolators
and copper plated hanger and supports or other recognized industry methods.
2.02. CEILING, FLOOR, AND WALL SLEEVES
A. Split sleeves shall be galvanized steel, 1/2” minimum larger in diameter than the existing piping. Caulk wall opening with fire retardant sealant.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. SUPPORT OF PIPING
A. Maximum spacing of hangers or supports for metal pipe shall be: 1. 1/2 - 1 inch 6 feet
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 29 - 1 10/22/2018
2. 1-1/4 - 14 inch 8 feet
Copper pipe shall be supported not to exceed 8 feet on center. PVC pipe shall be supported in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Use bracket type hanger fastened to walls to support piping running adjacent to walls and not
supported from ceilings. Valves 3 inches and over in horizontal lines shall be supported independent of the pipelines.
C. Perforated strap iron hangers or wire will not be accepted.
D. Pipe hangers shall be cleaned and painted with rust resistant paint before installation.
E. To secure piping to control direction of expansion, provide welded type pipe anchors of welded
channel and angle iron bracing securely attached to the building construction and welded to the pipe.
F. Hanger supports shall be securely fastened to structural members by beam clamps and clips,
concrete inserts, or anchors.
END 23 05 29.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 29 - 2 10/22/18
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provide vibration isolators for the following equipment specified and
indicated on the drawings a. Air Cooled Condenser Unit b. Split-System Chiller
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 03 00 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. 23 63 13 – Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 3. 23 64 16 – Centrifugal Water Chillers
1.03. QUALITY CONTROL
A. Unless otherwise noted on the equipment schedule, all mechanical equipment shall be mounted
on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accord with weight distribution of the isolated equipment to provide reasonably uniform deflection. Deflections shall be as noted on the equipment schedule.
B. All isolation material used by each contractor shall be supplied by one manufacturer.
C. The isolation manufacturer and the authorized representative shall be responsible for: 1. Selection of the proper size and type of isolation materials. 2. Preparation of the submittal material required. 3. Field inspection of the installation and, if necessary, accompanying the Architect/Engineer on
a field inspection of the installation. 4. Written certification that the isolation is installed and operating as designed.
D. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accord with weight distribution of the isolated equipment to
provide a reasonably uniform deflection.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Type 2 shall be spring type isolators which are free standing, unhoused, laterally stable, complete with leveling bolts and 1/4” thick ribbed noise isolation pad. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 times the compressed height of the spring at rated load, and shall be designed to provide 50% overload capacity. Isolators shall be rigidly bolted to the equipment and shall have the capability of being bolted to the supporting structure. Acceptable products: Kinetics FDS, Korfund WSC, and Mason Industries SLF-H. Vibration Mountings and Controls - AC.
B. Type 3 shall be free standing, laterally stable spring isolators, similar to Type 2, but shall
incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short circuiting. Housing shall be hot dip galvanized. Acceptable products: Kinetics FLS or FRS, Korfund WSCL, and Mason Industries SLR. Vibration Mountings and Controls - AWR.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 48 - 1 10/22/2018
C. Type 11 shall be welded rectangular steel concrete forms for floating foundations (concrete inertia bases) which are designed and supplied by the isolation manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into the welded steel form, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2” diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 8” centers welded in place, and recessed or external height saving isolator brackets. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, but not less than 6 inches. Where inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be wide enough to support the piping elbows. There shall be a minimum of 2” clearance between the base and the supporting structure. Acceptable products: Kinetics CIB, Korfund RCF, Mason Industries KSL. Vibration Mountings and Controls - WPF.
D. Type 13 shall be twin-sphere flexible neoprene connectors used on all equipment indicated on the drawings or on the equipment schedule. They shall be manufactured of multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both molded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses. No steel wire or rings shall be used as pressure reinforcement. Connectors 2” and smaller shall have threaded connections; 2-1/2” and larger shall have galvanized floating flanges. Connectors 12” in diameter and larger operating above 100 psi shall employ isolated control units to prevent distortion. Connectors shall be rated for a minimum of 100 psi at 175 degrees F. Connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valve. Acceptable products: Flex-Hose NN, MSC R, Red Valve Co. Red-Flex Model D-30. Vibration Mountings and Controls - VMT, Keflex, KTW.
E. Type 14 shall be flexible stainless steel connectors having stainless steel braid and carbon steel
fittings. Connectors having diameters of 2” and smaller shall have male nipple connections; 2- 1/2” diameter and larger shall have 150# ASA drilled rigid flanges. Connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valve. Connectors to be used for pressures greater than 150 psi and temperatures greater than 200 degrees F. Acceptable products: Flex-Hose SF-15 or SMN, MSC FFC or MFC, and Mason Industries BSS. Vibration Mountings and Controls - MFP, Keflex, KSS.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. All vibration isolators shall be installed in strict accord with the isolation manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Bolt isolators to equipment and to supporting structure where isolator bolt holes are supplied.
C. Shim or adjust leveling screws to level equipment. Shims shall not interfere with isolator action.
D. Verify actual deflected height with design operating height and replace the isolator when they differ by 25% or more.
E. Correct interferences with the isolator action or report to the Architect/Engineer when interference
is caused by another contractor.
3.02. APPLICATIONS
Equipment Isolator Type
Pumps 2 with Type 11 inertia base (as indicated on Drawings) Cooling Towers 3 Piping connected to isolated equipment 13 or 14
END 23 05 48
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 48 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. General Contractor painting of all exposed piping will be done by the HVAC Contractor. 2. HVAC Contractor provide identification and flow direction of the following new piping and
valves. a. Chilled water piping b. Pump discharge
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps 2. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping shall be identified by means of card mounted, self-bonding pipe markers. Markers shall be
made of nonporous, color fast, nonabsorbent vinyl plastic. Letters shall be black or white for easy readability.
B. Markers for pipe having an outside diameter of 3 inches or more (including insulation) shall have
2-inch high letters. Markers for pipe having an outside diameter of less than 3 inches (including insulation) shall have 1-inch high letters.
C. Provide matching 3/4-inch wide banding tape.
D. Acceptable manufacturers: Seton Name Plate Corporation, W. H. Brady Company, or Westline
Products Company.
2.02. VALVE TAGS AND NUMBERING
A. All valves shall be tagged with 1-1/4-inch diameter, 0.040-inch thick brass or laminated plastic tags with numbers and letters. A complete directory of valves, pump motors, controls, devices, and other equipment, giving use, location, size, and manufacturer’s number of each shall be prepared with permanent ink, framed under glass, and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed by Using Agency/Owner.
B. All valves above ceilings or access panels shall be identified by color-coded, self-adhesive “dots”
affixed to the ceiling grid or the access panel frame. Dots shall be visible from a standing position on the floor immediately below the marker.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Pipe markers shall be located as follows: 1. On straight runs of pipe at intervals not exceeding 100 feet. 2. At every sectionalizing or main shut off valve. 3. On each riser at a point 5 feet above floor or platform. 4. On both sides of a wall or partition through which pipe passes.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 53 - 1 10/22/2018
B. Markers shall be applied so they can be read from the floor.
C. Markers shall be applied only after all insulating and painting has been completed.
D. Surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, oil, or loose paint before applying markers.
E. Before applying markers on insulated surfaces, smooth the surface with sandpaper. Clean surface of all dust after sanding.
F. After applying each marker, wrap one turn of pipe banding tape completely around the
circumference of the pipe at each end of the marker. Overlap ends of marker with the tape and overlap the tape upon itself a minimum of 1-inch. The pipe banding tape shall match the background color of the marker.
G. Where a service is indicated on the drawings as a circulating system, the pipe marker legend for
the particular service shall be followed by either the word “supply” or “return” to clarify the line function. An arrow designating direction of flow shall follow the legend on each marker.
H. Pipe identifications markers shall be provided in accordance with the following schedule:
STANDARD COLOR CODE FOR PIPING IDENTIFICATION SERVICE BACKGROUND LEGEND
Boilers Heat Resistant Aluminum B. FEED Chill Water Blue - Lamberts Blue CH.CHR City Cold Water Green - Egyptian Green DOM. CW Compressed Air Bare Copper Tubing AIR Condensate Light Blue - Alaskan Blue COND Domestic Hot Water Pink - Sunkiss DOM. HW, DOM.HWRDriveway Heating Blue Dahlia ----- Fire Main Red - Calibrated Red FIRE Fuel Oil Rosewood FOS, FOR Hot Water Heating Gray - Highland Gray HWS, HWRNatural Gas Yellow - Calibrated Yellow GAS Sanitation Brown - Russet SAN Soft Water Light Blue - Morning Glory DOM. CW-SOFT5# Steam Tan - Beach Tan LP STEAM 50# Steam Orange - Tangier MP STEAMTower Water (Condenser Water)
Light Green - Sunday Green CWS, CWR
Vent Piping (Steam Relief Vent)
Aluminum -----
I. The background colors used shall be as manufactured by MAB Paints as indicated in the chart below:
ALASKAN BLUE D-40-EE3Y16-J-4 L-8 K-Y BEACH TAN C-3Y28 F-32 L-32 I-4 T-8ROSEWOOD E-4Y16 H-3Y32HIGHLAND GRAY B-2Y16 L-Y40 C-24BLUE DAHLIA B-24 D-3Y E-24SUNKISS F-44 T-Y28 G3Y24 A-12EGYPTIAN GREEN A-2Y C-4Y D-6Y B-12SUNDAY GREEN A-3Y44 D-24 E-16LAMBERTS BLUE D-12 A-2Y12 K-3YRUSSET B-32 C8Y32 F-Y44TANGIER H-8Y A-2YMORNING GLORY B-8 D12-E4
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 53 - 2 10/22/2018
3.02. VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Tag and number each and every valve for every service included in this contract.
B. Prepare two copies of schedule giving number, location, and service of each valve and motor.
C. Mount on a heavy fiberboard in a frame under glass in location as directed by Architect/Engineer.
D. After preparation of schedule, submit to Architect/Engineer for approval.
3.03. FLOW INDICATORS
A. Stencil an arrow marker at each identification marker, with arrow pointed away from legend in the direction of flow. When flow may be both ways, stencil double-headed arrows.
END 23 05 53.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 53 - 3 10/22/2018
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 53 - 4 10/22/18
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 23 05 93.10 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor test, adjust and balance piping system(s).
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 01 33 23 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples 2. 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements 3. 23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 4. 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Materials & Methods
1.03. JOB CONDITIONS
A. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous
operation to accomplish the testing, adjusting and balancing work specified. Complete air balancing prior to hydronic balancing.
B. Perform testing, adjusting and balancing when outside conditions approximate design conditions
for heating and cooling functions or when the system is operating at design capacity.
C. The Architect/Engineer will be present during testing and balancing to verify that specified procedures are followed.
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Only qualified personnel shall perform testing and balancing work.
B. Submit evidence that the personnel who will perform the testing and balancing of the project
systems are qualified personnel for review and approval by the Architect/Engineer prior to performing the work.
C. Submit a list of completed projects successfully tested and balanced by the submitted qualified
personnel for review and approval, by the Architect/Engineer, prior to performing the work.
D. When the Contractor does not have qualified personnel on his staff, he shall employ them from other firms or subcontract the work to a test and balance contractor.
E. Perform all corrective measures caused by faulty installation. Retest, readjust and rebalance
system(s) until satisfactory results are achieved.
1.05. DEFINITIONS
A. Qualified personnel are: 1. Personnel who have been certified by one of the following test and balance organizations:
a. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council b. Certified TBAB - Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Bureau. c. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Illinois Chapter. d. SMACNA - Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. e. SMARTA - Sheet Metal, Air Conditioning & Roofing Contractors Trade Association of
Illinois
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 93.10 - 1 10/22/2018
f. TABIC - Test & Balancing Institute for Certification
1.06. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Data Sheet on each item of testing equipment specified for Architect/Engineer approval. Include name of device, manufacturer’s name, model number, latest date of calibration, and correction factors.
B. Submit a report containing all test data and other related information recorded during testing and
balancing, placed on appropriate forms for Architect/Engineer review and approval. Reports shall certify that the methods used and results achieved are as specified.
1.07. REVERIFICATION
A. During Substantial Completion Inspection, a percentage (not more than 5%) of the recorded data
will be subject to reverification by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall take instrument readings as required. Test points will be in normally accessible locations and randomly selected by Architect/Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. WATER BALANCING INSTRUMENTS - Ranges shown are guides. Actual ranges used are subject to Architect/Engineer approval.
A. 30” Mercury U-Tube Manometer, 200 psig wwp, with three valve bypass assembly and return
wells or mercury check valves.
B. Inspector’s Gauge Testing Set.
C. Water Differential Pressure Gauge, 4-1/2” dial, 0 to 100 psi range.
D. Pressure gauge measurements points, quick-connect couplings, 1/4” psi.
2.02. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
A. Insertion Thermometers, with graduations at 0.1°F or contact pyrometer.
B. Sling Psychrometer.
C. Tachometer, Centrifugal Type.
D. Revolution Counter.
E. Clamp-On Volt-Ammeter.
F. Recorders, portable type for temperature and humidity.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Test, adjust and balance system in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Preliminary:
a. List all mechanical specifications of tested equipment and verify against contract documents. Inspect all system components for proper installation and operation. Clean all screens.
b. Open all line valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves, then set mixing
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 93.10 - 2 10/22/2018
control valve to full coil flow. c. For each pump, verify rotation, test, and record pump shut-off head, and test and record
pump wide-open head. d. Verify proper water level in expansion tanks and in the system. Verify that system is
entirely full of fluid. Vent all air vents. e. Verify that air vents in high points of water systems are installed and operating freely. f. Verify that all instruments are accurately calibrated and maintained.
2. Central Equipment: a. Set chilled water and hot water pumps to proper flow quantity. b. Adjust flow of chilled water through chiller to design value. c. Adjust flow of hot water through heat exchangers to design quantity. d. Adjust steam pressure at heat exchangers and record at each steam heat exchanger. e. Observe leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures at chiller and boilers.
Reset to correct design temperatures. f. Record pump operating suction and discharge pressures. Determine final dynamic head.
3. Distribution: a. Balance flow to each chilled water coil and hot water coil. b. Record steam pressure at each steam coil.
4. Terminal Units: a. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record
following data: (1) Inlet Water Temperatures (2) Leaving Water Temperatures
b. Observe fluid pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on call for full cooling and for full heating.
c. Set valve in bypass to match coil flow pressure drop on full bypass. 5. Verification:
a. Record rated and actual running amperage for each pump motor. Measure and record GPM of all pumps.
b. Record total dynamic head for each pump. 6. Other Systems:
3.02. REFRIGERATION CAPACITY TESTS
A. Conduct refrigeration capacity test on water chilling assembly during a period of stable operation.
B. Verify settings of safety and operating controls.
C. Make three trial observations, record readings of: 1. Chilled water temperatures entering and leaving cooler, accurate to 1/10°F. 2. Condenser water temperatures entering and leaving condenser, accurate to 1°F. 3. Chilled water and condenser water flow, accurate to nearest 10 gallons per minute, using U-
tube manometer across orifice plate using pump performance curves on condenser water. 4. Refrigerant temperatures, accurate to 1°F. 5. Compressor power input readings of volts and amperes in each phase, accurate to nearest
100 VA. (Omit for absorption refrigeration). 6. Steam working pressure and steam control valve position. (*Omit for compression
refrigeration).
D. Performance Report: Use readings to calculate tons of refrigeration capacity along with power input required for that capacity and compare with manufacturer’s ratings to determine percent effectiveness.
3.03. ELECTRIC HEATING EQUIPMENT
A. Test and record voltage and amperage readings at each electric heater while fully energized.
3.04. FLUE-GAS TESTS
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 93.10 - 3 10/22/2018
A. Perform and record Orsat flue-gas analysis at boiler and water heater.
3.05. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The temperature control manufacturer’s representative will set and adjust automatically operated devices to achieve specified sequence of operation.
B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list those controls requiring
adjustment by temperature control system installer.
3.06. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REPORT
A. After the conclusion of balancing operations, make temporary installation of portable recorders and simultaneously record temperatures and humidity during summer and winter conditions at representative locations in each system outside of building.
B. Architect/Engineer will direct all test locations.
C. Make recordings during summer and winter for a seven-day period, continuous over a weekend,
and including at least one period of operation at outside conditions within 5°F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition and within 10°F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition.
D. Report of test results shall include original recording and two reproductions.
3.07. SUBMISSION OF REPORTS
A. Fill in test results on approved forms.
B. Submit three certified copies of required test reports to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
C. Include in report a list of instruments used and last date of calibration.
END 23 05 93.10.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 05 93.10 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 07 19 - HVAC Piping Insulation
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provides insulation for:
a. Chilled water systems b. Refrigerant piping systems
B. Alternate Bid:
1. HVAC Contractor provides insulation for: a. Chilled water systems b. Refrigerant piping systems
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 23 05 10 – Common Work Results for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 2. 23 05 23 – General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 3. 23 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 4. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping
1.03. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM:
1. Flame spread rating: 25 or less, ASTM E84. 2. Smoke developed rating: 50 or less, ASTM E84.
B. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA:
1. NFPA 255: Test Methods Surface Burning - Building Materials.
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with 01 33 23.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate complete material data, mastics, and adhesives. 2. List of materials proposed for this project and indicate thickness of material for individual
services.
C. Certification: 1. Certification or data to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. 2. Proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive
strength.
1.05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material to site in factory fabricated containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label, showing fire and smoke hazard ratings of products.
B. Store material in original wrappings and protect from weather and construction traffic.
C. Protect against sun, dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage.
D. Remove damaged insulation from project site. Do not install.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 07 19 - 1 10/22/2018
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. HIGH TEMPERATURE PIPE INSULATION & JACKET COVERS: TYPE HT-P
A. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded hydrous calcium silicate sectional blocks, asbestos free, 12- 14 lbs./cu.ft. density, k value of 0.35 @ 100 degrees F., suitable for maximum temperatures of 1200 degrees F., visual coded.
B. Jacket:
1. Indoor or Outdoor: Factory or field applied. 016 Aluminum
C. Manufacturers 1. Insulation:
a. Schuller Thermo 12 b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas: Kaylo 10 Asbestos Free c. Pabco: Super Caltemp
2. Fitting Cover: a. Ceel Co.: Ceel-Tite b. Childers Products Co.: Metal-Clad, Ell-Jac c. Schuller: Zeston, 25/50 Premolded PVC Cover with Insert up to 450 degrees Canvas or Metal jacket over 450 degrees F.
3. Metal Jacket, Moisture Barrier: a. Insul-Coustic/Birma: Metal-Clad; Al-Cor-Jac b. Schuller: Metal-On c. Pabco: Speedscope; Surefit d. Preformed Metal Prods: Loc-Jac; True Depth; Combination Aluminels
4. Metal Fitting Jackets, Moisture Barrier: a. Childers Co.: Metal-Clad, Ell-Jac b. Schuller: Micro-Lok ML-Miter Seals c. Preformed Metal Prods.: Combination Aluminels
2.02. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE PIPE INSULATION AND JACKETS: TYPE MT-P.
A. Insulation: ASTM C547, 1-piece rigid molded glass fiber, 4 lbs./cu.ft. density, K value of 0.22 @
75 degrees F., suitable for temperatures of -40 degrees F. to 450 degrees F.
B. Jacket: Factory applied vapor barrier, all service type with self-sealing lap and butt strips. 1. Indoor: Factory applied all-purpose jacket (AP Type). 2. Outdoor: Factory or field applied .016 inch aluminum jacket.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Insulation: a. Knauf: Pipe Insulation b. Schuller: Micro-Lok, 650 APT c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas: One-Piece Fiberglas 25 ASJ/SSL-2
2. Fitting Covers: a. Insul-Coustic/Birma: Insul-Sure Heavy Density b. Schuller.: Zeston, 25/50 Premolded PVC Cover With Fiberglass Insert c. Schuller.: R Series-Micro-Lite-FSB
3. Metal Pipe Jacket, Moisture Barrier: a. Childers Co.: Metal-Clad b. Schuller.: Micro-Lok ML c. Preformed Metal prods.: Loc-Jac
4. Metal Fitting Jackets, Moisture Barrier: a. Childers Co.: Metal-Clad, Ell-Jac b. Schuller: Micro-Lok ML-Miter Seals c. Preformed Metal Prods.: Combination Aluminels
2.03. LOW TEMPERATURE PIPE INSULATION - TYPE LT-P
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 07 19 - 2 10/22/2018
A. Insulation: ASTM C534, cellular elastomeric flexible pipe covering and sheet, 5 - 6-1/2 lbs./cu.ft. density, K value of 0.27 at 75°F., suitable for temperatures of -40°F. to 220°F.; maximum 25 flame spread and 100 smoke developed ratings.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong: AP/Armaflex 2. Halstead Ind. prod.: F/R Insul-Tube 3. Schuller: Aerotube II 4. Rubatex Corp.: R-180-FS 5. IMCOA: Imcolock
2.04. PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE:
SERVICE Chilled Water,
TEMP. 45º F
SIZE ½” to 2”
TYPE MT-P
THICKNESS1”
Refrigerant Piping
40º F ½” to 2-1/8” 2-5/8” and larger
LT-P LT-P
½” 1”
2.05. ACCESSORIES
A. Provide staples, bands or wire recommended by insulation manufacturer for application indicated.
1. Do not use staples on cold piping insulation.
B. Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers and similar compounds recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. PREPARATION:
A. Before covering, test and approve piping.
B. Entire surface: Clean and dry at time of installation. 1. Insulation: dry before and during application. 2. Finish with systems at operating conditions.
3.02. INSTALLATION:
A. Insulation: Continuous through inside walls and at all hangers; pack insulation around pipes with
fireproof self-supporting mineral wool insulation material, fully sealed.
B. Install adhesives at ambient and equipment temperatures recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
C. Fittings:
1. Hot Piping: a. Do not insulate unions, flanges, strainers, valves, flexible connections, or expansion
joints. b. Terminate insulation neatly with mastic material troweled on bevel. c. Insulate air separator.
2. Cold Piping: Insulate all fittings, including flanges, all valve bodies and devices, and all air separators associated with cold surfaces. Maintain vapor barrier integrity.
D. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions or interruptions.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 07 19 - 3 10/22/2018
E. Ensure hangers and cradles are properly installed to avoid crushing insulation.
F. Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations.
G. Insulation Exposed to Outdoors: 1. Cover insulation with 0.016 inch aluminum. 2. Lap joints minimum 3 inches and seal with cement. 3. Piping exposed to precipitation must be sealed watertight.
H. Cold Piping:
1. Cover fittings, valves, strainers, and flexible connections with equivalent thickness of insulation material and 1 piece PVC cover.
2. Seal lap joints with 100% coverage of vapor barrier sealant and adhesive. 3. Seal butt joints with 4 inch wide strips of vapor barrier sealed with vapor barrier adhesive; or
use double self-sealing factory joints. 4. Do not use staples on insulation for cold surfaces.
I. Hot Piping:
1. Cover fittings with equivalent thickness of insulation material. 2. Apply 1-piece PVC cover.
J. Install protective metal saddles and insulated inserts to prevent insulation compression.
END 23 07 19.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 07 19 - 4 10/22/18
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 08 00 – HVAC System Commissioning
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. General Contractor to participate in the commissioning of all building systems as specified herein.
2. HVAC Contractor to participate in the commissioning of the HVAC systems as specified herein.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 2. 23 05 93.10 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 3. 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation 4. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping
1.03. DESCRIPTION
A. Commissioning. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems
perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s operational needs. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents: Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. 1. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 2. Verify that Operating and Maintenance (O&M) documentation is complete. 3. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.
B. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 and 16 contractors subs to ensure that all
systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. Division 15 shall be familiar with all parts of the commissioning plan issued by the Commissioning Authority (CA) and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
C. Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning
Authority (CA), the designated representative of the owner, the General Contractor (GC or Contractor), the architect and design engineers (particularly the mechanical engineer), the HVAC Contractor (HC), the Ventilating Contractor (VC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, the Controls Contractor (CC), any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The Owner’s building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.
1.04. COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
A. The commissioning authority for this project shall be Midwest Engineering Associates, Inc.
1.05. COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Commissioning Plan. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the
commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scope meeting the CA will provide the plan that will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 1 10/22/2018
B. Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur. 1. Commissioning during construction begins with a scope meeting conducted by the CA where
the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members. 2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CA with
necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems.
3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CA during normal submittals, including detailed start-up procedures.
4. The CA works with the Sub-contractors (Subs) in developing startup plans and startup documentation formats, including providing the Subs with prefunctional checklists to be completed, during the startup process.
5. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing.
6. The Subcontractors, under their own direction, execute and document the prefunctional checklists and perform startup and initial checkout. The CA documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may include the CA witnessing start-up of selected equipment and systems.
7. The CA develops specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures. The Sub-contractors review the procedures.
8. The procedures are executed by the Sub-contractors, under the direction of, and documented by the CA.
9. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the Sub-contractor’s expense and the system retested.
10. The CA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness. All O&M documentation must be submitted and approved before the start of training.
11. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion. 12. The CA reviews the training plan, assists coordinating the training provided by the Subs, and
reports the completion of training to the Owner’s representative. 13. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required by the manufacturer.
1.06. RESPONSIBILITIES
A. General Contractor (GC)
1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA, and with the CA ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
2. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price. 3. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and approved
submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CA. 4. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, O&M
data, commissioning tasks and training. 5. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the Contract
Documents and schedule. 6. A representative shall attend a commissioning scope meeting and other necessary meetings
scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Commissioning process. 7. Coordinate the training of owner personnel. 8. Prepare O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
Warranty Period 1. Ensure that Subcontractors execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing,
witnessed by the CA, according to the specifications. 2. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and
as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
B. HVAC Contractor The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the HVAC contractor (and controls contractor) of Division 15 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only):
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 2 10/22/2018
Construction and Acceptance Phases 1. Include the cost of commissioning in the contract price. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data,
commissioning documentation, O&M data and training. 3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the
Commissioning process. 4. Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of
commissioned equipment as part of the normal submittal process. 5. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the
CA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures. a. Provide detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, operating, troubleshooting and
maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force identified, to clear identification of the Owner’s responsibilities to keep the warranty in force. In addition, the installation, start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning authority.
b. The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation necessary for the commissioning process.
6. Subcontractors shall provide the GC a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, for distribution to the CA.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the Architect’s consulting engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
8. Provide assistance to the CA in preparing the specific functional performance test procedures. Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests.
9. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up procedures and the prefunctional checklists from the CA for all commissioned equipment. Submit to CA for review and approval prior to startup.
10. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment.
11. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA.
12. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the respective air- or water-related systems.
13. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem solving.
14. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA for specified equipment. Assist the CA in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary.
15. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the CA, and A/E and retest the equipment.
16. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
17. Prepare redline as-built drawings for all drawings and final as-builds for contractor-generated coordination drawings.
18. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified. 19. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the
validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period 1. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CA, according
to the specifications. 2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built drawings
for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 3 10/22/2018
C. TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (B) are: 1. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the CA
prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system.
2. The submitted plan will include: a. Review of the construction documents and the systems to sufficiently understand the
design intent for each system. b. All field checkout sheets and logs to be used that list each piece of equipment to be
tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings
during the process. d. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue. e. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used. f. Details of whether and how minimum outside air cfm will be verified and set, and for what
level (total building, zone, etc.). g. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity will be checked,
including any required room pressure differentials. h. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution) and final report.
3. Submit reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CA as required.
4. Communicate to the controls contractor all set point and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that affect the control system setup and operation.
5. Provide a draft TAB report to the CA. The report should follow the latest and reporting recommendations by AABC.
6. Provide the CA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports. 7. Provide final TAB reports in the number required. 8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as specified for TAB.
D. Equipment Suppliers
1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs. 3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CA.
4. Provide information requested by CA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures.
5. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives.
E. Commissioning Authority (CA) The CA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management. The CA may assist with problem-solving non-conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the Contractors and the A/E. The primary role of the CA is to develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan and observe and document performance, ensuring that systems are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start, check-out and functionally test equipment and systems, except for specified testing equipment supplied and installed by the CA. 1. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient
manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise.
2. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
3. Revise, as necessary, Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase. 4. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 4 10/22/2018
5. Request and review additional information required to perform commissioning tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start-up and checkout procedures.
6. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write detailed testing procedures.
7. Review and make recommendations to the A/E regarding normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, along with A/E reviews.
8. Write and distribute prefunctional tests and checklists. 9. Develop an enhanced start-up and initial systems checkout plan with Subcontractors. 10. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend
selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving any discrepancies.
11. Witness all or part of the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.
12. Witness all or part of any ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, if required, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.
13. Reports to the A/E results of prefunctional tests and checklist completion by reviewing prefunctional checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot checking.
14. Reports to the A/E results of systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site observation.
15. Review TAB execution plan. 16. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system and recommend to the A/E it to be
used for TAB, before TAB is executed. 17. Reports to the A/E results of air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing
completed reports and by selected site observation. 18. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the functional
performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may include energy management control system trending, or manual functional testing.
19. Analyze any functional performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance. 20. Coordinate, witness and approve manual functional performance tests performed by installing
contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved. 21. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. 22. Witness performance testing of smoke control systems by others if required and all other
owner contracted tests or tests by manufacturer’s personnel over which the CA may not have direct control. Document these tests and include this documentation in Commissioning Record in O&M manuals.
23. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are clearly defined. 24. Oversee and report to the Owner results of the training of the Owner’s operating personnel. 25. Compile and maintain a commissioning record and building systems book(s). 26. Review and assist the contractor with the preparation of the O&M manuals. 27. Provide a final commissioning report.
Warranty Period 1. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections. 2. Return to the site at 10 months into the 12 month warranty period and review with facility staff
the current building operation and the condition of outstanding issues related to the original and seasonal commissioning. Also interview facility staff and identify problems or concerns they have operating the building as originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording these changes in the O&M manuals. Identify areas that may come under warranty or under the original construction contract. Assist facility staff in developing reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems.
1.07. SCHEDULING
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 5 10/22/2018
A. The CA will work with the GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning activities. The CA will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC for scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.
B. The CA will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the
commissioning scope meeting. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed by the CA.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required
functional performance testing shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of
equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site.
C. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system
performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. MEETINGS
A. Scoping Meeting. Within 90 days of commencement of construction, the CA will schedule, plan
and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the GC. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CA to revise the Commissioning Plan to its “final” version, which will also be distributed to all parties.
B. Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CA as
construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Subs. The CA will plan these meetings and will minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs.
3.02. REPORTING
A. The CA will provide regular reports with increasing frequency as construction and commissioning
progresses.
B. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos, progress reports, etc.
C. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with
the review and testing as described in later sections. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 6 10/22/2018
D. A final summary report by the CA will be provided focusing on evaluating commissioning process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report. Pre-functional checklists, functional tests and monitoring reports will not be part of the final report, but will be stored in the Commissioning Record in the O&M manuals.
3.03. SUBMITTALS
A. The CA will provide appropriate contractors with a specific request for the type of submittal
documentation the CA requires to facilitate the commissioning work. These requests will be integrated into the normal submittal process and protocol of the construction team. At minimum, the request will include the manufacturer and model number, the manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance test procedures, control drawings and details of owner contracted tests. In addition, the installation and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning Authority. All documentation requested by the CA will be included by the Subs in their O&M manual contributions.
B. The Commissioning Authority will review submittals related to the commissioned equipment for
conformance to the Contract Documents as it relates to the commissioning process, to the functional performance of the equipment and adequacy for developing test procedures. This review is intended primarily to aid in the development of functional testing procedures and only secondarily to verify compliance with equipment specifications. The Commissioning Authority will notify the Architect, of items missing or areas that are not in conformance with Contract Documents and which require resubmission.
C. The CA may request additional design narrative from the A/E and Controls Contractor, depending
on the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences provided with the Specifications.
D. Submittals to the CA do not constitute compliance for O&M manual documentation. The O&M
manuals are the responsibility of the Contractor, though the CA will review and approve them.
3.04. START-UP, PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned. Some systems that are not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery may have very simplified prefunctional checklists (PCs) and startup.
A. General. Prefunctional checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are
hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full prefunctional checkout. No sampling strategies are used. The prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system.
B. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CA shall assist the commissioning team members
responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CA in this process is to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Parties responsible for prefunctional checklists and startup are identified in the commissioning scope meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in the testing requirements. 1. The CA adapts checklists that indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup
and initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution. 2. These checklists and tests are provided by the CA to the Contractor. The Contractor
determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form may have more than one trade responsible for its execution.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 7 10/22/2018
3. The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full start-up plan by combining (or adding to) the CA’s checklists with the manufacturer’s detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally used field checkout sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan. a. The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as: b. The CA’s prefunctional checklists. c. The manufacturer’s standard written start-up procedures copied from the installation
manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block added by hand at the end.
d. The manufacturer’s normally used field checkout sheets. 4. The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CA for review and approval. 5. The CA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them, noting
any procedures that need to be added. 6. The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the CM for review and
approval, depending on management protocol.
C. Sensor Calibration. Calibration of all sensors shall be included as part of the prefunctional checklists performed by the Contractors, according to the following procedures: 1. Sensors W ithout Transmitters—Standard Application. Make a reading with a calibrated test
instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat, gage or building automation system (BAS)) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. If not, install offset in BAS, calibrate or replace sensor.
Sensor
Required Tolerance (+/-)
Sensor
Required Tolerance (+/-)
AHU wet bulb or dew point 1.0F Flow rates, air 10% of design
Hot water coil and boiler water temp
1.0F Pressures, air, water and gas
5% of design
Outside air, space air, coil air temps
1.0F Watt-hour, voltage & amperage
2%
D. Execution of Prefunctional Checklists and Startup.
1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the GC and CA. The performance of the prefunctional checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off prefunctional checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification of completion of their work.
2. The CA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved).
3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, sensors, controllers), the CA shall observe a sampling of the prefunctional and start-up procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan.
4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CA with a signed and dated copy of the completed start-up and prefunctional tests and checklists.
5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the prefunctional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms.
E. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup.
1. The Subcontractors shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CA within two days of test completion.
2. The CA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval form to the Sub or CM. The CA shall work with the Subcontractors and vendors to correct and retest
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 8 10/22/2018
deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CA will involve the CM or GC and others as necessary. The installing Subcontractors or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely manner, and shall notify the CA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the CA recommends approval of the execution of the checklists and startup of each system using a standard form.
3.05. FUNCTIONAL TESTING - This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional testing for all
divisions.
A. Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the systems.
In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load) where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested.
B. Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CA shall obtain all
requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and parameters. The CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test shall provide assistance to the CA in developing the procedures review (answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CA may submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested.
The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated criteria of acceptance given on the test form.
C. Test Methods
1. Functional testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method specified.
2. Simulated Conditions. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical.
3. Altering Setpoints. Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating conditions is difficult, altering set points to test a sequence is acceptable. For example, to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature below 55F, when the outside air temperature is above 55F, temporarily change the lockout set point to be 2F above the current outside air temperature.
4. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications, to their pre-test condition.
D. Coordination and Scheduling. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their
completion schedule for the prefunctional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The CA will schedule functional tests through the GC and affected Subcontractors. The CA shall
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 9 10/22/2018
direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests.
In general, functional testing is conducted after prefunctional testing and startup has been satisfactorily completed. The control system is sufficiently tested and approved by the CA before it is used for TAB or to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of air-related or water- related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems is checked.
3.06. DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
A. Documentation. The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional tests using the
specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the GC for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The CA will include the filled out forms in the Commissioning Report.
B. Non-Conformance.
1. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported on a standard non- compliance form.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.
3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CA discusses the issue with the executing contractor. a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to correct it:
(1) The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions and they go on to another test or sequence
b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible: (1) The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the Sub’s
response and a copy given to the GC and to the Subcontractor representative assumed to be responsible.
(2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner.
(3) The CA documents the resolution process. (4) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party
corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the CA. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
5. Cost of Retesting. a. The cost for the Subcontractor to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they are
responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.
6. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CA at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.
7. The CA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project.
C. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following:
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 10 10/22/2018
1. Within one week of notification, the Contractor or manufacturer’s representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided within two weeks of the original notice.
2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation.
3. The Owner will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable.
4. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained.
D. Approval. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. The CA
recommends acceptance of each test using a standard form. The Owner gives final approval on each test using the same form, providing a signed copy to the CA and the Contractor.
3.07. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A. The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation
requirements elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Division 15 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in Division 15 and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, according to this section, prior to the training of owner personnel.
C. The CA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review.
D. Special Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation that may be specified elsewhere, the controls contractor shall compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system in labeled 3-ring binders with indexed tabs. 1. Three copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the O&M manuals. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing:
a. Specific instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other features of this system. These instructions shall be step-by-step. Indexes and clear tables of contents shall be included. The detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms shall be included if required in the controls specification section.
b. Full as-built set of control drawings. c. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment. d. Full points list. In addition to the updated points list required in the original submittal. e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system. f. Full as-built print out of software program as required. g. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility if required. h. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical
drawings with their control system designations. i. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods by
sensor type, etc. j. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc. k. Warranty requirements. l. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not
commissioning tests). 3. The manual shall be organized and subdivided with permanently labeled tabs for each of the
following data in the given order: a. Sequences of operation b. Control drawings c. Points lists
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 11 10/22/2018
d. Controller / module data e. Thermostats and timers f. Sensors and DP switches g. Valves and valve actuators h. Dampers and damper actuators i. Program setups (software program printouts)
4. Field checkout sheets and trend logs should be provided to the CA for inclusion in the Commissioning Record Book.
E. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the following with
other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Specifications. 1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions and
the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column headings.
2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross-reference the location in the TAB report.
F. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals shall
be made by the A/E and by the CA. 3.08. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that
training is completed.
B. The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment.
C. Mechanical Contractor. Each mechanical contractor shall have the following training
responsibilities: 1. Provide the CA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the
understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, terminal units, heating units and controls, etc.
3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training.
6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.
7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.
8. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in
the O&M manuals. b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating
requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.
c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 12 10/22/2018
d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and
manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. h. The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process, ASHRAE
Guideline 1- 1996 is recommended. i. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides, and
video/audio-taped material as might be appropriate. 9. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual,
shutdown and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment.
10. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system.
11. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner.
12. Duration of Training. The mechanical contractor shall provide training on each piece of equipment according to the following schedule.
Hours System 1 Air Handler Units 2 Condensing Units 2 Boilers
0.5 Variable Speed Drives 0.5 Return Fan/Relief Fan 0.5 Air Terminal Units 0.5 Specialty Exhaust Fans 0.5 Restroom Exhaust Fans
D. Controls Contractor. The controls contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. Provide the CA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training. 2. The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the control
system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all the capabilities of the control system.
3. Training manuals. The standard operating manual for the system and any special training manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M manuals. In addition, copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during training and three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals shall include detailed description of the subject matter for each session. The manuals will cover all control sequences and have a definitions section that fully describes all relevant words used in the manuals and in all software displays. Manuals will be approved by the CA. Copies of audiovisuals shall be delivered to the Owner.
4. The training will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees. 5. The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. The Owner shall
approve the instructor prior to scheduling the training. 6. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
7. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.
8. There shall be three training sessions: a. Training I. Control System. The first training shall consist of 4_ hours of actual
training. This training may be held on-site or in the supplier’s facility. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system installation. Upon completion, each student, using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.
b. Training II. Building Systems. The second session shall be held on-site for a period of 4_ hours of actual hands-on training after the completion of system commissioning.
The session shall include instruction on: MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 13 10/22/2018
(1) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this building and specific instruction for operating the installed system, including HVAC systems, lighting controls and any interface with security and communication systems.
(2) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restart routines, changing set points and alarms and other typical changed parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies and set points that if changed will adversely affect energy consumption, energy accounting, procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc.
(3) All trending and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization, etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and printing trends. Trainees will actually set-up trends in the presence of the trainer.
(4) Every screen shall be completely discussed, allowing time for questions. (5) Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone level. (6) Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or networks if included. (7) Setting up and changing an air terminal unit controller.
9. Training III. The third training will be conducted on-site six months after occupancy and consist of 2_ hours of training. The session will be structured to address specific topics that trainees need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system.
E. TAB
The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. TAB shall meet for
on the following: 2 hours with facility staff after completion of TAB and instruct them
a. Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type. b. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect the
proper delivery of air or water. c. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity. d. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not
finished. e. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.
3.08. WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan described
and the filled out start-up, initial checkout and prefunctional checklists. These work products will be supplied to the CA to be included in the final commissioning report.
3.09. SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
Spec
Division Name O & M
ManualsContractor
Tests Prefunctional
Checklists Functional
Tests Training
23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
X X
23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation X 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping X 23 20 02 HVAC Piping and Pumps X X X 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for
HVAC Controls X X X X
END 23 08 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 08 00 - 14 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. B. Base Bid:
1. HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor provides: a. A complete system of automatic temperature control for Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning. b. The Temperature Control System shall be 100% direct digital control, and shall be
complete with all thermostats, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, regulators and other accessories including all thermometers and gauges to maintain the conditions specified and detailed on the drawings and temperature control wiring for the interconnection of all parts of the system.
c. Furnish temperature control valves, control dampers and immersion wells. d. All power wiring required for actuation of valves, dampers, etc. wiring and devices shall
be provided in accordance with Division 16. 2. HVAC Contractor:
a. Install control valves provided with temperature controls. b. Install immersion wells required for temperature controls.
3. Electrical Contractor provides: a. Power wiring to temperature control panels.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 01 78 23 - Operating & Maintenance Data 2. 23 05 10 – Common Work Results for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 3. Section 230519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 4. Section 230993 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 5. Division 26 - Electrical
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. DDC: Direct digital control. B. I/O: Input/output. C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable
control devices and networks. D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing. E. PC: Personal computer. F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative. G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Comply with the following performance requirements:
1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds.
2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds.
3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 1 10/22/2018
6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C). g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F (1.5 deg C). h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C). i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg (2.5 Pa). n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg (25 Pa). o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Refer to drawings for the sequences of operation. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated. 1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and
model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.
2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware:
a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk data
conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations. 9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected
and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations. 10. Controlled Systems:
a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 2 10/22/2018
b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.
c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
d. Points list.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat [or sensor] cover with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat [or sensor] cover.
1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.
B. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks.
C. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [and] [manufacturer].
D. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.
2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.
3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.
5. Calibration records and list of set points.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.
2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique valve motor, controller, thermostat, positioning relay.
2. Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 3 10/22/2018
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.
B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.
B. Coordinate equipment with the electrical contractor to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.
C. Coordinate equipment with the electrical contractor to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.
D. Coordinate equipment with the electrical contractor to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.02 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. New control system shall be compatible with the existing system and Owner-approved equal.
B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.
2.03 DDC EQUIPMENT
A. Operator Workstation: shall be compatible with the existing control system and shall be Owner-approved equal.
2.04 ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 4 10/22/2018
1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer.
2.05 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.
1. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1. Manufacturers’:
a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
b. Owner-approved equal.
2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.
3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
2.06 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers’:
1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2. Erie Controls.
3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
4. Valves shall be compatible with the existing control system and Owner-approved equal.
B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.
3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom.
b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 5 10/22/2018
4. Sizing: 5-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a. Two Position: Line size.
b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure drop, whichever is more.
c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above.
5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.
6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.
3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation. B. Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before
proceeding with installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and
room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the floor. D. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 230553
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232300
"Refrigerant Piping." 3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are
exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several
cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system,
except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment. D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic
duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in
hand position. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 6 10/22/2018
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig or 1.5 times the operating pressure for 24 hours, with maximum 5-psig loss.
5. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
6. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required.
7. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.
8. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
9. Test software and hardware interlocks.
C. DDC Verification:
1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations.
4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.
6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators.
8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
11. Check DDC system as follows:
a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.
b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.
c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 7 10/22/2018
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Check analog outputs using milli-ampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.
c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.
6. Pressure:
a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum.
7. Temperature:
a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.
b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.
9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.
10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 00 - 8 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor provides:
a. A complete system of automatic temperature control for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.
b. The Temperature Control System shall be 100% direct digital control, and shall be complete with all thermostats, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, regulators and other accessories including all thermometers and gauges to maintain the conditions specified and detailed on the drawings and temperature control wiring for the interconnection of all parts of the system.
c. Furnish temperature control valves, control dampers and immersion wells. d. All power wiring required for actuation of valves, dampers, etc. wiring and devices shall
be provided in accordance with Division 16. 2. HVAC Contractor:
a. Install control valves provided with temperature controls. b. Install immersion wells required for temperature controls.
3. Electrical Contractor provides: a. Power wiring to temperature control panels.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 01 78 23 - Operating & Maintenance Data 2. 23 05 10 – Common Work Results for Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 3. Division 26 - Electrical
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The installation shall be done by factory trained mechanics who are regularly employed by the
temperature control manufacturer.
B. All digital equipment furnished shall have been tested and made to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to subpart J or Part 15 of FCC rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. All literature shall so note and all equipment shall be so labeled to show this compliance.
1.04. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish DDC controllers, including damper actuator and pressure differential sensor
B. This Contractor shall provide all necessary wiring necessary for control system specified. No
empty conduits will be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Contractor shall use 120V circuits provided by the Electrical Contractor in the Mechanical Rooms (See Electrical Drawings). 1. Division 16 will do all power wiring to motors. 2. Section 15950 Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, wiring, relays, transformers,
panels, EP switches, etc., required to perform the control and interlock requirements hereinafter specified.
3. All work shall conform to Division 16 of these specifications, and shall be 120V – 1 phase or less.
4. Install all control wiring in conduit, except as specified below. 5. All wiring conduit shall be concealed in all finished locations except it may be exposed in
mechanical equipment rooms.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 1 10/22/2018
6. Existing buildings: a. Use MC cable in hollow wall in existing finished rooms. b. Use Wiremold raceways for exposed wiring in existing finished rooms where MC cable
cannot be used. c. “Open” wiring may be used above existing, inaccessible ceilings.
7. “Open” wiring may be used as follows: a. Concealed, accessible locations only. b. UL “plenum rated” where ceilings cavity is an air plenum. c. Run neatly, parallel, or perpendicular to building lines. Tie to construction 4ft.-0in. O.C.
max. using rings, hooks and ties. d. Use existing communication system cable trays for signal wiring only. e. Do not bundle or coil excess wire. f. Mechanical equipment room wiring shall be in conduit.
8. Furnish and install all required control wiring, raceways, junction boxes, etc. required, including “control” power supply and wiring and raceways required for control work, transformers, DDC panels, etc. Obtain power from nearest adequate spare circuits.
9. Control wiring or power supply for control wiring shall NOT be installed in Division 16 raceways.
10. Coordinate with the Division 16 Electrical Contractor to insure that the proper auxiliary contacts are furnished in motor starters. Most starters and auxiliary contacts will be furnished under Division 16.
11. Provide dedicated 120V electrical power circuit to each DDC panel, device, etc. 12. All “points” shall be hard wired (no power line carrier points).
1.05. DEFINITIONS
A. Normally Open: A normally open valve or damper will be in the open position when the
energizing force is absent.
B. Normally Closed: A normally closed valve or damper will be in the closed position when the energized force is absent.
C. Minimum Position: The dampers position which is related to the least quantity of air required to
be delivered through the VAV box or outdoor air damper. The quantity to be delivered shall be specified by the Architect/Engineer.
1.06. SUBMITTALS
A. In accord with 15010.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. The following information shall be provided upon project completion. Provide one set for
each operating manual. a. Shop drawings of control system showing all devices, all interconnections between
devices, and all connections to items provided by others. Provide a sequence of operation and a complete I/O Summary indicating input and output devices and their connection point.
b. Specification data sheets on each device. c. An operator’s manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations associated
with the machine interface. d. An operator’s reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points, output
points and unguarded software parameters. Settings shall be shown where applicable. e. A programmer’s manual which will include all information necessary to perform the
programming function. f. A language which will include a detailed description of the language used and all
routines, modules, etc., used by the system. g. Flow charts of the DDCP software programs. h. A complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs.
2. Shop drawings submitted shall show complete schematic ladder and physical wiring diagrams for all electrical components.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 2 10/22/2018
C. Upon completion of the installation and final system adjustment, the Controls Contractor shall provide (3) full sets, and an electronic set on CD, of record document as-built drawings of the installation and the control sequence. Also provide record document as-built drawings within a CAD file on the energy management system such that the Owner will be able to look at the control drawing as-built, within the EMS system by calling up the file on their hard drive.
D. Product Data:
1. All devices.
E. Control System Manual: 1. Provide six hard back three ring binders with complete operation and maintenance
instruction, 15010. 2. The manuals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
1.07. TRAINING
A. Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) training sessions during the contract period.
1. Session 1: Covering Direct Digital Control System (minimum 16 hours) approximately one week following checkout and start-up of the DDC System.
2. Session 2: Follow-up, covering Direct Digital Control System (minimum 8 hours), approximately one month following checkout and start-up of the DDC System.
3. All training sessions shall be videotaped on standard VHS format cassettes and delivered to the User.
B. Prior to the first session, the Contractor shall provide an outline of all topics to be covered for
approval by the Owner.
C. The instructors shall be a corporate training instructor, be competent and have full knowledge of the system installed, and shall provide training specifically oriented to the Owner’s installed system.
D. The instructors shall utilize the operating and maintenance manual provided for the system as a
reference manual during the training session. At minimum, these sessions shall include the following: 1. Description of the overall control system configuration and physical layout, indicating location
of all sensors and controlled devices. 2. Description of all programs and program features (software). 3. Description of the control strategies being utilized at the installation. 4. Description of all key hardware components utilized in the system. 5. Instructions on how to communicate with (i.e., command and monitor) the system’s DDCP. 6. Description of the programming instructions required to use the system. 7. Description of diagnostic trouble-shooting techniques for the entire system.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. SYSTEMS
A. Systems shall be manufactured by:
1. Johnson Controls Co.(309/691-5400) 2. Delta Controls (Entec Services, 309/697-2122) 3. Siebe Environmental (309/688-7411) 4. Approved Equal
2.02. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Automation System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, fire management, information management, and historical data collection and archiving.
B. The Building Automation System shall consist of the following:
1. Standalone DDC Panels
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 3 10/22/2018
2. Application Specific Controllers 3. Local Display Devices 4. Portable Operator’s Terminals 5. Personal Computer Operator Workstation
The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, Standalone DDC Panels, and operator devices.
C. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm
reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.
D. Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and
alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without dependence upon a central processing device, including a Central File Server. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations, terminals, and printers without dependence upon a central processing device or File Server.
2.03. NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS
The design of the BAS shall network Operator Workstations and Standalone DDC Panels. Inherent in the system’s design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local area network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the two networking schemes.
A. Local Area Network:
1. Workstation/DDC Panel Support: Operator Workstations and DDC panels shall directly reside on a single shared high speed local area network such that communications may be executed directly between controllers, directly between workstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis.
2. Dynamic Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data, or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local area network. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment.
3. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the CBAS network and shall be transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs.
4. General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: a. High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple
controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices. The minimum baud rate shall be 1 Megabaud.
b. Support of any combination of controllers and Operator Workstations directly connected to the local area network.
c. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for automatically re- configuring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures.
d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. e. Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity. f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are
reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond. g. Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components shall be used to allow the
BAS to coexist with other networking applications. The following are acceptable technologies: ARCNET and/or ETHERNET and/or SERVICE TELEPHONE PHILS and/or BROADBAND.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 4 10/22/2018
h. Communications must be of a deterministic nature to assure calculable performance under worst-case network loading. When a collision-based network is proposed, the Installer shall provide detailed calculations showing worst-case network response times.
i. Automatic synchronization of the real-time clocks in all DDC panels shall be provided.
B. Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow Standalone DDC Panels to communicate with remote operator devices on an intermittent basis via telephone lines. 1. Dial-Up Standalone DDC Panels: Auto-Dial panels shall automatically place calls to
workstations to report critical alarms, or to upload trend and historical information for archiving. a. Standalone DDC Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of
calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms.
b. The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, “no-answers,” and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices.
2. Dial-Up Workstations: Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modification functions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and either file or display information sent from remote DDC panels. a. An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any facility by its
logical name. The PC Dial-Up program shall maintain a user-definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers.
b. A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a local area network, as well as a workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC panels or networks connected via modems. Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local area network activity, nor shall local area network activity keep the workstation from handling incoming calls.
3. Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of Hayes compatible 56K baud modems and voice grade telephone lines. Each standalone DDC panel may have its own modem, or a group of Standalone DDC panels may share a modem. Telephone lines shall be furnished and installed by the owner.
2.04. STANDALONE DDC PANELS
A. General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-
time digital control processors. Each Standalone DDC Panel shall consist of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.
B. Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and
databases including: 1. Control Processes 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Alarm Management 4. Historical/Trend Data for all points 5. Maintenance Support Applications 6. Custom Processes 7. Operator I/O 8. Dial-Up Communications 9. Manual Override Monitoring
C. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
1. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts 2. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control 3. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 5 10/22/2018
4. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment
5. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
D. Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators. The system architecture shall support 10% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all point types included in the initial installation.
E. Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC Panels shall be capable of providing at least two
RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable DDC panel Operator’s Terminals. Standalone DDC Panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or network terminals.
F. Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the
ability to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the panel is powered or not.
G. Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides,
and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and monthly reports.
H. Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary
input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device.
I. Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel, and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.
J. Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as
all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980.
K. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of
all Standalone DDC Panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non- Volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery back-up shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically initiate an orderly soft start of all equipment and resume full operation without manual intervention.
Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel will automatically receive a download via the local area network, phone lines, or connected computer. In addition, the user shall have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS- 232C port, or via telephone line dial-in.
2.05. SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A. General: 1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification
shall be provided. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 6 10/22/2018
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
B. Control Software Description:
1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms: a. Two Position Control b. Proportional Control c. Proportional plus Integral Control d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control e. Automatic Proportional Control Loop Tuning
2. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
3. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
4. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
C. Energy Management Applications: DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the
following energy management routines: 1. Time of Day Scheduling 2. Calendar Based Scheduling 3. Holiday Scheduling 4. Temporary Schedule Overrides 5. Optimal Start 6. Optimal Stop 7. Night Setback Control 8. Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer) 9. Peak Demand Limiting 10. Temperature Compensated Load Rolling 11. Fan Speed/CFM Control 12. Heating/Cooling Interlock 13. Cold Deck Reset 14. Hot Deck Reset 15. Hot Water Reset 16. Chilled Water Reset 17. Condenser Water Reset 18. Chiller Sequencing
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.
D. Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job- specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines. 1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom
process: a. Any system-measured point data or status b. Any calculated data c. Any results from other processes d. User-defined constants e. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exponential, etc.) f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 7 10/22/2018
a. Time interval b. Time of day c. Date d. Other processes e. Time programming f. Events (e.g., point alarms)
3. Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
4. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local area network.
5. Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator I/O to a specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer.
6. Custom Process Documentation: The custom control programming feature shall be self- documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical flowcharts and English language descriptors.
E. Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel’s ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network. 1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point’s
English language description, time and date of occurrence and description of problem. 2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list of operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point’s descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.
5. Each Standalone DDC Panel shall be capable of storing a library of at least 250 alarm messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the panel.
6. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
7. Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically logged to disk in PC industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated from direct- connected workstations, dial-up workstations, and local DDC panel Network Terminal devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data shall be available at the Operator Workstation. Facility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction file using standard database query techniques, including searching by dates, operator name, data point name, etc. In addition, this transaction file shall be accessible with standard third party database and spreadsheet packages.
F. Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be
provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways: 1. Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC Panels shall store Point History Files for all
analog and binary inputs and outputs. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 8 10/22/2018
2. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half hour intervals. Samples for all points shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.
3. Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC Panels shall also provide high resolution sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
4. Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours shall be provided. Each Standalone DDC Panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing a minimum of +5000 data samples.
5. Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC Panels, and uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data shall be available in disk file format compatible with third party personal computer applications.
G. Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification. 1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
H. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary pulse input-type points. 1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units
(e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.). 2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less. 3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
I. Event Totalization: Standalone DDC Panels shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. 1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum
of 9,999,999 events before reset. 2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.06. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. Each Standalone DDC Panel shall be able to extend its performance and capacity through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).
B. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control
responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
C. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases
including: 1. Control Processes 2. Energy Management Applications 3. Operator I/O
D. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through any network-resident
PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator’s terminal connected to any DDC panel in the network.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 9 10/22/2018
E. Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the use of a portable terminal. The capabilities of the portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Display temperatures 2. Display status 3. Display set points 4. Display control parameters 5. Override binary output control 6. Override analog set points 7. Modification of gain and offset constants
F. Power fail Protection: All system set points, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any
other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.
G. Configuration and Download: The ASCs shall have the capability of receiving configuration and
program loading by all of the following: 1) locally, via a direct connect portable laptop service tool, 2) over the network, from the portable laptop service tool, and; 3) from the Operator Workstation, via the communication networks.
H. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Application Specific Controllers shall have the
capability to automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.
I. HVAC Application Descriptions:
1. AHU Controllers: a. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of
systems to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: (1) Large Air Handling Units (2) Mixed Air-Single Path (3) Mixed Air-Dual Path (4) 100% Single Path (5) 100% Dual Path
b. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
c. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
d. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each AHU Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
e. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
2. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers: a. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the
following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion: (1) Single Duct Only (Cooling Only, or Cooling with Reheat). (2) Fan Powered (Parallel/Side Pocket, Series/On-Off Logic) (3) Dual Duct (Constant Volume, Variable Volume) (4) Supply/Exhaust
b. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: (1) Proportional Cooling Outputs (2) Box and Baseboard Heating Outputs (Proportional, or 1 to 3 Stages) (3) Fan Control Output (On/Off Logic, or Proportional Series Fan Logic)
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 10 10/22/2018
c. The modes of operation supported by the VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall minimally include, but not be limited to, the following: (1) Day/Weekly Schedules (2) Comfort/Occupancy Mode (3) Economy Mode (Standby Mode, Unoccupied, etc.) (4) Temporary Override Mode
d. Occupancy-Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
e. Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the interface to an associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of either an occupancy sensing device, or manual wall switch, the VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall provide a contact output to automatically adjust the lighting level to accommodate occupant requirements while reducing electrical consumption. Standby/Comfort (described in the previous section) and Lighting overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
f. Alarm Management: Each VAV Terminal Unit Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
3. HVAC Application Specific Controller Configuration: a. The Application Specific Controllers shall be configured using an intuitive, easy-to-use
configuration tool. Standard, pre-tested, HVAC applications will be “built-in” the tool. It is the intent that a non-programmer, fluent with HVAC systems, and not necessarily with computer programming, be capable of using the configuration tool with minimal training.
b. The tool will utilize a question and answer format to aid the user in configuration. The tool will automatically query the user for desired operational characteristics, along with desired fail-safe and fault condition configurations, in order to assure proper HVAC system operation and protection.
c. Systems that require free-form programming will not be acceptable. 2.07. OPERATOR INTERFACE A. Basic Interface Description:
1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software. The operator interface shall minimize the use of a typewriter style keyboard through the useof a mouse or similar pointing device, and “point and click” approach to menu selection. For example, users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change set points from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.
2. Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user, Operator Workstations shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices.
3. Multiple, Concurrent Displays: The Operator Interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously view several different types of system displays in a windowing environment to speed facility operation and analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphic depicting an air handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associated space temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance. If the interface is unable to display several different types of displays at the same time, the CBAS installer shall provide at least two operator stations.
4. Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices, including DDC panel
portable or panel-mounted Network Terminals. Any additions or changes made to password definition shall automatically cause passwords at all DDC panels on a network to be updated and downloaded to minimize the task of maintaining system security. Users shall not be required to update passwords for DDC panels individually.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 11 10/22/2018
b. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported. c. A minimum of 50 passwords shall be supported. d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective
passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device, including portable or panel mounted devices, shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.
e. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.
5. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment b. Adjust set points c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming d. Enable/Disable process execution e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point g. Enable/Disable Trending for each point h. Override PID Loop set points i. Enter temporary override schedules j. Define Holiday Schedules k. Change time/date l. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits m. Enter/Modify analog warning limits n. View limits o. Enable/Disable Demand Limiting for each meter p. Enable/Disable Duty Cycle for each load
6. Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated automatically or manually, and directed to either CRT displays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports: a. A general listing of all points in the network b. List all points currently in alarm c. List of all off-line points d. List all points currently in override status e. List of all disabled points f. List all points currently locked out g. List of all items defined in a “Follow-Up” file h. List all Weekly Schedules i. List all Holiday Programming j. List of Limits and Deadbands Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the Computerized Building Automation System. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.
7. Third Party Interface System data, including transactions, alarms, totalization files, etc., shall be stored on the workstation disk drive in an industry standard database format (e.g., dBase IV) such that it is compatible with off the shelf third party database and spreadsheet programs.
8. Live BAS Data Exchange: 9. The Building Automation System shall interface to off-the-shelf personal computer software
programs (e.g., Microsoft Word for Windows, Microsoft Excel, Lotus, etc.) This interface shall conform to Microsoft Corporation’s Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) protocols and standards. The user shall have the ability to “link” the computer programs directly to live, real-time Building Automation System data values. Systems that offer data exchange using only historical, disk resident information will not be acceptable. BAS data value “reads” and “writes” shall both be permissible.
B. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for
each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 12 10/22/2018
1. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands.
2. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.
3. Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. a. The BAS installer shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting
standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following: (1) Define symbols (2) Position and size symbols (3) Define background screens (4) Define connecting lines and curves (5) Define and display colors for all elements (6) Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other
displays.
C. System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control. 1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to
allow an operator to independently perform the following functions: a. Add/Delete/Modify Standalone DDC Panels b. Add/Delete/Modify Operator Workstations c. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers d. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and
tuningconstants e. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point f. Add/Delete/Modify control loops g. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications h. Add/Delete/Modify time and calendar-based programming i. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point j. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point k. Add/Delete/Modify custom control processes l. Add/Delete/Modify any and all graphic displays, symbols, and cross-references to point
data m Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition n. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords o. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages
2. Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, DDC panels, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the- blank templates and graphical programming approach. Graphical programming shall allow the user to define the software configuration of DDC control logic for HVAC system control sequences, fan interlocks, pump interlocks, PID control loops, and other control relationships through the creation of graphical logic flow diagrams. a. Graphical Programming: Control sequences are created by using a mouse input device
to draw interconnecting lines between symbols depicting inputs, operators (comparisons and mathematical calculations), and outputs of a control sequence. As a minimum, graphic symbols shall be used to represent: (1) Process Inputs, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure values, status, time, date,
or any other measured or calculated system data. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 13 10/22/2018
(2) Mathematical Process Operators, such as addition, subtraction, multiplication, or greater than, equal to, less than, etc.
(3) Logical Process Operators such as AND, OR, Exclusive OR, NOT, etc. (4) Time Delays (5) Process Control Outputs such as start/stop control points, analog adjust points, etc. (6) Process Calculation Outputs (e.g. PID, Sequencers) (7) Text file Outputs and Advisories
b. Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single DDC panel, but shall be able to include data from any and all other DDC panels to allow the development of network-wide control strategies. Processes shall also allow the operator to use the results of one process as the input to any number of other processes (cascading).
c. Sequence Testing and Simulation: A software tool shall be provided, which allows a user to simulate control sequence execution and test strategies before they are actually applied to mechanical systems. Users shall be able to enter hypothetical input data, and verify desired control response and calculation results via graphical displays and hard copy printouts.
3. System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration and application data. Control process and DDC control loop documentation shall be provided in logical, graphical flow diagram format to allow control sequences to be easily interpreted and modified at any time in the future.
4. Database Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all standalone DDC panel databases shall be stored in at least one Operator Workstation. Continuous supervision of the integrity of all DDC panel data bases shall be provided. In the event that any DDC panel on the network experiences a loss of its data base for any reason, the system shall automatically download a new copy of the respective data base to restore proper operation. Data base back-up/Download shall occur over the local area network without operator intervention. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of any or all portions of a DDC panels data base.
D. Personal Computer Operator Workstation Description:
1. Computer to be provided with the fastest CPU available at time of bidding 2. 16 GB RAM - Expandable to 32 GB 3. Minimum 1 TB Hard Drive 4. Current version USB ports 5. 17” color monitor 6. 600 dpi Laser Printer 7. Modem 8. Network Interface Card
E. Standalone DDC Panel Local or Portable Operator’s Terminals: Each DDC panel shall be
capable of supporting an Operator’s Terminal for local command entry, instantaneous and historical data display. 1. There shall be a provision for both permanently mounting the Standalone DDC Panel
Operator Terminal, or using it as a portable hand-held unit. 2. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall simultaneously display a minimum of 6 points with
full English identification to allow an operator to view single screen dynamic displays depicting entire mechanical systems.
3. The operator functions provided by the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Start and Stop Points b. Modify Set points c. Modify PID Loop Set points d. Override PID Control e. Change Time/Date f. Add/Modify Start/Stop Weekly Scheduling g. Add/Modify Set point Weekly Scheduling h. Enter Temporary Override Schedules i. Define Holiday Schedules
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 14 10/22/2018
j. View Analog Limits k. Enter/Modify Analog Warning Limits l. Enter/Modify Analog Alarm Limits m. Enter/Modify Analog Differentials n. View Point History Files
4. The DDC panel Operator Terminal shall provide access to all real or calculated points in the controller to which it is connected, or any other controller in the network. This capability shall not be restricted to a set of predefined “global points,” but shall provide totally open exchange of data between the operator terminal and any DDC panel in the network.
5. Operator access at all DDC panel Operator Terminals shall be identical to each other, as well as identical to the PC or Laptop Operator Workstations. Any password changes shall automatically be downloaded to all DDC controllers on the network.
6. The DDC panel operator terminal shall provide English language prompting to eliminate the need for the user to remember command formats or point names. Prompting shall be provided consistent with a user’s password clearance and the types of points being displayed, to eliminate the possibility of operator error.
7. A multi-function touchpad shall be provided for point and command selection, as well as parameter entry. To minimize the possibility of operator error, the DDC panel Operator Terminal shall change and limit touchpad functions based upon an operator’s password clearance, the function being performed, and types of points being displayed. Screen displays shall clearly indicate only valid touchpad functions.
8. Context-Sensitive Help: On-line, interactive user’s “Help” manuals and tutorials shall be provided. Based upon operator request, the “help” function shall provide general system operating instructions, and specific descriptions of commands available in the currently displayed menus.
9. Identification for all real or calculated points shall be consistent for all network devices. The same English language names used at PC workstations shall be used to access points at the DDC panel Operator’s Terminal to eliminate cross-reference or look-up tables.
10. In addition to instantaneous summaries, the DDC panel Operator’s Terminal shall allow a user to view a Point History file for system points. Point History files shall provide a record of value of analog points over the last 24 hours, at 30-minute intervals, or a record of the last ten status changes for binary type points.
2.08. DAMPERS
A. Rectangular Dampers - Opposed and Parallel Operation:
1. Frame: 13 gage, galvanized sheet steel. 2. Blade: Double layer of 22 gage galvanized sheet steel with santoprene seal. 3. Blade Pins: 3/8 in. (9 mm) square, steel pins, zinc plated. 4. Bearings: Acetal. 5. Linkage: Steel, zinc plated. 6. Leakage: 3 CFM per square foot at 1 in. WG static pressure with 2000 FPM approach
velocity on a 48”x48” damper. 7. Ambient Temperature Limits: -40 deg. F. to 200 deg. F. 8. Blades shall be linked for opposed operation on modulating control and parallel operation for
2-position control. 2.09. DAMPER ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC
A. Damper actuators shall be of the direct-mount, spring return, electric type suitable for use with
on/off, incremental or proportional control. 1. Power Requirements: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC; 12 VA supply, minimum for
on/off models and 10 VA for proportional and incremental models. 2. Input Signal: Proportional models shall accept either a 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA signal with
adjustable zero and span and selectable direct (CW) or reverse (CCW) action. 3. Ambient Temperature Limits: Operating -4 deg. F. to 122 deg. F. 4. All damper actuators shall be of sufficient size to operate their respective dampers properly. 5. Only Belimo or Johnson Controls actuators will be acceptable.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 15 10/22/2018
2.10. CONTROL VALVES
A. Body Size 1/2” to 2”: 1. Service: Steam or hot and cold water 2. Body: Cast bronze 3. Bonnet: Brass 4. Body Thread: NPT 5. Valve Body Rating: Meets requirements of ANSI B16.15, Class 250 6. Pressure/Temperature Limits: Water - 400 psig up to 150 deg. F. decreasing to 365 psig at
248 deg. F.; Steam - 35 psig saturated 7. Flow Characteristics: Equal percentage for normally open and normally closed valves and
linear for three-way mixing valves. 8. Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop: 35 psi for 1/2 through 1-1/4” valves; 30
psi for 9. 1-1/2” and 2” valves. 10. Ambient Temperature Limits: 36 to 149 deg. F.
B. Body Size over 2”:
1. Service: Steam or hot and cold water 2. Body: Cast iron 3. Stem: Stainless Steel 4. Plug: Brass 5. Body Thread: Raised Face Flanges 6. Valve Body Rating: Meets requirements of ANSI B16.1, Class 125 7. Pressure/Temperature Limits: Water - 175 psig up to 150 deg. F. decreasing to 125 psig at 8. 281 deg. F. 9. Flow Characteristics: Equal percentage for normally open and normally closed valves and
linear for three-way mixing valves. 10. Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop: 35 psi 11. Ambient Temperature Limits: -10 to 150 deg. F.
2.11. VALVE ACTUATORS - ELECTRIC
A. Valve actuators shall be of the direct-mount, spring return or non-spring return, electric type
suitable for use with on/off, incremental or proportional control. 1. Power Requirements: 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC; 12 VA supply, minimum for
on/off models and 10 VA for proportional and incremental models. 2. Input Signal: Proportional models shall accept either a 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA signal with
adjustable zero and span and selectable direct (CW) or reverse (CCW) action. 3. Ambient Temperature Limits: Operating -4 deg. F. to 122 deg. F. 4. All valve actuators shall be of sufficient size to operate their respective valves properly.
2.12. TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. All temperature sensors shall be of the 1000 ohm thin-film nickel design with a maximum error of
plus or minus 0.34 deg. F. @ 70 deg. F. 1. Duct Averaging: 8’ or 17’ averaging type to be used in discharge and mixed air applications. 2. Well Insertion: 8” probe with 1/2” NPT threads. 3. Outdoor Air: 3” probe with outdoor air shield. 4. Space: features adjustable, scaled set point of 65 to 85 deg. F., phone jack connection,
pushbutton override and liquid bulb thermometer.
2.13. HUMIDITY SENSORS
A. All humidity sensors shall be all-polymer with integral thin-film nickel temperature sensor. 1. Duct Mount Sensor: Probe type with an error of plus or minus 3% RH over 5-95% RH.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Johnson Controls HE-6310-2 2. High Limit Sensor: Probe type for use as a high-limit override controller (proportional or two-
position) that interfaces with a system controller.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 16 10/22/2018
2.14. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSORS
A. Differential pressure sensors shall sense differential or gauge (static) pressure and convert this pressure difference to a proportional analog output.
B. Air Systems Features:
1. 0 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA proportional output. 2. Factory calibrated with adjustable zero and span offset. 3. Ambient Temperature Limits: 0 to 175 deg. F.
C. Water Systems Features:
1. 4 to 20 mA proportional output. 2. Factory calibrated with adjustable zero and span offset. 3. Ambient Temperature Limits: -40 to 185 deg. F.
2.15. LOW LIMIT THERMOSTATS
A. Sensing element of 20 feet of the vapor tension type, so that any point along the entire length of
the measuring element is capable of triggering the switching action.
B. Features: 1. Manual reset. 2. One SPST normally open contact and one SPST normally closed contact. 3. Temperature range of 15 to 55 deg. F.
2.16. CURRENT SENSING DEVICES
A. The sensor shall be capable of sensing RMS alternating current from 1 to 135 amps without the use of external current transformers. All power for the sensing circuits for the sensor shall be induced from the monitored conductor. The sensor shall be capable of being used of both constant and variable loads.
B. Features:
1. Adjustable set point. 2. Visual indication of the sensor status by an LED.
2.17. SPACE THERMOSTATS
A. Electric space thermostats shall be of the low voltage design.
B. Features: 1. Impact resistant plastic or metal cover. 2. Single scaled set point – accessible to occupant. 3. Override pushbutton. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Johnson Controls TE-64135-1100 or equal
3. EXECUTION
3.01. SENSORS AND CONTROLLERS INSTALLATION
A. Room thermostats shall be mounted 54 inches above floor, unless otherwise noted. B. Provide insulated sub-bases for thermostats mounted on surfaces which experience excessive
hot or cold temperatures.
C. Install sensor and controllers per manufacturer’s recommendations.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 17 10/22/2018
3.02. CONTROL DAMPER OPERATORS INSTALLATION
A. Dampers shall be installed per Section 15891.
B. Proper linking of damper operators shall be the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor.
C. Provide damper operators for all motorized control dampers.
D. Provide quantity of damper operator as required for each damper operation.
3.03. THERMOSTAT GUARDS
A. Provide clear Lexan locking covers with a key lock for all thermostats where noted on drawings.
B. Key all covers alike.
3.04. COMMISSIONING
A. Control system to be setup and checked out by factory trained competent technicians skilled in the setting and adjustment of BAS equipment used in this project. This technician is to be experienced in the type of systems associated with this BAS.
B. At time of final observation, demonstrate the sequence of operation for each system to Architect.
Perform system demonstration as directed by Owner and Architect.
3.05. CONTROL
SEQUENCE A. See
Section 15985.
3.06. DDCP FUNCTION SUMMARY
A. For each system to be controlled, submit a detailed point schedule indicating all connected points for control and/or indication and associated software required to accomplish the control sequences described in the Section for approval by the Architect/Engineer. The above mentioned schedule shall be in a matrix form.
B. It is the intent of this specification that all control logic and sequences be accomplished via
software within the DDCP. Proposed systems requiring additional external (to the DDCP) hardware to perform the specified sequence will not be acceptable.
END 23 09 93.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 09 93 - 18 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Mechanical Contractor provide pipe and pipe fittings for:
a. Refrigerant system b. Chilled water system as specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 21 13 – Hydronic Piping 2. 23 23 00 – Refrigerant Piping
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. PIPE MATERIAL
A. Conform to the Federal Specification or other standard specification listed with each item as follows: 1. Cast-iron soil pipe and fittings - F.S. WW-P-401 D(1) 2. Cast-iron drainage fittings - F.S. WW-P-491B (ANS-B16) 3. Cast-iron drainage, vent and waste pipe (threaded) - F.S. WW-P-356A. 4. 125 lb. cast-iron screwed fittings - F.S. WW-P-501D. 5. Malleable - iron screwed fittings - F.S. WW-P-521P 6. Steel pipe - F.S. WW-P-404D (ASTM A53) and WW-P-406D (ASTM A120). 7. Cast-iron water pipe - F.S. WW-P-421c. 8. Cast-iron water pipe fittings - ANS A21.10. 9. Copper tubing - Water - F.S. WW-T-797D, or WW-T-799D. 10. Soldered joint fittings - ASA-B, 16.22. 11. Wrought iron pipe - F.S. WW-P-441c. 12. Copper drainage tube (DWV) - ASTM B 306-58. 13. Acid Waste - US CS 197-60. 14. Brass Pipe - F.S. WW-P-351A, 85 percent CU. 15. Bronze screwed fittings - F.S. WW-P-460B (1).
B. All pipe material shall be new, scale free, and without flaws or defects.
C. Acceptable manufacturers: U. S. Pipe, Tyler Pipe, Youngstown Sheet & Tube, Mueller Brass Co.,
Anaconda, or Chase Brass.
2.02. PIPE FITTINGS
A. Fittings for black pipe 2-inch and smaller, unless otherwise specified, shall be screwed cast iron F.S. WW-P-501 and all black threaded nipples shall be Schedule 80. Fittings for pipe 2-1/2 inch and larger shall have welded fittings, including ells, tees, nozzles, couplings, reducers, (ANSI B16.11).
B. Fittings for steel pipe shall be of the same weight and material as listed for pipe. Bending of steel
pipe will not be acceptable except as approved by the Architect/Engineer for expansion loops or offsets. Acceptable manufacturers: Taylor Forge, Crane, or Tube Turn.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 20 02 - 1 10/22/2018
C. Fittings to be used with copper pipe shall be wrought copper (ASA-B16.22) solder type fittings, installed with solder joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Solder shall be silfos or silver solder for 212 degrees Fahrenheit temperature; or silver solder where buried in concrete or below grade.
D. Provide eccentric reducers for proper drainage and venting. Reducing fittings shall be used for
changes in pipe size. Bushings and reducing flanges shall not be used. Acceptable manufacturers: Mueller Brass Co., Anaconda, or Chase Brass.
E. Fittings for cast iron pipe shall be same weight and material and joint type as listed for cast iron
pipe. Acceptable manufacturers: Tyler Pipe, U. S. Pipe and Foundry, or Alabama Pipe Company.
2.03. UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. All unions in copper pipe shall be Mueller, Anaconda, or Chase Brass solder joint unions constructed for 150 psi working pressure.
B. Unions in 2-inch steel pipe and smaller shall be ground joint brass to steel (F.S. WW-U-531), for
250 psi working pressure.
C. All unions 2-1/2 inches in size and larger shall have companion flanges (ASA-B16.1). Flanged unions shall be Van Stone, Cranelap, or Walworth, over welding nipples welded into pipelines as hereinafter specified.
D. All flanges shall be forged steel flanges (ASA-B16.5) constructed for 150 lbs. working pressure.
All bolts for flanged joints shall be made of bolt steel and shall have clean-cut U.S. threads with upset hex heads and semi-flush hexagonal cold pressed nuts.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. The arrangement of piping in the several systems shall be as shown on the drawings. Consult and closely cooperate with all other contractors so that the installation of work of each contractor will be in proper arrangement and coordination. See space priority specified in 01042.
B. If conflicts occur, the following preference schedule shall be followed:
1. Recessed electric fixtures, detectors, speakers, etc. 2. High pressure ductwork. 3. Sanitary drainage. 4. Low pressure ductwork. 5. Hot and chilled water. 6. Domestic water, storm, and vent lines. 7. Fire sprinkler piping. 8. Electric conduits.
C. All piping shall be run as directly as possible, straight and plumb, at uniform grades, and so that
the systems may be properly drained.
D. Provide manual air vents at all high points in the system.
E. All piping shall be run at right angles, or parallel to walls. Offsets shall be made by means of proper fittings. The use of bent pipe will not be acceptable.
F. All piping shall be firmly supported, using hangers, brackets, and braces to prevent sagging or
lateral movement. All hangers, brackets, and other supports shall be securely fastened to the masonry or steel joist in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Special care shall be taken in supporting horizontal cast iron sewer and drainage lines, providing a support at each joint in the pipe line.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 20 02 - 2 10/22/2018
G. Under no circumstances will a direct connection between the water system and sewer system and sewer or waste systems be permitted without vacuum breaker or other positive protection against contamination of the water supply by back siphonage or stoppage of the drainage lines. All such work shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
H. Each domestic water connection to a fixture shall be graded and arranged to bleed off air and
prevent its accumulation at high points in the main.
I. Capped air chambers not less than 18 inches high and the full diameter of the riser shall be provided at the top of each domestic water riser.
J. Horizontal drainage piping shall be installed in practical alignment at the grade shown on the
drawings, but in no case less than uniform grade of 1/4 inch per foot for 3-inch pipe and smaller, and not less than 1/8 inch per foot for 4- to 8-inch pipe.
K. Vents from any plumbing fixture or line of fixtures, when connected to a vent line serving other
fixtures, shall be extended at least 6 inches above the flood level rim of the highest of such fixtures to prevent use of the vent line as a waste. Extensions of the vent pipes through a roof shall be terminated not less than 12 inches above the roof, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
L. Changes in direction in drainage piping shall be made by the appropriate use of 45 degree wyes,
half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on the vertical stacks or drainage line where the change in direction of flow is from the horizontal to the vertical; except that long-turn tees shall be used when two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings will be connected, standard increasers and reducers of proper size shall be used. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited except where the plumbing code permits the use of a 3-inch by 4-inch water closet connection.
M. Drilling and tapping of house drains, solid, soil, waste or vent pipes, and the use of saddle hubs
and bands are prohibited.
N. Protection against breakage of piping passing under or through the walls shall be provided by means of pipe sleeves. Space between pipes and sleeves through foundation walls shall be caulked with lead wool or hemp rope approved by the Architect/Engineer before use.
O. Individual branch runouts and all concealed piping above ceilings or in walls shall be installed in
long continuous lengths with a minimum number of joints. Joints shall be carefully made to insure against leakage and shall be brazed with silver solder for 212 degrees Fahrenheit.
P. All piping shall be made permanently gas and watertight. All fittings or connections which have an
enlargement, chamber, or recess with a ledge, shoulder, or reduction of the pipe area that offers an obstruction to flow through the pipe shall not be installed.
Q. Floor connections for water closets and other fixtures shall be made by means of an approved
brass or iron flange, caulked, or soldered into the drainage pipe. The connection shall be bolted, with a wax gasket or setting compound between the fixture base and the connections.
R. Portland cement joints shall not be installed.
S. Soldered or brazed joints made with fittings having pre-inserted rings of solder or brazing alloy
shall have the tube and fittings cleaned bright and fluxed. The joint shall be heated sufficiently to make a tight connection. Tubes and fittings without such rings, shall be cleaned bright, fluxed and heated until the solder is drawn into the joint by capillarity and the connection is tight.
T. Mission style connectors shall be provided between cast iron soil pipe and vitrified clay or
concrete sewer pipe. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 20 02 - 3 10/22/2018
U. Slip joints and unions shall be used only in the waste pipe between a trap seal and a fixture. Unions on the sewer side of the trap shall be ground faced and shall not be concealed or enclosed. Trap adapter fittings at trap arm connections are not acceptable.
V. Vent pipes extending through the roof shall be increased in size as indicated using cast iron,
copper, or PVC increasers below the roof construction, and shall project approximately 14 inches above finished roof. Vents shall be provided with flashing consistent with the roofing system materials and compatible with the manufacturers and installer’s warranty.
END 23 20 02.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 20 02 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. HVAC Contractor provides steel piping specified and indicated on the drawings. 1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 2. 23 05 93.10 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 3. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Chilled water, hot water and condenser water piping shall be Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
150 psig steel welding fittings and welding flanges where connected to valves and other flanged equipment.
2.02. MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: U.S. Pipe, Republic Steel Co., or LaClede Steel Co.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. The piping shall be installed complete, of the size and arrangement shown on the drawings. All
pipe shall be installed to allow for expansion, and parallel or perpendicular to the building construction.
B. Mains shall grade upward in direction of flow unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, and
shall be carried as high as possible.
C. Provide manual air vents at all high points in the system.
D. When, owing to building conditions, additional low points are required, they shall be provided with accessible drain.
E. Under no circumstances shall the size of the piping shown on the drawings be changed without
prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer.
F. Supply mains shall grade 1-inch in 40-feet in direction of the flow unless otherwise shown on the drawings, and all reductions shall be made by factory manufactured eccentric reducing fittings, keeping top level. All mains and branches shall be installed without pockets.
G. All piping shall be firmly supported using hangers, brackets, and braces to prevent sagging or
lateral movement. All hangers, brackets, and other supports shall be securely fastened to the construction in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INCNC. Midwest #20180141 23 21 13 - 1 10/22/2018
3.02. JOINTS
A. All pipes shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining. Joints may be screwed, or, when the pipe size is two inches or larger, the joints may be welded. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread and pipe dope or Teflon tape applied to the male thread only. Welded joints shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in Section 15166 and the U.S.A. Piping Code, and each welder shall be certified by the National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Use only shaped nipples or welding lateral fittings for intersection welding of branches to mains. Valves and specialties shall have screwed or flanged joints.
END 23 21 13.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INCNC. Midwest #20180141 23 21 13 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. HVAC Contractor provide refrigerant piping specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 23 07 19 – HVAC Piping Insulation 3. 23 09 93 – Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 4. 23 20 02 – HVAC Piping and Pumps 5. 23 63 13 – Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. System shall comply with NFPA Chapter 1, Section 37, “Mechanical Refrigeration” and
ANSI/ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration”.
B. As part of the shop drawings submittal, a piping isometric shall be submitted showing system components (including sight glass, filter/dryer, solenoid valve, etc.) and pipe sizes as recommended by manufacturer.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Refrigerant piping shall be Type “ACR” hard drawn refrigerant grade copper tubing to ASTM-B-
280, with soldered joints. Fittings shall be wrought copper solder joint type. All piping shall be delivered with capped ends, and shall be sealed against dirt and water until assembled. System shall be purged/charged with dry nitrogen and capped.
B. The installation shall be made by experienced refrigeration mechanics.
C. All refrigerant piping shall be cleaned, deoxidized, dehydrated, and sealed by the manufacturer
before shipment. All ends shall remain sealed at all times until used.
D. Fittings and flanged unions shall be cast brass or wrought copper refrigeration type fittings. Cast fittings shall be internally tinned before use.
E. Vibration eliminators shall be located in the piping. Sizes above 3” shall be the stainless steel
type designed to restrict freedom of movement in three dimensions.
F. The type of solder used shall depend on the location of the joint. 1. For pipe runs and joints (copper to copper), Staz-Silv or Silfos, a solder composition with 15%
silver (BCUP-S) should be used. 2. Where dissimilar metals are joined, such as copper to brass or copper to steel, Staz-Silv or
“easy-flow”, a solder composition with 45% silver (BAG-1) should be used. 3. Where auxiliary components are installed, such as expansion valves, Staz-brite (soft solder)
with tin and 4% silver should be used so parts can be readily changed as needed.
2.02. VALVES
A. Purge valves, charging valves, oil drain valves, expansion valves, solenoid valves, service back seating valves, and all other valves for the safe and proper operation of the refrigerant system shall be included in the installation. When any of the above valves are furnished as a part of the manufacturer’s equipment, additional valves serving the same purpose will not be required. Seal caps shall be used on all refrigerant valves.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 23 00 - 1 10/22/2018
2.03. ACCESSORIES
A. A suitable refrigerant filter dryer which can be cleaned without breaking the inlet and outlet refrigerant connections shall be installed in the liquid line on the supply side of each solenoid valve. Provide a line-sized valved bypass around the filter dryer.
B. Receivers shall be of steel construction, ASME rated and shall carry the ASME stamp. Receiver
shall be completely insulated with a removable cover over the ASME label. See Specification Section 15281 for cold equipment insulation. Receivers shall be fitted with armored sight glasses with ball check gauge valves. Receivers shall be fitted with drain valves accessibly located and fitted with hose coupling threads.
C. The hot gas discharge muffler shall be constructed of schedule 40 steel with line sized inlet and
outlet.
D. Acceptable manufacturers: Refrigeration Research, Sporlan, or Superior.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. The refrigerant piping shall be installed as indicated on the drawings, and all equipment and piping shall be maintained absolutely dry and clean during handling and assembly. All flux and solder and scale shall be thoroughly cleaned from the tube, and tubes shall be used during start up and shall be removed upon completion of testing. The system will be inspected by the Architect/Engineer before it is released for unattended operation.
B. The piping shall be carefully jointed using a nitrogen bleed during soldering. The piping shall
have an oil trap and the suction line shall pitch down in the direction of flow.
C. The hot gas discharge piping, suction line, and all cold surfaces of valves or fittings shall be insulated throughout (entire length) with 1/2-inch flexible foamed plastic tubular insulation. 18 gauge metal shields shall be used at each hanger to protect the insulation. The fittings and joints shall be carefully sealed with adhesive to obtain a vapor proof installation. The insulation shall be slipped on without cutting wherever possible. Sleeves shall be used when passing through walls.
D. Refrigeration piping shall be tested for leaks and evacuated as follows:
1. Buildup 20 psig in system with mixture of 90% nitrogen and 10% freon and then increase pressure to 150 psig in suction piping and 350 psig in high side piping with dry nitrogen. Leak test with halide torch or leak detector. Repair all leaks. Repeat procedure until system is proven tight.
2. Bleed off pressure into portable storage containers (not to atmosphere) and install vacuum pump capable of evacuating to 0.1” HG absolute. Temperature shall be above 60°F during evacuation. Evacuate the system to 0.1” HG absolute with ZIMMERLI vacuum gauge or manometer. If the system does not hold vacuum for a period of two hours, go to step two.
3. Charge system with proper quantity of refrigerant. 4. After 80 hours of operation place new elements in filter driers. 5. Venting of refrigerant to atmosphere is prohibited. Reclaim all refrigerant whenever system is
to be evacuated.
E. Refrigerant and Oil: 1. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient refrigerant to charge each system. The amount of the
installed charges shall be permanently stamped on the receiver or the compressor. Systems shall be fully charged at the time of acceptance. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish whatever additional amount of refrigerant may be required during the guaranteed period due to repairs, replacements, or adjustments that the Contractor may be required to make under the guarantee provisions.
2. The same requirement shall apply to compressor lubricating oil except that amount charged or added shall be stamped on the system.
END 23 23 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 23 00 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL Section 23 64 16– Air-Cooled Split Centrifugal Chiller
1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY Section includes design, performance criteria, refrigerants, controls, and installation requirements for an air-cooled split centrifugal chiller.
1.02 REFERENCES Comply with the following codes and standards:
-ARI 550/590-2003 -ANSI/ASHRAE 15 -ASME Section VIII -NEC -UL -CE -CSA -OSHA
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the codes and standards as defined in Section 1.02 titled
REFERENCES B. Chiller is required to be run test at manufacturer’s facility to job specific requirements, prior to
shipment. Report available upon request.
1.04 DELIVERY and HANDLING
A1. Chillers shall be delivered to the job site assembled and charged with Nitrogen. (Field provided R134a) OR
A2. Chiller shall be delivered “knocked down”. When “knocked down”, chiller to arrive from factory
with compressors, control panels, and necessary refrigerant components on skids for reassembly by installing contractor.
B. Installing contractor to comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for transporting, rigging, and
assembly of chiller.
1.05 WARRANTY (BASE BID)
A. The manufacturer’s equipment warranty shall be for a period of: (1) One year from date of equipment start up or 18 months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs first.
B. 5 year extended warranty on parts and labor on entire chiller and condenser.
1. The warranty shall include parts and labor costs for the repair and/or replacement of defects in components or workmanship.
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a one day training class at the SURS facility to train two owner technicians on operation
and maintenance of chiller. The class shall include both classroom instruction and hands on operational and maintenance training.
2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Multistack LLC B. (Approved Equal)
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 - 1 10/22/2018
2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. Provide and install as shown on the plans a factory assembled, charged, and run tested, air
cooled split chiller. B. Each unit shall include: One or more MagLev®, oil-free, magnetic bearing, variable speed two
stage centrifugal compressor equipped with inlet guide vanes. Each compressor to utilize its own, stepper controlled load balance valve. Solenoids for load balancing will not be accepted. Each compressor to utilize its integrated variable speed drive in conjunction with the compressors inlet guide vanes and load balance valve, to optimize the chillers part load efficiency.
C. The chillers evaporator, condenser, and electronic expansion valves shall be common to all
compressors. The chiller shall operate with (1) one refrigerant circuit. D. Chiller shall utilize R-134A refrigerant only.
2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide an air cooled flooded split chiller system for field assembly, oil free centrifugal chiller
equipped with MagLev® compressors as specified herein. Chiller to be built in accordance to the standards defined in Section 1.02 of this specification.
B. Chiller to utilize one of the following compressor arrangements for the specified nominal
tonnages: Combination of TT300, TT350, or TT400 Mismatching of compressor models is permitted to optimize full load efficiency and total chiller turn down
C. Each chiller shall be equipped with the following: One (1) flooded evaporator heat exchanger,
one (1) air cooled condenser, one (1) or more MagLev® Compressors (refer to section 2.03 B) with integrated variable speed drive, soft start, magnetic bearings, and inlet guide vanes, one (1) or more electronic expansion valves, one (1) load balance valve per compressor, one (1) master chiller control with necessary operating controls and system safeties.
D. Chiller Performance: Refer to performance schedule on the job specific drawings. E. Unloading: When utilizing MagLev® model TT-300 compressor, the chiller shall be capable of
unloading to 15 tons. When using a MagLev® TT-350 compressor, chiller shall be capable of unloading to 25 tons. When using a MagLev® TT-400 compressor, chiller shall be capable of unloading to 35 tons. All unloaded capacity values are without the use of traditional hot gas bypass or load balance valves.
F. Loading: Chiller shall be able to stage compressor(s) without drastically unloading compressors
on-line or creating check valve chatter on staged compressors. Total pressure ratio shall not be decreased below 2.4 pressure ratio as observed at the suction and discharge flanges of each individual compressor when staging lag compressors.
G. Acoustics: Sound data shall be measured in accordance with ARI 575-87 Standard. Unit sound
performance data shall be measured at the highest level recorded at all load points. Unit sound performance shall not exceed a level of 72 DBA measured at a distance of thirty (30) feet.
H. Electrical: Chiller shall feature single-point power connection not utilizing adjoining power
cabinets as pull boxes. I. Minimum Operating Conditions: Lowest evaporator saturated suction temperature shall not be
below 34F. Lowest leaving chilled water temperature shall not be below 36F. Lowest entering condenser water temperature shall not drop below 55F. A differential of 12F between the leaving chilled water temperature and entering condenser water temperature is required to ensure chiller can maintain minimum lift requirements.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 - 2 10/22/2018
2.04 CHILLER COMPONENTS A. Compressors:
1. Chiller to have one or more MagLev®, magnetic bearing, oil-free, two-stage, hermetical centrifugal compressor(s). Each compressor to contain integrated variable speed drive with soft start, movable inlet guide vane assembly, and weigh no more than 300 lbs.
2. Each compressor to be microprocessor controlled. Each compressor to be networked to
master controller via EtherCAT connection with a refresh rate of 50 microseconds and the micro processor of each compressor to control the variable speed drive and inlet guide vanes on each compressor to maximize unit efficiency.
3. Each compressor shall be capable of coming to a controlled safe stop in the event of a power
outage. Unit shall be capable of auto restart in the event of a power outage, once power has been restored.
4. All compressors are required to be mechanically and electrically isolated to facilitate proper
maintenance, service, and or removal 5. Each compressor shall be equipped with a minimum anti-recycle time of 5 minutes if power
electronics are too warm before being allowed to restart. 6. Minimum restart time of a compressor, without a UPS, from power down till drive line is
rotating shall not exceed 3 minutes. B. Refrigerant, Evaporator and Condenser:
1. All heat exchangers to be built in accordance to Section VIII of the ASME code and carry a
manufacturer’s name plate certifying ASME compliance. 2. The evaporator to be of shell and tube construction. Evaporator to be constructed of a single
shell. Evaporator to be of flooded type with refrigerant surrounding the tubes and water passing through the tubes. Tubes to be enhanced and rifled. Minimum tube velocity of two (2) feet per second required. Design to not exceed a maximum tube velocity of nine (9) feet per second. Internal intermediate tube supports, liquid eliminator baffle plate, pressure relief vent, water drains and vents required. Pressure relief to be spring loaded self seating type in accordance to ASHRAE 15 standard. Evaporator to be pressure tested at a test pressure of 1.1 times the operating pressure however no less than 100 PSIG. Evaporator, water boxes, suction piping, and any other component subject to condensate shall be insulated with a UL recognized ¾ inch or 1 ½” closed cell insulation. All joints and seems to be sealed so a vapor barrier is created. Factory mounted & wired thermal dispersion switch required for flow safety. Evaporator shall be able to hold entire unit charge as required for machine service. Evaporator cable of forty five (45) percent rate of change per minute on water side and maintain stable operation without dropping compressors offline.
3. Multistack Supplied Condenser The condenser shall be of aluminum fin with copper tubes. Condenser to be constructed in a “V”
configuration. Condensers to be equipped with no fewer than six (6) and no greater than eight (16) ECM type condenser fan motor assemblies. Motors shall incorporate integrated active temperature management to ensure motor protection. Blades shall be of aluminum construction. Fans must be designed to ensure proper acoustical and energy performance.
4. Heat Exchangers to feature enhanced and rifled individual tubes. Tubes shall be individually
replaceable. Tubes shall be mechanically rolled into steel tube sheets and sealed with Loctite® or equivalent sealant. Tubes shall be supported by intermediate tube supports at a maximum spacing of 18” apart. Waterside to be designed to a minimum of 150 psig or 300 psig, whichever is specified. Heat exchangers to be equipped with either dished heads or marine boxes with drain and vent reports, whichever is specified. Piping connections to be either mechanical grooved connection or flange, whichever is specified.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 - 3 10/22/2018
5. Refrigerant Control: Chiller to feature a minimum of one (1) electronic expansion valves with a step count of 480 steps to full open and a fully closed transit time of less than ten (10) seconds to prevent refrigerant migration. Additional valves to be added as chiller capacity dictates. Fixed orifices and float controls are not acceptable. The electronic expansion valve to operate from minimum chiller capacity to the full load of the chiller’s capacity. A high side refrigerant level sensor, with sight glass is to be used to provide feedback to the expansion valves for proper control. This ensures that a proper liquid seal is always present on the compressors power electronics. A refrigerant sight glass is required on the main liquid line feeding the electronic expansion valves. Isolation valves required to isolate charge in either the condenser or evaporator.
C. Prime Mover:
1. The prime mover shall be of sufficient size to effectively meet the compressor horsepower requirements. Prime mover shall be a one or more liquid refrigerant cooled, hermetically sealed, permanent magnet synchronous motor. Motor shall be controlled by variable speed drive. Motor shall utilize soft start capabilities with an inrush current no greater than two (2) amps. Motor shall have internal thermal overload protection devices embedded in the winding of each phase of the motor.
D. Variable Speed Drive:
1. The chiller shall be equipped with multiple variable speed drives unless one compressor is
used. Please refer to section 2.03 B for compressor requirements. The variable speed drive to utilize Insulated Gate Bi-Polar Transistors. Variable speed drive to create its own simulated AC voltage for the motor connected to it. Acceptable applied voltages are: 400 Volt 50 hertz, 460 Volt 60 hertz, and 575 volt 60 hertz. 575 volt applicable to TT-300 and TT-400 only.
2. Variable Speed drive in conjunction with the compressors inlet guide vanes will be controlled via compressor microprocessor to optimally match the lift and load requirements.
3. Each compressor circuit is required to have a line reactor and circuit breaker. E. Chiller Controls The unit shall have an industrial grade cpu with an Intel-based processor. As an option, Chiller FlexSysTM Controller shall be designed to have fail to run control mode and be called out specifically in the chiller’s features. All chiller and compressor I/O to be controlled via Etherbus with an update rate of 50 microseconds. Controller to have 15 inch TFT touch screen interface that can be disconnected and chillers still runs properly. Controller to use natural progression control algorithms which properly define the compressors operating range to optimize loading, unloading, and control of multiple MagLev compressors. User shall operate chiller via HMI located on touch screen or remote web connection. All system parameters, compressor status, alarms, and faults, trend graphing, fault logging, bas communication window, manuals, wiring diagrams, log book, and control set points shall be viewable. Shall be able to fully commission and adjust all components on the chiller, including the compressors without an auxiliary computer or software. The chiller controller shall include the necessary I/O for proper chiller operation including:
o Hardware o Dedicated EXV Output for each liquid level EXV of Economizer Valve o Chiller LP Safety input o Chiller HP Safety input o Chilled Water Safety input o Condenser Safety input o E-Stop input o Chilled Water Reset input o Load Limit input o Chiller kW output o Chiller Amps output o Chiller Run Contact output o Chiller Fault output o Compressor Lockout Fault Status output o Dedicated Compressor Enable output (no relay or paralleled signal) o Dedicated Economizer Enable output (no relay or paralleled signal)
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 - 4 10/22/2018
o Chilled Water In and Out Temperatures o Liquid Line Temperature/s o Dedicated RS-485 communication to each compressor (no daisy chaining) o Dedicated RS-232 communication to each compressor
Windows-based industrial PC featuring Intel Processor for maximum reliability and performance.
Solid State hard drive for maximum reliability and redundancy. Hard drive feature no moving parts to ensure nothing mechanically fails. With dual-hard drives there is no need to partition a single drive. One drive handles the operating system while the other handles all data acquisition to ensure no data is corrupted.
DC Powered to ensure maximum resistance to EMI and RFI noise Built in 2-port Ethernet Switch for easy integration to BAS interface and web control
feature. Features industrial-style battery back-up in the event of a power outage Integrated 5 second UPS to avoid data to write to drives before power shut off On board USB drives to support external peripheral devices including, keyboard,
mouse, and printer 15 “TFT Display featuring 1024 X 768 Resolution. All hardware, including I/O is CE and UL Certified I/O features modular design to simplify troubleshooting and or replacement if required. I/O has LED Indicators for all inputs and outputs to ease the troubleshooting process. I/O can be directly connected to without the use of terminal blocks. All wiring utilizes spring capture technology to prevent loose connections or wires from
falling out. Dedicated Ethernet communication at a communication rate of 50 microseconds to all
compressors and I/O. Optional auxiliary device expansion hub for control of pumps, towers, etc.
o Software Can control one (1) to five (5) compressors on single or multiple refrigerant circuits Control System can control up to six (6) exv’s with proper hardware and network all
exv’s to the control system Only control system on the market with the capability of controlling different size
compressors for maximum efficiency and turn down HMI interface allows the user the following options: definable points list, tag names, and
functions without special software. With this feature, end user can scale an all inputs and outputs, change what controls it, change the functionality, the name of it etc.
Control system can trend graph up to two (2) years of data, without overwriting or decreasing data acquisition time
Chiller controller has the Danfoss Turbocor Compressor Software on board. This allows for no laptops for a service tech in additional to advanced remote troubleshooting.
Control System features easy to use web interface. This allows the user to do anything remotely that could be done in front of the chiller/
Most advanced trend graphing available on the market. Over 200 data points are recorded in five (5) second intervals. Data can be analyzed with zoom feature. Data stored on separate 32 GB drive. Trend graph images can be exported. Trend graphs can be exported to csv files as well.
Advanced Fault Logging featuring calendar capability for ease of use. Data can be recalled up to two (2) years. Data can be sorted by alarm type, time stamp, or compressor
Color coded data. Green data means good, yellow means alarm, red means fault or off Controller logs when user makes any type of change Controller is loaded with all manuals, wiring diagrams, and supporting data which can
be recalled via touch screen Controller has onboard maintenance log to store system information Controller offers real time capacity and efficiency data
o BAS Interfaces include: Modbus RTU standard Modbus TCP/IP standard BAC Net IP (optional) BAC Net TCP/IP (optional)
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 – 5 10/22/18
BACNET MSTP (optional) Lonworks (optional) BAS interface dashboard shown on HMI. This allows the user to view what data is
being written to the BAS system. Also shows if there is an error, last com, and how many times the data was sent or received.
Control system uses proprietary natural progression control algorithms to perform accurate energy balance on all systems for maximum system performance.
Control System features an optimum start function to ensure initial lift is always made. This prevents nuisance check valve flutter and compressor faults.
3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Chiller must be installed per all of the manufacturer’s documentation. This includes: IOM Manual,
Submittal documentation, CAD Drawings, other. B. All local structural codes must be observed. Chiller to mounted and aligned on chiller pad or
mounting rails as specified on CAD drawings. C. All local plumbing codes must be observed. Piping must be run in such a way that the proper
required clearances for head removal for tube cleaning are observed. D. All National and Local Electrical codes must be observed. Instillation of the electrical on the chiller
must follow the associated documentation from the chiller manufacturer. Electrical installation shall be coordinated with electrical contractor.
E. All National and Local Electrical codes must be observed. Controls installation shall be coordinated
with the controls contractor.
F. Provide all material required for a fully operational and functional chiller. 3.02 START-UP
A. Units shall be factory charged with R-134A refrigerant unless unit is knocked down. B. Factory Start-Up Services: An authorized factory start agent is required. At minimum, (2) two days
shall be spent on-site to ensure proper unit operation. C. During the start-up period, the factory authorized agent will instruct the owner’s representative on
proper care and operation of the chiller. END 23 64 16 MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC Midwest #20180141 23 64 16 – 6 10/22/18
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 - Basic Electrical Materials & Methods
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid 1. Electrical Contractor provides:
a. All electrical work shown on the electrical drawings and specified herein.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. Division 01 - General Requirements 2. Division 23 - Mechanical 3. 16112 - Conduits 4. 16117 - Supporting Devices 5. 16120 - Wires & Cables 6. 16130 - Boxes 7. 16155 - Motor Starters 8. 16160 - Panelboards 9. 16170 - Disconnects (Blade Type) 10. 16181 - Fuses 11. 16185 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 12. 16195 - Electrical Identification 13. 16450 - Grounding 14. 16950 - System Testing
1.03. REFERENCES TO STANDARDS
A. All materials and equipment furnished and installed under this contract shall be in accordance with
the following applicable technical society, organization or body. 1. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2. NEC - National Electrical Code, Latest Edition 3. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 4. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association 5. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials 6. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. 7. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 8. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, ANS1-C2
B. Reference to standards shall mean and intend the latest edition of such standards adopted and
published at the date of bidding documents.
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings: 1. Firestopping material 2. Conduit seals 3. Labels
1.05. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Three sets of the following data are required. 1. Operating and maintenance instructions. 2. Spare parts lists. 3. Copies of approved submittal data.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 1 10/22/2018
B. Arrange each set of data in an orderly way, and bind each set in a separate 3-ring, hard-cover binder.
1.06. GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year in accordance with the
General Conditions.
1.07. DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Insofar as possible, deliver items in manufacturer’s original unopened packaging. Where this is not practical, cover items with protective materials to keep them from being damaged. Use care in loading, transporting, unloading, and storage to keep items from being damaged.
B. Store items in a clean, dry place and protect from damage.
1.08. RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Keep a set of prints at the job site exclusively for recording deviations from the drawings which
are necessary because of job conditions. Record locations and depths of buried and concealed conduits from fixed easily identifiable objects, such as building walls. Where conduits are concealed in walls, indicate distances off of building corners or other building features not likely to be disturbed by future alterations. Mark deviations in colored pencils so that work of various systems can be easily identified.
B. When work is completed, record all deviations on clean bond copies of drawings. Submit three
copies of completed “record drawings” to Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. General 1. All equipment and material for permanent installation shall be new unless specifically
indicated otherwise. In addition, material shall: a. Be without blemish or defect. b. Not be used for temporary power or lighting without prior written authorization from
Architect/Engineer. c. Be in accordance with NEMA Standards. d. Bear Underwriters Label where subject to UL label service.
2.02. WATER SEALS
A. Seal penetrations of perimeter walls or floors below grade to prevent entry of water. Use
materials compatible with wall or floor construction and approved by Architect/Engineer.
B. Seal penetrations of roof shall be sealed with flashings compatible with roof design and approved by Roofing System Manufacturer, Owner, and Engineer.
2.03. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Labels:
a. Quentin D. Schwab, 606 East Dodson Drive, Urbana, Illinois 61801. b. Joe Halm Building Specialists, Box 525, LaGrange, Illinois
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 2 10/22/2018
c. Mechanical Tag Systems, Box 1565, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 62406. d. Seton Name Plate Corporation, 592 Boulevard, New Haven, Connecticut 06505. e. N & E Specialty Company, Box 3518, Peoria, Illinois f. Artistic Engravers, Box 1385, Peoria, Illinois 61654 g. or approved equal
2. Electrical wire marker tape: a. 3M, Scotch Code b. Panduit, Insta-Code c. Thomas and Betts, E-Z Coder
B. Labels:
1. Type: Laminated engraved plastic identification labels. 2. Colors: Normal power shall be black with white letters and emergency power shall be red with
white letters, attached with adhesive, with 1/2” high letters on equipment and 1/4” high letters on control and disconnect devices, such as switches. Attach with sheet metal screws.
3. Labels on electrical panels shall include voltage characteristics. 4. Labels shall be provided for:
a. Transformers b. Panels c. Motor control centers d. Individual starters and disconnect switches e. Equipment f. Communication system equipment g. Cable tray
5. Receptacle cover plates shall have the panel and circuit number inscribed in the cover plate in special care rooms only.
C. Properly identify all electrical equipment including individual devices on main switchboard,
panelboards, safety switches and disconnects, contactors, nurse call power unit cabinets, telephone cabinets, individually mounted circuit breakers and relays, with permanently attached black (normal power) or red (essential systems) phenolic plates with 1/4” white engraved lettering on the face of each attached, with two sheet metal screws. Starters and relays connected under this Division shall be identified whether furnished under this Division or under other Divisions of this contract.
D. Identifications plates shall indicate the panel name or equipment served (for switch), and the
source of power (panel & circuit) e.g.
E. “NG200A FF-MDP1-12” indicates panel NG200A FED from panel MDP1, circuit #12.
F. Attach labels with screws or rivets. Glue is not acceptable.
G. Electrical Wire Marker Tape: 1. Listed: UL 510 2. Type: 5.5 mil epoxy film type 3. Acrylic pressure sensitive 4. High tack adhesive
H. Wire and Cable:
1. Wire and cable shall be color coded. 2. Label with tags or tape at ends giving circuit numbers. 3. See 16120 - Wires & Cables.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. The approximate location of all equipment and devices is shown on the drawings. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to change the location of all equipment or devices 6 feet in any direction at no additional cost provided such changes are requested before final installation.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 3 10/22/2018
B. Install all equipment with ample space allowed for removal and repair. Provide ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to all wiring without moving equipment which is installed or which is already in place.
C. In mechanical and electrical equipment spaces, expose ceiling outlets and conduit with due
consideration to ventilating ducts and mechanical piping. Where numerous ducts occur, install conduits and outlets after the ventilating ducts. Puncturing of duct work or hanging equipment such as light fixtures, ceiling hangers and conduits from duct work is prohibited unless specifically noted otherwise.
D. Electrical equipment shall be installed to maintain minimum clearances per Article 110 of NEC
and ANSI C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).
3.02. COORDINATION
A. Provide day-to-day coordination with the work of other contractors engaged in this project. Execute the work in a manner not to interfere with other contractors.
B. Coordinate with other contractors regarding the location and size of pipes, raceways, ducts,
openings, devices, so that there may be no interferences between installations or of the progress of any contractor.
C. If conflict arises in the installation of work, the preference schedules shall be as listed in 15010:
D. No piping carrying fluids shall be installed directly over electrical equipment.
E. Visit site and be informed of conditions under which work must be performed. No subsequent allowance will be made because of error or failure to obtain necessary information to completely estimate and perform work involved.
F. Examine specifications and drawings to be familiar with items which require electrical connections
and coordination. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic and shall not be scaled for exact sizes.
G. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Where conflicts occur between Contract Document and these recommendations, a ruling shall be requested of the Architect for decision before proceeding with such work.
H. Insofar as it is possible to determine in advance, advise masonry tradesman to leave proper
chases and openings. Place all outlets, anchors, sleeves, and supports prior to pouring concrete or installation of masonry work. Should contractor neglect doing this, any cutting and/or patching required to be done is at this contractor’s expense.
3.03. FIRESTOPPING
A. All occupied and unoccupied sleeves or openings for electrical raceways, conduits, cables or bus
ducts shall be firestopped to provide an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases and maintain the integrity of the partition, wall or floor. 1. Unused, spare sleeves in electrical closets shall be sealed with threaded steel caps on each
end.
B. Firestopping materials shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
3.04. PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Protect work from injury by keeping all conduit and boxes capped and plugged or otherwise protected. This includes damage by freezing and/or stoppage from building materials, sand, dirt, or concrete.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 4 10/22/2018
B. Protect all equipment and fixtures from damage during the project, provide all tarpaulins, drop cloths, barricades, temporary heaters or auxiliary equipment.
3.05. IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labels on motor starters, TT switches, relays, disconnect switches, remote P-B stations,
power distribution panels, main switchboards, unit substations, branch lighting panels, pilot lights, selector switches, transformers, and cable trays.
B. Secondary conduit systems below 600V, except normal branch power and lighting systems, shall
be color coded by bands or clearly marked by color dots of indelible ink to indicate conduit system (e.g., FA = Fire Alarm, E = Emergency, BAS = Building Automation System). Fire Alarm junction boxes, device boxes and pull boxes shall be provided with painted red cover plates and boxes.
C. Special outlets and receptacles shall be clearly labeled to identify the utilization equipment.
D. Overcurrent devices in panels clearly identify what they feed. This may be accomplished by means of the typewritten panel schedules mounted inside of the front cover doors under glass or plastic.
E. Provide a typed card directory for each panel. Directory shall designate breaker number and load
served. Panel shall have all breakers individually numbered and panel shall have an interior nameplate provided by manufacturer with voltage, amperage, phase and hertz listed. Provide an exterior engraved plastic signage with the panel name or number or letter designation.
F. Each feeder shall be identified at panels, pull boxes, and other access points with pressure labels
indicating feeder number and switchboard or distribution panel from which the feeder originates. Acceptable manufacturers: Brady, Scotch, or T & B wrap on type.
G. Provide permanent marking on pull box covers. Covers shall have words “ELECTRICAL P.B.#”
stenciled on them with at least 1/2” high block type letters. See drawings for pull box numbers.
3.06. PAINTING
A. Finish painting shall be as specified in Division 01.
B. Provide touch-up painting of all electrical equipment marred in any way during shipment or installation.
3.07. CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Repair or replace routine damage caused by cutting in performance of work under this Division.
B. Correct unnecessary damage caused due to installation of electrical work, brought about through carelessness or lack of coordination.
C. Holes cut through existing floor slabs to be core drilled with drill designed for this purpose. All
openings, sleeves, and holes in slabs between floors to be properly sealed, fire proofed and water proofed.
D. Cutting and patching of existing pavement to install work under this Division.
E. Repairs to be performed with materials which match existing materials and to be installed in
accordance with appropriate sections of these specifications.
3.08. INSPECTION FEES AND PERMITS
A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits and inspection fees required for electrical installation.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 5 10/22/2018
3.09. DEMOLITION
A. Contractor shall visit the site before submitting a bid to acquaint himself with existing conditions.
B. Work in existing buildings shall be scheduled well in advance with the Owner. Work shall be performed at such times and under such conditions as suite the convenience of the Owner. Plan the work to minimize disruption of normal operations.
C. Remove wiring devices, fixtures, components, electrical equipment, conductors, boxes, and
conduits not required to remain in service in remodeled areas when this project is complete.
D. Reconnect circuits to other panelboards when required to complete the renovation shown.
E. Remove existing conduit and wire from areas to be remodeled, back to panelboard, cabinet or junction box. Where such work would not be possible without disturbing areas not being renovated, consult with the Architect prior to performing the work.
F. Where a circuit is interrupted by removal of a device or fixture from that circuit, install wire,
conduit, etc., as required to restore service to the remaining devices and fixtures on that circuit.
G. Lighting fixtures, wiring devices, panelboards, and conductors removed shall be offered to the Owner. If he chooses to retain these items or a part of these items, turn those chosen over to him. Items rejected by the Owner shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor.
H. Where an existing riser to floors above and below is interrupted by demolition, the contractor shall
install wire, conduit, etc., as required to restore service to that riser. Coordinate the times and conditions of such work to suite the convenience of the Owner.
END 26 00 00.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 00 00 - 6 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. Electrical Contractor Provide: a. All wires and cables including splices, connections and supports for a complete
installation as shown on the drawings and specified.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 5. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 6. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 7. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Wire, cable and installation thereof shall be in accord with the National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition.
2. All materials shall be new, without blemish or defect, in accord with standards specified and UL listed or labeled.
1.04. REFERENCES
A. IPCEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable.
B. IPCEA S-66-524/NEMA WC-7 Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene -Insulated Wire and
Cable.
C. UL 83
D. ASTM
E. NFPA - 70 (NEC), latest edition.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A. No submittals required when using specified materials unless otherwise indicated. Otherwise, comply with Division 01.
1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be suitably packaged by manufacturer to prevent damage during shipment.
Damaged materials will not be acceptable for use.
B. Store materials on site in clean, dry storage area.
C. Handle all materials carefully to preclude damage. Materials with damaged insulation shall not be acceptable for use.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 19 - 1 10/22/2018
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Triangle 2. Crescent 3. General Cable 4. Anaconda 5. Cyprus Rome 6. Okonite 7. Collyer 8. Phelps Dodge 9. ITT Royal
2.02. WIRE
A. All cable and wire shall comply with UL and the specifications of IPCEA, current at date of bidding
documents.
B. All cable and wire shall have 600 volts insulation, have a conductivity of 98 percent, and shall be annealed coated copper per ASTM B33 or B189. Wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid wire, and wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded, Class B, ASTM B8.
C. Minimum wire sizes shall be as follows:
1. Power Wiring - #12AWG 2. Control Wiring - #14 AWG
D. Wire types shall be as follows:
1. #12 AWG and larger: Type THWN, 90°C., 600V., copper. 2. Control Circuits: Type THWN, 90°C., 600V., copper.
E. All conductors shall be continuous without splices except at locations approved for the purpose.
F. New wire shall be factory coded with distinct colors as follows: 1. 120/208 volt
a. Neutral - White b. Ground - Green c. Phase A - Black d. Phase B - Red e. Phase C - Blue
2. 277/480 volt a. Neutral - Grey b. Ground - Green with tracer stripes c. Phase A - Brown d. Phase B - Orange e. Phase C - Yellow
G. Communication Wires and Cables:
1. As specified under applicable section or required by manufacturer, including size to adequately carry power and limit voltage drop. Verify type and materials.
2. 300 volt insulation when installed in separate raceway from power conductors. Otherwise, match power conductor insulation rating.
3. Cables to extend or divert existing communication systems shall match the existing cables.
2.03. JOINTS & SPLICES
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 19 - 2 10/22/2018
A. Make terminations, taps and splices with an indent type pressure connector with insulating cover for 8 AWG and smaller. 1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Buchanan b. Burndy Corporation c. Thomas & Betts d. Ideal Industries
B. Instead of indent type connectors insulated spring compression connectors may be used for 10
AWG and smaller. 1. Acceptable products:
a. Buchanan, B-Cap b. Ideal, Wing Nut c. ITT Holub, Free Spring d. 3M, Scotchlok e. Thomas & Betts
C. Use mechanical compression or bolted type connector for 6 AWG or larger. Cover connector with
insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation equivalent to 150% conductor insulation. 1. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. AMP, Inc. b. Burndy Corporation c. General Electric Company d. Ideal Industries e. ITT Weaver f. 3M Company g. O.Z./Gedney Company h. Thomas & Betts i. Anderson j. Blackburn
3. EXECUTION
3.01. BASIC WIRING
A. Minimum wire sizes shall in no case be less than shown on the drawings and/or specified herein:
1. Power and lighting branch circuits: a. Where the farthest outlet of a single 120 volt or 277 volt branch circuit is less than 100
feet from the panelboard, use No. 12 AWG wire between all outlets and for the home run of the circuit.
b. Where the farthest outlet of a circuit is more than 100 feet from the panelboard, use No. 10 AWG wire for the home run of that circuit and No. 12 AWG wire between all other outlets on that circuit except where larger sizes are indicated.
2. 120 Volt Control and Signal Wiring: No. 14 AWG. 3. Low Voltage Control Wiring: No. 16 AWG.
B. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
C. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.
D. Install additional 6” loop or ends beyond device or junction box. Individually tape conductor ends at unused outlet box, roll up in box and install blank cover plate for future use.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
G. Maintain color coding of conductors for all systems.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 19 - 3 10/22/2018
3.02. WIRING IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from weather, all
Plumbing, Heating or Ventilating Work likely to injure conductors completed, conduit system is complete and interior of raceway cleaned.
3.03. CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Identify each conductor in panelboards, junction or pull boxes, or troughs with a permanent
pressure sensitive label with suitable numbers or letters for easy recognition. Identify control wiring at each end and in junction boxes with numeric wire number corresponding to control wiring diagram.
B. Thoroughly clean wire before installing lugs and connectors.
C. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible
temperature rise.
D. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape and roll up in box.
3.04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect wiring for physical damage and proper connection.
B. Torque conductor terminations to manufacturer’s recommended values.
END 26 05 19.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 19 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. Electrical Contractor: Provide a completely grounded system. Electrical equipment, conduits, supports, cabinets, and switchgear panels shall be grounded in accord with NEC and as shown on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes & Standards: 1. UL listed. 2. NFPA 70 (NEC), latest edition 3. NEMA 4. NEC Articles 250 and 680
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Equipment: 1. All grounding clamps and devices shall be of type approved by the Architect/Engineer
manufactured by the Thomas Betts Co., O. Z., or Burndy.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Electrical System shall be grounded. Grounding shall be in accord with NEC 250. By reference herein, NEC Section 250 shall become a part of this specification and shall be adhered to strictly.
B. Install a building grounding system consisting of grounding to the existing building conduit
grounding, and ground wires in accordance with NEC requirements.
C. Drive ground rods into earth. Ground rods shall be connected to switchboard ground bus with ground wire. Electrodes shall be driven to the required depth for reaching permanent moisture. Provide ground wire from building water service to the switchboard ground bus.
D. All conduit, raceways, equipment, enclosures, panel housings, fixture housings, bus
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 26 - 1 10/22/2018
ducts, shall be grounded back to the service equipment location utilizing the continuous metallic conduit system as the grounding means. Discontinuity of the metallic conduit grounding system will not be acceptable.
E. All connections to motors, receptacles and equipment shall contain a separate grounding
conductor bonded to the panelboard grounding bus at one end and the motor frame, receptacles, or equipment at the other end.
F. Provide a ground wire in all 120 and 277 V. lighting circuits. Ground all lighting equipment.
G. Provide a ground wire for all 120 V. receptacle outlet circuits.
H. See 16140 for ground type receptacles.
I. See 16140 for ground fault interrupting receptacles in toilet room and all outside locations.
J. Transformer neutrals and grounds shall be grounded for “separately derived” systems in accordance with NEC.
K. See 16112 and 16130 for fittings for continuous conduit grounding system.
L. Provide a properly sized bonding shunt strap around the water meter and dielectric unions in the
water pipe.
M. All ground wires shall be run in conduit except where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
N. See 16120 for color code of ground wire.
O. Exterior grade mounted equipment shall have enclosures grounded directly to a separate driven ground at the equipment in addition to the building ground connection. This includes grade mounted light fixtures.
P. Test: The resistance between ground and absolute earth shall not exceed 25 ohms and shall be
measured in the presence of the Architect/Engineer before equipment is placed in operation.
END 26 05 26.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 26 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Electrical Contractor provides:
a. Attachment devices for electrical equipment b. Conduit hangers and Floor supports c. Supplementary steel supports d. Escutcheons and Sleeves
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. Division 23 - Mechanical 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hangers shall meet Manufacturers Standardization Society of the United States Electrical Conduit
Manufacturers.
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01.
B. Manufacturer’s literature for demonstrating compliance with this specification.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTURERS
A. Attachment Devices and Methods: 1. Hangers, clamps, inserts (Unistrut, B-Line Systems, or Globe Strut) 2. Concrete: Single rod - CB - universal concrete insert. 3. Concrete - Continuous channel type. Use this method in tunnels, above corridor ceilings.
Concrete reinforcing rods shall extend through projecting flanges of each insert. 4. Existing concrete construction: Powder-driven threaded plug, or lead anchor insert, or
self-drilling threaded masonry insert. 5. Steel beams: Bottom flange clamp or top flange clamps. 6. Steel bar joists and purlins: Support all loads from top flange. No welding will be permitted.
B. Conduit Hangers:
1. Hangers: See 16110 - Raceways. 2. Hanger Rod Sizes Conduit Size Rod Size
a. 2” and under 3/8” b. 2 1/2 - 3 1/2 1/2” c. 4, 5 5/8” d. 6 3/4”
3. Hanger Spacing Conduit Size Hangers Center Plastic a. 1” & smaller 6’ O.C. 5’ O.C. b. larger than 1” 5’ 5’ O.C.
4. Provide additional hangers at bends. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 29.10 - 1 10/22/2018
5. Conduit risers: Support risers at floors or at specified intervals with conduit clamps resting firmly on building construction. Where necessary, provide supplementary steel to support clamps.
C. Floor Supports: 1. Required concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in 03300. Use only approved
shop drawings for dimensions. 2. Concrete pads shall extend 4” beyond equipment in each direction. Chamfer top edges 1/2”.
Trowel all surfaces smooth. Reinforce pads with 6 x 6 - W2.9 welded wire fabric. 3. Concrete housekeeping pads: Provide 3 - 5/8” minimum thickness reinforced concrete bases
under equipment installed on building floors. Rough up building floor to assure bonding of base to floor. Anchor base to floor with reinforcing bars set in floor at time of pouring of floor or with powder driven studs. Set required anchor bolts in base at time of pouring.
D. Supplementary Steel Supports: 1. Construct structural steel bases, racks, frames as shown on drawings. Each assembly shall
be rigidly welded and secured to building construction. Safety factor shall be 5 to 1 minimum. Touch up any paint on building structural steel damaged in process.
2. At Contractor’s option such items may be fabricated of bolted channels. E. Escutcheons:
1. Finish escutcheons on exposed conduits passing through sleeved or unsleeved openings in floors, walls, ceilings, roof of finished rooms including inside cabinetry in finished rooms.
2. Escutcheons may be deleted in Equipment rooms, Pipe chases, and Janitor rooms. 3. Escutcheons shall be stamped steel with hinge and springs. 4. Finish on Walls and ceilings - prime coat paint and on Floors - Chrome plated.
F. Sleeves: 1. Location: Wherever pipes or conduits pass through masonry walls or floors. 2. In other locations, sleeves may be 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 3. Floor sleeves shall finish flush in rooms except equipment rooms and chases where they
shall project 1” above floor and shall be neatly beveled. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall lines.
4. Inside diameter of sleeves shall be 1/4” to 1/2” larger than outside diameter of conduit passing through sleeve.
5. Seal above grade sleeves sight tight with fiberglass rope. Seal above-grade sleeves with Dow Corning Firestop, Nelson Flameseal, or 3M Fire Barrier CP25 Caulk or 303 Putty.
6. Seal sleeves in below grade walls watertight with “Link-Seals” or Thunderline link-seals or use fiberglass rope with Sika Chemical Company (251 East Grand, Chicago) “IGAS” gun grade joint filler, 1/2” deep at both ends of sleeve.
G. Roof Openings: 1. Roof openings for conduit will be provided by the General Contractor. 2. Conduit roof sleeves by General Contractor.
H. Supporting Methods and Devices: 1. Supporting methods and devices must be approved by Engineer before installation. Do not
overload beams, joists, slabs or devices. Welding to and drilling of structural members must be approved by Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Install supplementary steel angles, channels, beams where hanger location falls between joists,
purlins or beams; for hanging loads exceeding capacity of a single joist; where shown on drawings; safety factor of such assemblies shall be 5 to 1 minimum.
B. Support conduit and equipment from building construction with adequate hangers, clamps, rods,
inserts and housekeeping pads.
C. Loads supported from roof shall be supported from structural members.
D. Coordinate support locations with other crafts.
E. Contractors shall touch up damaged or chipped paint on materials furnished by them.
END 26 05 29.10. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 29.10 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. BASE BID:
1. Electrical Contractor: Provide conduit specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards, Specifications, Catalogs:
1. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled, UL 79 2. ANSI C80.3 & 4 1963 (R1974).
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s literature in accordance with Division 01 for each type of conduit.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Rigid heavy wall steel conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized, standard weight, rigid mild steel with threaded connections, UL labeled, manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit, Republic, Steelduct Conduit Products, Wheatland Tube Co. or Youngstown.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) shall be hot-dipped galvanized, standard lengths, with threaded
connections manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit, Republic, Steelduct Conduit Products, Wheatland Tube Co. or Youngstown. Fittings shall be Appleton, Crouse-Hinds or Killark.
C. PVC Conduit shall be heavy wall polyvinyl chloride conduit, schedule 40 grade, and 90 degrees C.
rated. Conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon, Robintech or Can-Tex Industries.
D. Electrical metallic tubing shall be zinc coated, enamel lined, threadless steel tubing UL labeled, manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit, Steelduct Conduit Co., Triangle or Wheatland. All fittings shall be compression type. Fittings shall be manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Appleton or Efcor.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be Type “UA” flexible metal conduit with PVC outer jacket and integral grounding conductor manufactured by Anaconda, American Brass Company or Electri-Flex Company.
2. Where the fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knockout, a gasket assembly consisting of an “O” ring and retainer shall be installed on the outside. Fittings shall be
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 33.20 - 1 10/22/2018
insulated throat type, Thomas and Betts Series, Appleton or Raco. 3. Flexible metal conduit shall be single strip, helically wound, galvanized steel with smooth
interior surface manufactured by Triangle, Anaconda, Allied Tube and Conduit.
F. Wire Troughs And Auxiliary Gutters 1. Wire troughs and auxiliary gutters shall be fabricated of code gauge sheet steel manufactured
in accordance with industry standards and bearing the UL label. 2. Finish shall be baked enamel in the manufacturer’s standard color /ANSI colors. 3. Wireway shall have removable hinged type cover and shall be constructed with knockouts.
Wireway shall be suitable for lay-in conductors. Connector covers shall be permanently attached so that removal is not necessary to utilize the lay-in feature. All sheet metal parts shall be provided with a rust inhibiting phosphatizing coating and gray baked enamel finish. All hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion. All screws installed toward the inside shall be protected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation damage.
G. Conduit Fittings
1. All conduit fittings and box connectors shall be strong in construction and shall be of material and finish that will not cause any chemical reaction between itself and the conduit or outlet box to which it is fastened or supported.
2. All conduit fittings and box connectors shall be listed by UL. 3. All box connectors shall be provided with insulated throats or separate plastic insulating
bushings provided on all conduit openings. 4. All conduit fittings, box connectors and lock nuts shall be steel or malleable iron. Fittings of
die-cast or pressure-cast materials will not be acceptable. 5. Fittings for EMT shall be compression type, rain-tight and concrete-tight. 6. Fittings for flexible conduit or liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be straight 45 degree or 90
degree connectors and approved by the Architect/Engineer for grounding purposes. 7. Conduit fittings shall be manufactured by Raco, T & B, Efcor or Appleton.
H. Insulated Bushings
1. Provide insulated bushings at ends of all conduits and in cabinets and pull-and-junction boxes, specified and indicated on the drawings.
2. For conduits 1-inch and larger: Bushings shall be malleable iron body with composition insulation ring. Acceptable products: O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company’s Type “B”.
3. For conduits smaller and 1-inch: Bushings shall be malleable iron body with composition insulation ring. Acceptable products: O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company Type “A”.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. All wiring shall be installed in conduit with outlets, junction boxes and fittings unless specified
otherwise.
B. Where vertical drops are made to machines in open space, 1-inch rigid conduit shall be minimum size used. When the drop terminates in a box at the ceiling, box shall be threaded hub type. The vertical conduit shall be rigidly supported at the top and bottom. Floor flanges shall be used at the bottom of each drop.
C. Provide junction or pull boxes approved by the Architect/Engineer to facilitate the “pulling-in” of
wires or to make connections. All raceways and apparatus shall be thoroughly blown out and cleaned of foreign matter prior to pulling in wires.
D. Do all cutting and patching for the installation of the electrical work. All cutting shall be done by a
competent craftsman and the areas affected shall be restored to original condition in a neat manner, in compliance with current trade practices.
E. All equipment or material which weighs more than 50 pounds per support shall be supported from
building structure or supporting steel. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 33.20 - 2 10/22/2018
3.02. WIRING METHODS
A. All conduit runs shall be a minimum 3/4-inch size.
B. Rigid or/Intermediate metal conduit may be used throughout the installation.
C. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used where permitted by NEC except under the following circumstances: 1. Exposed outside of the building or underground. 2. Conduit sizes greater than 1-1/2 inches. 3. On vertical runs where the spacing of supports are greater than 7 feet. 4. Vertical drops to machines in open spaces. 5. Slabs-on-grade 6. Feeders to panelboards, motor control centers, transfer switches and generators. 7. Where exposed to moisture. 8. For high voltage wiring.
D. Intermediate metal conduit shall be used except for above 600 volt wiring.
E. In finished areas, run conduits concealed. In mechanical areas conduit shall be run exposed,
running parallel or at right angles to the building walls.
F. Feeder conduits shall be run exposed above suspended ceilings and not installed in floor slabs, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
G. Thin wall conduit connections shall be made up with compression fittings.
H. Conduit and other raceways shall not be supported from ductwork or other piping.
I. Hangers provided by other Contractors shall not be used for support of electrical conduits without
prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. Hangers shall be fabricated type. Perforated iron or spring steel fasteners shall not be permitted.
J. Multiple feeder runs shall be rod hung, using a strut type channel with individual one hole clamps,
back plates and machine screws.
K. Liquidtight flexible conduit shall be installed in a manner that liquids will run off the surfaces and not drain toward the fittings.
L. All runs of flexible conduit to motors and transformers shall be as short as practicable, of the
same size as the conduit it extends and with enough slack to reduce the effects of vibration to a minimum. A minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit shall be installed for each motor or transformer.
M. Carefully consider clearance under and over beams, pipes and ducts to provide proper headroom
in all cases. Examine drawings to determine heights of all suspended ceilings and size of pipe shafts where conduit and wireways shall run. Coordinate installation of electrical wiring and equipment with other contractors. Where insufficient room for proper installation appears, obtain clarifications from Architect/Engineer before any installation is started.
N. Cutting or moving of work of other contractors or cutting or weakening of building structure will not
be permitted without prior written approval of Architect/Engineer.
O. All wireways, sheet metal housings and fittings shall be installed and processed to remove all burrs and sharp edges. All paint removed or damaged in installation shall be touched up with same type and color of enamel.
P. Pitch all conduit and provide weep holes in pull boxes.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 33.20 - 3 10/22/2018
Q. Conduit shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts without prior written approval of Architect/Engineer. Provide all sleeves for conduit installation.
R. Core drill holes or sleeves in floors and foundation walls for conduit when indicated.
END 26 05 33.20.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 05 33.20 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 33.30 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Each Contractor provides:
a. All boxes for his work. b. Coordination of boxes requiring access. c. Access panels for boxes hidden by building construction.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere:
1. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 5. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 6. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 7. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Bo xes Include: 1. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes 2. Floor boxes 3. Pull and junction boxes
1.04. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Comply with ANSI L1. 2. Provide materials listed/labeled by UL. 3. Comply with Illinois Steel Products Procurement Act, as amended (Illinois Revised Statutes,
Ch. 48, Par. 1801 et. seq.). 4. National Electrical Code, latest edition.
B. Reference Publications
1. ANSI/NEMA OS-1 Sheet steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. 2. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
1.05. SUBMITTALS
A. No submittals required when using specified materials. Otherwise, comply with Division 01.
1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be suitably package by manufactured to prevent damage during shipment.
Damaged materials not acceptable for use.
B. Store materials on site in clean, dry storage area.
C. Handle all materials carefully to preclude damage.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 33.30 - 1 10/22/18
2. PRODUCTS 2.01. BOXES
A. Pull boxes and junction boxes:
1. Comply with NEC-370, UL 50 and ANSI/NEMA OS-1; galvanized steel. 2. Flush mounted pull boxes: Overlapping cover with flush head security type retaining screws,
prime-coated. Provide two screw removal/insertion tools to Using Agency. Overlap two (2) inches on all sides.
3. Surface mounted boxes: Screw-on or hinged cover. Provide silicon bronze standard retaining screws where accessible only to authorized personnel; security type in all other locations. Spaced twelve (12) inches maximum.
4. Boxes of 14 gauge steel minimum, galvanized or prime coated in finished areas. 5. Boxes greater than 1400 sq. in.: Make of 1-1/2 in. x 1-1/2 in. x 1/4 in. galvanized angle
covered with 10 gage galvanized sheet steel riveted or bolted with cover of 11 gage galvanized steel hinged in accord with Section 16160.
6. Boxes larger than 12 in. in any dimension: Hinged enclosure in accord with Section 16160. 7. Cast metal boxes for outdoor and wet location installations: NEMA 250; type 4 and type 6, flat
flanged, surface mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. Galvanized cast iron box and cover with ground flange, Neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
B. Outlet Boxes
1. Interior boxes: Hot dipped galvanized, 1.25 oz. per sq. ft. Conform to UL 514. Sheet steel with conduit knockouts, attached lugs for locating. ANSI/NEMA OS-1.
2. Exterior boxes or exposed interior in wet/damp locations: Cast aluminum, deep type, corrosion proof fasteners, watertight, gasketed, threaded hubs.
3. For suspended or surface mounted fixtures: a. 4 in. octagonal or square according to devices used. Minimum 1-1/2 in. deep, deep
boxes for cast-in-place concrete ceilings. Furnished with fixture studs. Installed with 3/4 in. minimum depth plaster rings on suspended ceilings. 4 in. octagonal or square for all exposed conduit work with fixture extension pan or deep fixture canopy to enclose the box.
4. For recessed fixtures: a. 4 in. octagonal or square. Minimum 1-1/2 in. deep. Complete with blank cover.
5. Switch and Receptacle Boxes: a. Wall: 4 in. square for up to two devices. Solid gang boxes for over two devices.
Complete with 1 in. minimum depth tile ring where used in exposed tile, concrete, block or paneled walls. Complete with 1 in. minimum depth plaster ring where used in plastered walls. Install with 1/2 in. raised galvanized device covers where used for exposed conduit work.
6. Provide corrosion resistant steel knockout closures for unused openings.
C. Conduit Bodies: 1. Galvanized cast metal of type, shape and size to fit location. 2. Constructed with threaded conduit ends, removable cover, corrosion resistant screws.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Appleton Electric Co. 2. Crouse-Hinds Co. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Hoffman Co. 5. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. 6. O.Z./Gedney Co. 7. Pyle-National 8. RACO 9. Square D 10. Steel City 11. Thomas & Betts Co.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 33.30 - 2 10/22/2018
3. EXECUTION
3.01. COORDINATION
A. The location of outlets shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only. Coordinate the exact location of outlets with architectural details, equipment connection requirements and work of other contractors. Architect/Engineer may alter the location of outlets shown within a 6’ radius prior to installation.
B. Protect all outlet boxes from entry of foreign materials.
C. Independently support all boxes. No parts of the weight or stress thereof shall be borne by
conduits terminating therein.
D. Suitable pull boxes shall be installed in convenient intermediate locations in all conduit runs in excess of 150 linear feet and runs requiring more than three 90 degree bends.
E. Provide boxes as shown and for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and code
compliance.
F. Locations shown are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
G. Locate boxes to allow access. When inaccessible, provide access doors.
H. Locate boxes to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance.
3.02. INSTALLATION
A. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.
B. Support all boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes connected to two rigid conduits both supported within 12 in. of box.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Flush mount outlet boxes in areas other than mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and above removable ceilings.
2. Provide recessed boxes in finished areas; secure to interior wall and partition studs, allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud hinges in hollow stud wall and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling boxes.
3. Provide cast boxes for exterior locations and wet locations. 4. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall. Provide at least 6 in. separation. 5. Masonry Walls: 6. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry course lines. 7. Coordinate cutting of walls to achieve neat openings for boxes. 8. Locate boxes in walls so that only corners need to be cut from masonry units. 9. Use multiple gauge boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use
sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate different voltage systems. 10. For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure insulation is behind outlet boxes. Do not
damage insulation. 11. For outlets mounted above counters, benches or backsplashes, coordinate location and
mounting heights with units. 12. Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with specified location for equipment served. 13. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling drawings. 14. Position outlets and junction boxes in inaccessible ceiling areas within 6 in. of luminaire;
accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. 15. Align wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
D. Pull and Junction Boxes:
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 33.30 - 3 10/22/2018
1. Locate above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas. 2. Support independent of conduit.
E. Provide covers for all boxes.
F. Where interior wall or ceiling grid is to be constructed in future work but does not yet exist, locate
junction boxes on the underside of roof deck to facilitate future circuit extension.
END 26 05 33.30.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA#20180141 26 05 33.30 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid:
1. Electrical Contractor: Identify feeders, pull boxes, main switchboard, and panelboards.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide proper identification in accordance with NFPA 70- (NEC), latest edition.
1.04. CABLE
A. Each feeder shall be identified at panels, pull boxes, and other access points with pressure labels
indicating feeder number and switchboard or distribution panel from which the feeder originates. Acceptable manufacturers: Brady, Scotch, or T & B wrap on type.
1.05. PULLBOXES
A. Provide permanent marking on pull box covers. Covers shall have words “ELECTRICAL P.B.# “
stenciled on them with at least 1/2” high block type letters. See drawings for pull box numbers.
1.06. PANELBOARDS
A. Provide a typed card directory for each panel. Directory shall designate breaker number and load served. Panel shall have all breakers individually numbered and panel shall have an interior nameplate provided by manufacturer with voltage, amperage, phase and hertz listed. Provide an exterior engraved plastic signage with the panel name or number or letter designation.
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Labels:
a. Quentin D. Schwab, 606 E. Dodson Dr., Urbana, IL 61801 b. Joe Halm Building Specialists, Box 525, LaGrange, IL c. Mechanical Tag Systems, Box 1565, Cedar Rapids, IA 62406 d. Seton Name Plate Corp., 592 Boulevard, New Haven, CT 06505 e. N & E Specialty Co., Box 3518, Peoria, IL f. Artistic Engravers, Box 1385, Peoria, IL 61654
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 23 05 53 - 1 10/22/2018
2. Electrical Wire Marker Tape: a. 3M, Scotch Code b. Panduit, Insta-Code c. Thomas and Betts, E-Z Coder
2.02. LABELS
A. Type: Laminated engraved plastic identification labels.
B. Colors: White with black recessed letters, attached with adhesive, with 1/2” high letters on
equipment and 1/4” high letters on control and disconnect devices, such as switches.
C. Labels shall include complete identification of equipment including area served, identifying numbers and names used on Drawings (i.e., “Supply Fan SF-4 - First Floor”, “Main Distribution Panel MDP-1”, “Hot Water Pump P-6 - Panel “MDP””).
D. Labels on main distribution panels shall include name of Architect/Engineer and Contractor.
E. Labels on electrical panels shall include voltage characteristics.
2.03. ELECTRICAL WIRE MARKER TAPE
A. Listed: UL510
B. Type: 5.5 mil epoxy film type
C. Acrylic pressure sensitive
D. High tack adhesive
2.04. WIRE & CABLE
A. Wire and cable shall be color coded.
B. Label with tags or tape at ends giving; use and circuit numbers.
C. See 16120 - Wire & Cable.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Install labels on motor starters, TT switches, relays, disconnect switches, remote P-B stations,
power distribution panels, branch lighting panels, pilot lights, elector switches, transformers, and cable trays.
B. Secondary conduit systems below 600 V., except normal branch power and lighting systems, shall
be color coded by bands or clearly marked by color dots of indelible ink to indicate conduit system (e.g., FA = fire alarm, E = emergency, BAS = Building Automation System).
C. Special outlets and receptacles shall be clearly labeled to identify the utilization equipment.
D. Overcurrent devices in panels clearly identify what they feed. This may be accomplished by means of the typewritten panel schedules mounted inside of the front cover doors under glass or plastic.
END 26 05 53.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 23 05 53 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid
1. Electrical Contractor provides: a. Test electrical systems.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere:
1. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 3. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 5. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 6. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 7. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Furnish all meters, instruments, cable connections, equipment or apparatus for making all tests.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. LOW VOLTAGE TESTING
A. After wires and cables are in place and connected to devices and equipment, the system shall be
tested for short circuits, improper grounds, and other faults. When fault condition is present, the trouble shall be rectified, then retested.
B. Voltage test shall be made at each lighting and distribution panel. When potential is not within 2
percent of rated voltage, the condition shall be corrected by tap changes or power company correction of line voltage.
C. All wiring devices and electrical apparatus furnished under this contract, when grounded or
shorted on any integral “live” part, shall be removed and the trouble rectified by replacing all defective parts and materials.
D. All service and feeder cables, after being pulled in place and before being connected, shall have a
Megger test conducted to determine that wire and cable insulation resistance is not less than that recommended by the NEC. Two (2) copies of all tests shall be given to the Architect/ Engineer. All cables failing insulation test shall be removed, replaced, and retested.
E. All motors shall be tested under load with ammeter readings taken for each phase, and the rpm of
motors recorded at the time. All motors shall be tested for correct direction of rotation. Run tests on all motors and verify that proper overload devices have been installed. The following shall be submitted for approval by the Architect/Engineer: 1. Test and record the following on all motors:
a. Fuse size. b. Heater size.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 08 10 - 1 10/22/2018
c. Full load amp. d. Running amp. e. Rated voltage. f. Terminal operating voltage.
2. Two (2) copies of all test data shall be delivered to the Architect/ Engineer.
3.02. GROUNDING TESTING
A. Test: The resistance between ground grid and absolute earth shall not exceed 10 ohms and shall be measured in the presence of the Architect/ Engineer before equipment is placed in operation.
END 26 08 10.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 08 10 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 28 16 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Electrical Contractor:
a. Provide blade type disconnects specified and indicated on the drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All switches shall be UL labeled and conform to NEMA Standards. B. Comply with: National Electrical Code (NEC), latest edition
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Siemens
B. Switches shall be fusible or non-fusible and of the size and pole arrangement as noted on the
drawings. Switches shall have an NEMA 1 enclosure for interior locations and an NEMA 3R enclosure for exterior locations unless otherwise noted.
C. Requirements:
1. Dead front 2. Visible blades 3. Quick-make, quick-break mechanism 4. Single-throw operation 5. Switch ratings shall be NEMA standard determined by the HP rating of the motors or for the
duty indicated. 6. Each switch shall be operated by a handle projecting through the enclosure. 7. Heavy Duty 8. Provide rejection type fuse clips
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Provide disconnect switches in those locations indicated on the drawings and in accord with NEC. B. Disconnect switches installed on drywall type partitions shall be provided with a 3/4-inch thick
plywood backing securely fastened to the wall.
END 26 28 16. MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 28 16 - 1 10/22/18
This page has been intentionally left blank.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 28 16 - 2 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 29 13 – Enclosed Controllers
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Electrical Contractor:
a. Provide motor starters unless starters will be provided with the equipment served. b. Wire all branch circuits for all motors to nonfused or fused disconnect switch or
combination magnetic starters or thermal overload switches and then to the motors, complete with all control wiring for automatic and remote control. Include all the conduit, fittings, junction boxes, and angle iron framework for mounting of control equipment on floors and walls; handling, setting, and wiring up all motors and starters; except direct connected motors, which will be set on foundation by Contractor providing motor.
c. Except where otherwise noted, motors 1/2 HP and under will operate on 120 volts, single- phase, and will be controlled by manual starters with thermal overload protection. Motors above 1/2 HP, except where otherwise noted, will operate on 208 or 480 volts, three- phase or 240 volts, one-phase.
d. In addition to power connections to motors and starters, set and connect various automatic control devices together with interconnecting wiring to complete their installation.
e. Consult all other sections of the Project Manual and become acquainted with the requirements of the various pieces of equipment.
f. Provide equipment pads.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified Elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. Division 23 - Mechanical 3. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 4. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 6. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 7. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 8. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply With: 1. NEMA CS-2-322 Standards 2. UL 845 3. IEEE 4. NFPA-70 (NEC), latest edition
1.04. SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accord with Division 01.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer’s data demonstrating compliance with this specification. 2. Submittals for individual motor starters shall include:
a. Name (mark) of motor(s) for which intended b. Use c. Horsepower
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 13 - 1 10/22/2018
d. Voltage e. Phase f. Fuse (or circuit breaker) size g. Number and size of wires required between starter and motor h. Location (room name and number) i. NEMA size and enclosure type j. Auxiliary contacts and mode (N.O., N.C.) k. Whether multi-speed or not l. Control circuit diagram and O.C. protection m. Interlocking requirements n. H-O-A, pilot lite, start-stop, jog o. Time delay or timer p. Heater sizes q. Control transformer r. Dimensions
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Square D
2.02. MOTOR STARTERS SCHEDULE
A. Type Square D 1. Manual 1 pole TT* FG-1P 2. Manual 2 pole TT* FG-2P
3. Combination magnetic with fusible disconnect 8538
4. Part winding 8640 5. Auto-transformer 8606 6. Pushbutton stations 9001-K line 7. Manual 2 speed 1 pole
TT* FG-11P 8. Manual 2 speed 2 pole
TT* FG-22P 9. Magnetic 2 speed 8810
* TT = thermal toggle manual starter switch
2.03. FULL VOLTAGE STARTERS
A. Manual Motor Starters - All motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall be provided with manual motor starters complete with thermal overload protection. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall be single- phase and shall operate at either 120 volts or 208 volts as shown on the drawings. Starters shall be two-pole or single-pole as indicated. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 or as noted. Provide manual starting toggle switch with reset on-off position and green running lights in cover. Switch shall be rated for 1 HP, NEMA 0, maximum duty. Provide flush cover and flush mounting in finished area.
B. Magnetic Motor Starters - All motors 3/4 HP and larger shall have magnetic motor starters listed
on the Motor Starter Schedule on the drawings and herein specified. Motors 3/4 HP and larger shall operate on 208 or 480 volt, three-phase, power as noted. All motor starters shall be of the proper size per NEMA designation for voltage, phase, and horsepower of each motor. All magnetic starters shall be full-voltage, non-reversing type. Starters shall have a 120 volt operating coil. When 120 volts is not available from the starter power wiring, the starter shall contain an integral control transformer to provide the 120 volt control voltage. The starter shall contain the following accessories: Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch with green run light, 1 - N/O auxiliary contact, and 1 - N/C auxiliary contact. Pilot lights to be the “push to test” type. See Starter Schedule on drawings for additional requirements. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 or as noted.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 13 - 2 10/22/2018
2.04. REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS
A. Ratings: 7200 VA make, 7200 VA break, 120-600 volts AC; 60 ampere make, 6 ampere break, 0- 120 volts AC.
B. Enclosure: NEMA 1
C. Assembled Control Station Specifications:
1. Start-stop push button and 230 volt AC or DC pilot light stations shall be heavy duty, momentary contact type with NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure or flush mounting for recessed installation as specified.
2. Start-stop push button and 115 volt AC or DC pilot light stations shall be heavy duty, momentary contact type with general purpose enclosure or flush mounting for recessed installation as specified.
3. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch stations shall be heavy duty, maintained contact type with NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure or flush mounting for recessed installation as specified.
2.05. MOTOR OVERLOAD FUSE PROTECTION
A. All motor starters shall be provided with three-phase solid-state overload relays, adjustable, for
protection of each motor.
2.06. MOTOR RELAY PROTECTION
A. All three phase motors 5 HP and above shall be provided with solid state relay protection against single phasing above and beyond protection provided by overload relays; phase reversal; under- voltage; built-in time delay restart. Protective relay shall operate from voltage sensing thereby requiring to current transformers. Mount in each respective starter compartment.
2.07 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) A.
Provide the following VFD: 1. Toshiba #VDT130 H/H1/H or equal by Square D, G.E., Siemens or Cutler Hammer 2. Rated for HP and voltage 3. Manual with bypass mode. 4. Output terminals for remote frequency and ammeter 5. Control power source rectifier circuit 6. Coating on PWB’s 7. Radio noise reduction filter 8. H-O-A selector switch and pilot lights with monitor point 9. Surge voltage protection filter 10. Relay Aux. Module H1-3PS Ver 1.0 or ES5A for CP1, CP2, and CP3 11. Drive Trip (MP-1) 12. Drive running (MP-2) 13. 120 volt control transformer 14. Software, programming and setup 15. 98% Power Factor Correction Capacitor 16. Fused Disconnect Switch
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 13 - 3 10/22/2018
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Install all motor starters and complete all power wiring and final connections to motors and mechanical equipment where shown on the drawings, or in accordance with the NEC, a disconnection switch or circuit breaker shall be provided within sight of the motor starter and shall disconnect all power wiring to the starter. Disconnect switches shall be provided within sight of all motors. Combination disconnect switch and motor starter units may be furnished where disconnects are indicated adjacent to motor starters.
B. Cooperate with Plumbing, Heating, Ventilating and Temperature Control Contractors in placing
the various motors and equipment in operation. The proper phasing and motor rotation shall be verified.
C. Final connection to motors shall be made with liquid-tight flexible conduit specified in Section
16112. Conduit shall be minimum of 18” in length.
D. Install all motor control centers, individually mounted starters and starters furnished loose with machines by other contractors.
E. Provide concrete pads, 6 inches high, for all floor mounted equipment, bolt equipment to concrete
pad securely. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 16050.
F. Manual motor starters, single phase, disconnect means and starters installed in finished areas shall be flush mounted.
G. Interlocking shall be accomplished with auxiliary contact on magnetic starter or control relay.
3.02. GROUNDING
A. The power wiring to all motors shall include a separate continuous green insulated copper ground
conductor. The conductor shall be bonded to the panelboard ground bus at one end and to the motor frame at the other end. The ground conductor shall be sized in accordance with Table 250- 95 of the NEC.
END 26 29 13.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 13 - 4 10/22/2018
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections
1. GENERAL
1.01. WORK INCLUDES
A. Base Bid: 1. Electrical Contractor: Provide mechanical equipment wiring specified and indicated on the
drawings.
1.02. RELATED WORK
A. Specified elsewhere: 1. 01 11 00 - Project Summary 2. 26 00 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. 26 05 29.10 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. 26 05 33.20 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 5. 26 29 25 - Mechanical Equipment Connections 6. 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 7. 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 8. 26 08 10 – Commissioning of Electrical Systems
1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes & Standards: NFPA-70 (NEC), Latest Edition
2. PRODUCTS
2.01. MATERIALS
A. Provide all material to complete final power wiring connections to all mechanical equipment items.
B. See applicable sections of Division 16 specifications.
C. Motor Connections: Provide power wiring for fans, pumps, etc., and tMWEAr associated control equipment furnished by others. Review mechanical plans for all motor locations. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible liquid-tight metallic conduit with grounding conductor. Power wiring includes feeder from distribution panel to disconnect, from disconnect to starter, and feeder from starter to motor. Provide sufficient slack in final connections to allow for minor repositioning or motor mount.
3. EXECUTION
3.01. INSTALLATION
A. Install power wiring, power conduit, disconnects, starters, remote push button stations, fuses or breakers, and make final connections to electrically powered or motorized equipment indicated on the drawings. Final connection to equipment items shall be made in accord with sections specified in paragraph 1.02.
B. Verify proper location of equipment, outlets, controls, mounting heights, and size and number of
wires prior to roughing in. Verify motor types, voltages, and sizes with the starter types, voltages, sizes, holding coil voltages, thermal overload capacities, and interlocks.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 25 - 1 10/22/2018
C. Provide power wiring and disconnect means for all motors, Per NEC.
D. Motors shall be furnished under the section responsible for the driven machine or system. Set loose motors and wire complete, in place. Motor starters for “package” type equipment shall be factory furnished under the section responsible for the packaged equipment system.
E. Review mechanical drawings for locations. Final connections to motors shall be made with
flexible PVC coated metallic conduit. Power wiring includes: feeder from distribution panel to disconnect, feeder from disconnect to starter, and feeder from starter to motor. Provide sufficient slack in final connection to allow for minor repositioning of motor mount. Make final connections.
F. Provide necessary connections between controllers, starters, and motors, in conduit, and leave
motors ready to start. Change connections, if necessary, to secure proper rotation of motors. The power supply leads to the motors, from the starter and controllers shall be of the same size as the feeds indicated on the drawings.
G. Provide fractional horsepower manual starters, surface and recessed types. Recessed types
shall be installed in all finished spaces. All motor starters shall contain pilot lights. Install and wire motor starters complete, in place, and ready for operation.
H. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all 120 volt, single-phase, motors 1/3 HP and larger
shall be placed on separate circuits.
I. Provide overload heaters in starters and motor control devices requiring same. Install overload heaters, sized in accord to motor nameplate data in conformance to applicable codes.
J. All integral packaged control panels shall be provided by the contractor furnishing the equipment.
Install power control panels and complete power wiring.
K. Verify with other contractors what electrical equipment is furnished with mechanical equipment. Provide starters, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. When starters or control panels come as an integral part of the respective equipment (e.g., packaged air conditioning units and sump pumps), provide wiring and make final connections to the line side of the starter or disconnect device. Power and control wiring from this point to the equipment shall be by the Contractor furnishing the motor.
L. Provide assistance during start-up and installation to the contractors furnishing the various
equipment. Test all motors for proper rotation and phase connection. Verify with ampere meter that motor is running under normal conditions and is not drawing excessive amperage. All motors shall have proper fuse and thermal overload protection.
3.02. CLARIFICATION OF WORK
A. All equipment furnished by other contractors shall be placed in first class operating condition. The
Contractor will be responsible for its safety.
B. Temperature control wiring shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor.
END 26 29 25.
MIDWEST ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC MWEA #20180141 26 29 25 - 2 10/22/2018
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES HVAC SYMBOLS
HVAC NOTES AND SYMBOLS:
V. GENERAL NOTES:
1) THESE DRAWINGS ARE NECESSARILY DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. NOT ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, OR DRAINS ARE SHOWN. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, AND DRAINS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM.
2) CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SECURING OF ALL NECESSARY PERMITS AND FOR THE PAYMENT OF ALL FEES.
3) ANY EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL DEVIATIONS FROM THAT SPECIFIED OR DETAILED ON THIS DRAWING SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ISSUING AUTHORITY. ALL
PROPOSED EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS SUBMITTED SHALL BE SIMILAR BOTH IN QUALITY AND CAPACITY TO THAT EQUIPMENT SPECIFIED.
4) ALL WORK DONE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE/OR OTHER APPLICABLE CODES AND/OR ORDINANCES.
5) THE HEATING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, WIRE AND NECESSARY CONNECTIONS RELATING TO MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
AS WELL AS WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH STARTER HOLDING COILS UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. THE HEATING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL
REQUIRED INFORMATION RELATIVE TO MOTOR SIZES AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS TO THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR AND SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK RELATIVE
TO THE WIRING OF THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM.
6) ALL PIPING IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. ALL REQUIRED RISERS AND DROPS TO ALLOW GENERAL ROUTING DEPICTED MAY NOT BE SHOWN. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED
TO MEET SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES AND EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. EXACT LOCATION OF THE PIPING & EQUIPMENT MAY
VARY ACCORDING TO THE COORDINATED SPACE REQUIREMENTS. EACH TRADE SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES.
7) PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY EQUIPMENT OR FABRICATION, ALL MEASUREMENTS SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED AND ADJUSTMENTS MADE AS NECESSARY.
8) COORDINATE SIZE, QUANTITY, AND LOCATION OF ALL OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS, AND ROOFS, WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS.
COORDINATE LOCATION OF AIR INTAKES WITH EXHAUST AND PLUMBING VENTS SO THAT INTAKES ARE A MINIMUM OF 15 FEET FROM EXHAUST OPENINGS OR PLUMBING VENTS.
9) INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ASSUMES FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PUT INTO OPERATION PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF A WORKING CONTROL
SYSTEM, TESTING, AND BALANCING.
10) PATCH ALL WALL PENETRATIONS TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. PROVIDE FIRE SAFING AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS.
11) PROVIDE MANUAL AIR VENTS ON ALL RISERS & CHANGES IN PIPE ELEVATIONS.
III. GENERAL DEMOLITION & NEW WORK NOTES:
1) THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE PROJECT SITE BEFORE SUBMITTING COST PROPOSAL. CONTRACTOR IS ADVISED THAT ALL LOCATIONS
ARE APPROXIMATE.
2) AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO SHOW ALL PIPING, FIXTURES, DUCTWORK, AND OUTLETS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE TO VERIFY COMPONENTS, LOCATIONS
AND SIZES SHOWN OR NOT SHOWN. ALL COMPONENTS NEED TO BE REMOVED IN THE DEMOLITION AREA UNLESS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.
3) IT IS MANDATORY THAT THE EXISTING BUILDING REMAIN IN CONTINUOUS & NON-INTERRUPTED OPERATION DURING REMODELING/ALTERING OF THE EXISTING BUILDING.
SERVICES TO EXISTING BUILDING SHALL BE KEPT ON CONTINUOUS OPERATION INCLUDING DOMESTIC WATER, SANITARY, STORM, STEAM, HEATING, HOT WATER, HVAC
SUPPLY, RETURN & EXHAUST, ETC. ANY ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY INTERRUPTION OF THESE SERVICES TO ACCOMPLISH PROJECT CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE ARRANGED
WITH THE USING AGENCY THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) WEEKS IN ADVANCE. TEMPORARY SERVICES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
WHERE NECESSARY TO ACCOMPLISH THIS PURPOSE. TEMPORARIES SHALL BE REMOVED ONLY AFTER NEW PERMANENT SERVICES ARE INSTALLED AND FULLY
OPERATIONAL.
4) THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS OWN DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, CAPPING, STORING, ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING, RELOCATING AND RECONNECTION
OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND REFINISHING SHALL MATCH THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS
POSSIBLE.
5) EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DRAWING - "TO BE RETAINED, RELOCATED" OR HEREINAFTER NOTED, ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL IN AREAS
TO BE REMODELED/ALTERED SHALL BE REMOVED WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH PROPOSED NEW CONSTRUCTION &/OR INTERFERE W/PROPOSED USAGE OF SPACE BY
USING AGENCY AS FOLLOWS:
(A) REMOVE ANY PIPES PROTRUDING ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR OR THROUGH WALL AND CAP AND FINISH OVER WITH MATERIAL TO MATCH EXISTING.
(B) PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING WALLS AND FLOORS FORMERLY OCCUPIED BY REMOVED PIPING SHALL BE PATCHED TO MATCH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION.
6) SEE SPECIFICATIONS & DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION PHASING REQUIREMENTS. DURING EACH PHASE, AS MUCH WORK AS POSSIBLE MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE
BOUNDARIES OF THAT PHASE.
7) THESE DRAWINGS ARE NECESSARILY DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. NOT ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, OR EQUIPMENT ARE SHOWN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE
PRIOR TO BIDDING AND INCLUDE ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, AND EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM.
MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES
I. PROPER DISPOSAL
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ALL FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL LAWS, STATUTES, AND REGULATIONS WHICH APPLY TO THE PROPER AND
LAWFUL REMOVAL, STORAGE, AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A REMOVAL, STORAGE, AND DISPOSAL PLAN AS REQ'D BY FEDERAL, STATE,
AND LOCAL AUTHORITIES, OBTAIN ALL PERMITS REQ'D, AND FURNISH PROOF OF PLAN AND PERMITS TO USING AGENCY BEFORE DEMOLITION OF EQUIPMENT.
II. USING AGENCY'S FIRST RIGHT OF REFUSAL:
THE CONTRACTOR MUST PLAN TO MAKE AVAILABLE ALL USING AGENCY'S EQUIPMENT THAT IS REMOVED FOR SALVAGE AS IT IS REMOVED, IN PARTICULAR, THE USING AGENCY
WISHES TO HAVE "FIRST RIGHT OF REJECTIONS" TO ALL ITEMS THAT ARE BEING SALVAGED. MAJOR ITEMS SUCH AS PUMP MOTORS, TANKS, OR OLD PIPING ARE NOT OF INTEREST
AT THIS TIME, BUT THE USING AGENCY RESERVES THAT RIGHT UNTIL THEY ARE RELEASED TO THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR FOR DEMOLITION/REMOVAL. THE USING AGENCY
MAY ALSO WANT ELECTRICAL PANEL COMPONENTS, BREAKERS, SOME STARTERS, AND SOME CONTROL BOXES, MOST SMALL VALVES (2" AND UNDER), ALL WORKING GAUGES, ALL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM DEVICES/SENSORS, VFD COMPONENTS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS TO USE FOR FUTURE REPAIRS OF THEIR EQUIPMENT. THE USING AGENCY WILL MARK
THE ITEMS DESIRED BEFORE THE CONTRACTOR STARTS DEMOLITION IN A PARTICULAR AREA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE THE USING AGENCY REASONABLE TIME TO REMOVE
DEVICES FROM EQUIPMENT OR PIPING BEFORE THEY ARE REMOVED FROM THE PREMISES OR THE CONTRACTORS MUST REMOVE THE DEVICES DESIRED BY THE USING AGENCY
AND PLACE THEM IN CRATES OR BOXES PROVIDED BY THE USING AGENCY FOR SUCH PURPOSE FOR THE USING AGENCY TO STORE FOR FUTURE REPAIRS.
IV. EXISTING NOTES:
ALL PIPING, WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CONTROLS IN OR PASSING THROUGH THE WORK AREA THAT SERVE OTHER
AREAS OF THE BUILDING SHALL REMAIN IN OPERATION. ANY OUTAGES OF THE SERVICES NECESSITATED BY THIS
CONTRACT WORK SHALL BE COORDINATED IN ADVANCE WITH THE USING AGENCY. ANY DAMAGE SHALL BE
REPAIRED IMMEDIATELY AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
VI. FINAL DEMOLITION AND PROJECT COMPLETION:
EVERY ATTEMPT WAS MADE TO DETAIL THE DRAWINGS AND SHOW MAJOR ITEMS TO BE REMOVED; HOWEVER, THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR MUST REMOVE ALL ITEMS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAJOR ITEMS DETAILED SUCH AS VENTS, RELIEFS, AND ASSOCIATED PIPING INCLUDING OUTSIDE PIPE RACKS, DOMESTIC WATER FEED LOOPS, BACKFLOW
PREVENTERS, ETC. THAT ARE CONNECTED TO THE MAJOR DEVICES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ALSO, THE CONTRACTOR MUST PATCH ALL PENETRATIONS FROM THE REMOVED
ITEMS WITH SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION METHODS ON THE WALLS, FLOORS, OR ROOFS AS REQUIRED. ALL STEAM SYSTEM PIPING, COMPONENTS, DEVICES, RIGGING, AND ALL ITEMS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAJOR DEVICES (COOLING TOWERS, ABSORBERS, BOILERS, PUMPS, CONDENSATE PUMPS, BOILER FEED-WATER PUMPS, WATER HEATER AND ALL OTHER
ITEMS IDENTIFIED ON THE PLANS) WILL BE REMOVED UNDER THIS PROJECT BY THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR IN HIS BASE BID UNLESS ALLOWED TO REMAIN BY THE ENGINEER
AND USING AGENCY. HOUSEKEEPING PADS THAT ARE NOT REUSED WILL NEED TO BE REMOVED. ALL EXISTING TO REMAIN DOMESTIC WATER, HEAT, AND CHILLED WATER PIPING
MUST BE INSULATED. DAMAGED OR MISSING INSULATION MUST BE REPAIRED ON ALL PIPING AT CLOSE OUT.
HEATING CONSTRUCTION NOTES:
1) COORDINATE HEATING PIPING WITH DUCTWORK AND PLUMBING PIPING. PIPING IS TO BE AS HIGH AS
POSSIBLE, WITH PRECEDENCE GIVEN TO DUCTWORK.
2) PATCH ALL WALL PENETRATIONS TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. PROVIDE FIRE SAFING AT ALL
PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS.
3) PROVIDE MANUAL AIR VENTS ON ALL RISERS & CHANGES IN PIPE ELEVATIONS.
4) PROVIDE ALL LABOR, FITTINGS, INSTALLATION AND PIPING NECESSARY TO INSTALL PIPING. COORDINATE
WITH OTHER TRADES.
GENERAL NOTES:
1) THESE DRAWINGS ARE NECESSARILY DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE. NOT ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, OR DRAINS ARE SHOWN. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL FITTINGS, OFFSETS, VENTS, AND DRAINS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONING SYSTEM.
2) EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SECURING OF ALL NECESSARY PERMITS AND FOR THE PAYMENT OF ALL FEES.
3) ANY EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL DEVIATIONS FROM THAT SPECIFIED OR DETAILED ON THIS DRAWING SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF
THE ISSUING AUTHORITY. ALL PROPOSED EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS SUBMITTED SHALL BE SIMILAR BOTH IN QUALITY AND CAPACITY TO THAT EQUIPMENT
SPECIFIED.
4) ALL WORK DONE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE/OR OTHER APPLICABLE CODES AND/OR
ORDINANCES.
5) ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION.
6) THE HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, WIRE AND NECESSARY CONNECTIONS RELATING TO
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AS WELL AS WIRING ASSOCIATED WITH STARTER HOLDING COILS UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE
DRAWINGS. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION RELATIVE TO MOTOR SIZES AND ELECTRICAL
CHARACTERISTICS TO THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL COORDINATE ALL WORK RELATIVE TO THE WIRING OF THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM.
7) CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO GENERATE 1/4-INCH SCALE COORDINATION DRAWINGS OF THE HVAC SYSTEMS PIPING. COORDINATION WITH OTHER
TRADES IS REQUIRED TO IDENTIFY ALL CONFLICTS AND/OR OPPORTUNITIES TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ANY COSTS INCURRED
THAT ARE THE RESULT OF INCOMPLETE COORDINATION SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTORS.
8) COORDINATE SIZE, QUANTITY, AND LOCATION OF ALL OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS, AND ROOFS, WITH
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR ROUGH FRAMING.
9) PERMANENT EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT BE USED FOR TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED PERMISSION OF SURS.
10) PATCH ALL WALL PENETRATIONS TO MATCH ADJACENT SURFACES. PROVIDE FIRE SAFING AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS.
11) ALL PIPE PENETRATIONS OF PIPE 4-INCHES AND LARGER (WITHOUT INSULATION) SHALL ALSO BE COORDINATED WITH THE STRUCTURAL COORDINATION
DRAWINGS. GROUPED PIPE PENETRATIONS THAT REQUIRE LARGER OPENINGS IN THE SLAB SHALL BE IDENTIFIED ON THE STRUCTURAL COORDINATION
DRAWINGS.
12) HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEST AND BALANCE WORK.
13) CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO MEASURE THE EXISTING RAILS ON THE ROOF AND IF NECESSARY, CONSTRUCT A FRAME/STRUCTURAL SYSTEM
TO ACCOMMODATE THE FOOTPRINT OF THE NEW CONDENSING UNIT TO BE PLACED ON THE ROOF. THE PROPOSED CONDENSING UNIT AND ALL
APPURTENANCES SHALL NOT EXCEED A WEIGHT OF 8,600 LBS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE PROPOSED STRUCTURAL
FRAMING SYSTEM FOR THE NEW CONDENSING UNIT SEALED BY AN ILLINOIS LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO SURS FOR REVIEW.
14) THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SURS ACCESS TO PROPERLY TRAINED SERVICE PERSONNEL FOR SUPPORTIVE MAINTENANCE FOR THE
PRODUCT SUBMITTED. THIS DOES NOT INCLUDE THE MANUFACTURER'S TRAINED PERSONNEL, THE PROPERLY TRAINED SERVICE PERSONNEL SHALL BE
EMPLOYED BY THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE ABLE TO BE RELIED UPON IN THE EVENT OF EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE ISSUES
WITHOUT MANUFACTURER RELIANCE.
CAP OR PLUG FOR < 2", BLIND FLANGE FOR > 2"
HEATING SYMBOL LIST
DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC TWO-WAY CONTROL VALVE (ELECTRIC)
AUTOMATIC THREE-WAY CONTROL VALVE (ELECTRIC)
REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINE
PIPE ANCHOR
THERMOMETER
PRESSURE GAUGE
MANUAL AIR VENT
ELBOW TURNED UP
ELBOW TURNED DOWN
TEE - TOP OUTLET
TEE - BOTTOM OUTLET
SCREWED UNION
STRAINER
FLANGED UNION
REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE LINE
RD
BALL VALVE
HOT WATER SUPPLY
HOT WATER RETURN
CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
GATE VALVE
CHECK VALVE
CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVE
GLOBE VALVE
RELIEF VALVE
HUMIDISTAT
THERMOSTAT
REFRIGERANT LIQUID LINE
BUTTERFLY VALVE
RL
RS
T
H
SYMBOL
CHS
HWS
HWR
CO2
CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR
CHILLED WATER RETURNCHR
DEMO BEGINNING/END POINT
NEW CONNECTION TO EXISTING BEGINNING/END POINT
EQUIPMENT
XXX
#
PIPING DOWN
PIPING UP
DN
UP
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
H1.0
Issued
Rev Date
Description
HV
AC
N
OT
ES
A
ND
S
YM
BO
LS
(E) ACC
(E) CHILLER
MECHANICAL
C154
CORRIDOR
C151
(E) UH
(E) AHU
(E) ACC ROOF
CURB / COVER
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
HD1.1
Issued
Rev Date
Description
ME
CH
AN
IC
AL R
OO
M A
ND
R
OO
F -
HV
AC
D
EM
OLIT
IO
N
MECHANICAL ROOM C154 PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN - HVAC DEMOLITION
DEMOLITION KEYED NOTES
” ”
CHILLER SCHEDULE
NOM. ACTUAL CHILLED WATER DATA AMBIENT PERCENT COMPRESSOR DATA CONDENSER FAN DATA BASIS OF DESIGN
MARK DESCRIPTION CAPACITY CAPACITY GPM EWT LWT
PD (FT)
TEMP REFRIG- PROPYLENE TONS HP. ELECTRICAL DATA MANUFACTURER REMARKS
(TONS) (TONS) (°F) (°F) (°F)
ERANT GLYCOL NO.
(EA.)
NO.
(EA.)
VOLTS PHASE HZ MCA MOCP AND MODEL
CENTRIFUGAL LIQUID
CHILLER
MULTISTACK
CH-1 130 130 312.0 55 45 12.36 95 R-134a 2 460 3 60 195 250 MS0162FN1M2R0H1CV8NFK-R134A ALL
NOTES:
1. BASIS OF DESIGN IS MULTISTACK. 3. PROVIDE UNIT WITH SINGLE POINT POWER CONNECTION.
2.RIGHT SIDE CHILLED WATER CONNECTIONS.
4. REFER TO AIR COOLED CONDENSER SCHEDULE FOR INFORMATION.
AIR COOLED CONDENSER SCHEDULE
TOTAL AMBIENT CONDENSER MAXIMUM BASIS OF DESIGN
MARK DESCRIPTION SERVICE COOLING TEMP. FANS ELECTRICAL DATA OPERATING MANUFACTURER REMARKS
MBH
(°F)
NO.
HP (EA.)
MCA MOCP VOLTS PHASE HERTZ
WEIGHT (LBS)
AND MODEL
AIR-COOLED MULTISTACK
ACC-1 CONDENSER CH-1 10 56 70 460 3 60 RCPCHNAAE ALL
NOTES:
1. PROVIDE UNIT WITH SINGLE POINT POWER CONNECTION.
2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH LOW-NOISE CONDENSER FANS AND FAN SOUND ATTENUATION PACKAGE.
EXISTING PUMP SCHEDULE
FLOW FLUID BASIS OF DESIGN
MARK DESCRIPTION SERVICE RATE SUCTION DISCHARGE HEAD TEMP MOTOR DATA MANUFACTURER
GPM IN. IN.
(FT OF WATER)
°F VOLTS RPM PHASE HP AND MODEL REMARKS
BELL & GOSSETT
CLP-1 IN-LINE PUMP CHILLED WATER 370 5 4 30 44 4803,450
3 5 80-S 5X5X7 ALL
BELL & GOSSETT
CLP-2 IN-LINE PUMP CHILLED WATER 370 5 4 30 44 4803,450
3 5 80-S 5X5X7 ALL
NOTES:
1. PUMP SHALL BE NON-OVERLOADING OVER THE PUMP CURVE
4"
12"
6"
MATCHES
CHILLER
5. MAX. WEIGHT 8,600 LB.
NOTE: EXISTING ROOF IS UNDER WARRANTY. ANY WORK
INVOLVING THE ROOF SYSTEM SHALL BE APPROVED BY
THE WARRANTY HOLDER.
MECHANICAL
C154
CORRIDOR
C151
(E) UH
(E) AHU
(E) ACC ROOF
CURB / COVER
NEW ACC-1 ON
ROOF
CHILLER
(NEW)
AIR-COOLED
CONDENSER
(NEW)
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
H1.1
Issued
Rev Date
Description
ME
CH
AN
IC
AL R
OO
M A
ND
R
OO
F -
HV
AC
N
EW
W
OR
K
AIR COOLED CONDENSER ROOF CURB DETAIL
ROOF PLAN - HVAC NEW WORKMECHANICAL ROOM C154 PLAN - HVAC NEW WORK
PIPE ROOF SUPPORT DETAIL
INSTALLATION KEYED NOTES
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVEVFD
CONTROL SYMBOL LIST
TE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR - W/IMMERSION WELL
CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE IN CONDUIT
NO SCALE
CHILLER AND CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROL
1
SPLIT SYSTEM CHILLER - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS:
1. RUN CONDITIONS
THE CHILLER SHALL BE ENABLED TO RUN WHENEVER A DEFINABLE NUMBER OF CHILLED WATER COILS NEED COOLING AND
THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN 54°F (ADJ.)
TO PREVENT SHORT CYCLING, THE CHILLER SHALL RUN FOR AND BE OFF FOR MINIMUM ADJUSTABLE TIMES (BOTH USER
DEFINABLE), UNLESS SHUTDOWN ON SAFETIES OR OUTSIDE AIR CONDITIONS.
THE CHILLER SHALL RUN SUBJECT TO ITS OWN INTERNAL SAFETIES AND CONTROLS.
2. REFRIGERANT DETECTION:
THE CHILLER SHALL SHUT DOWN AND AN ALARM GENERATED UPON RECEIVING A REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION STATUS.
3. CHILLED WATER PUMP:
THE CHILLED WATER PUMP SHALL RUN ANYTIME THE CHILLER IS CALLED TO RUN. THE CHILLED WATER PUMP SHALL ALSO
RUN FOR FREEZE PROTECTION WHENEVER THE OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN A USER DEFINABLE SETPOINT
(ADJ.).
THE CHILLED WATER PUMP SHALL START PRIOR TO THE CHILLER BEING ENABLED AND SHALL STOP ONLY AFTER THE
CHILLER IS DISABLED. THE CHILLED WATER PUMP SHALL THEREFORE HAVE A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON START AND A
USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON STOP.
THE DELAY TIMES SHALL BE SET APPROPRIATELY TO ALLOW FOR ORDERLY CHILLED WATER SYSTEM START-UP,
SHUTDOWN, AND SEQUENCING.
ALARMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
CHILLED WATER PUMP FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF.
CHILLED WATER PUMP RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON.
CHILLED WATER PUMP RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT.
4. CHILLER
THE CHILLER SHALL BE ENABLED A USER ADJUSTABLE TIME AFTER PUMP STATUSES ARE PROVEN ON. THE CHILLER SHALL
THEREFORE HAVE A USER ADJUSTABLE DELAY ON START.
THE DELAY TIME SHALL BE SET APPROPRIATELY TO ALLOW FOR ORDERLY CHILLED WATER SYSTEM START-UP, SHUTDOWN,
AND SEQUENCING.
THE CHILLER SHALL RUN SUBJECT TO ITS OWN INTERNAL SAFETIES AND CONTROLS.
ALARMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
CHILLER FAILURE: COMMANDED ON, BUT THE STATUS IS OFF.
CHILLER RUNNING IN HAND: COMMANDED OFF, BUT THE STATUS IS ON.
CHILLER RUNTIME EXCEEDED: STATUS RUNTIME EXCEEDS A USER DEFINABLE LIMIT.
5. CHILLER CHILLED WATER SUPPLY SETPOINT
THE CHILLER SHALL MAINTAIN A CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SETPOINT AS DETERMINED BY ITS OWN INTERNAL
CONTROLS (PROVIDED BY OTHERS).
6. CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE MONITORING:
CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN TEMPERATURES SHALL BE MONITORED.
ALARMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AS FOLLOWS:
HIGH CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP: IF THE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE IS GREATER THAN 55°F (ADJ.)
LOW CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMP: IF THE CHILLED WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE IS LESS THAN 38°F (ADJ.)
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
TO ENSURE CONTINUOUS AND INTERRUPTED OPERATION OF BUILDING COOLING SYSTEMS DURING BUILDING OCCUPANCY HOURS,
SURS RESERVES THE RIGHT TO DIRECT THE DATE AT WHICH THIS WORK IS TO COMMENCE BASED ON ACCEPTABLE MAXIMUM
AMBIENT DAYTIME HIGH FORECAST TEMPERATURES.
CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE TO SURS FOR THEIR APPROVAL PRIOR TO START OF WORK INCLUDING
DAYS, DATES, DURATION, AND DETAILED WORK FOR EACH. THE SCHEDULE SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT LIMITED, TO THE FOLLOWING:
1. REFRIGERANT EVACUATION AS REQUIRED.
2. DISCONNECTING AND REMOVING EXISTING CHILLER AND CONDENSER.
3. PROVIDING NEW CONDENSER STRUCTURAL SUPPORT AS REQUIRED.
4. INSTALLING NEW CHILLER AND CONDENSER.
5. PROVIDING NEW DX PIPING AS REQUIRED AND PROVIDING NEW REFRIGERANT.
6. PROVIDING NEW CHILLED WATER PIPING AND CONNECTING TO EXISTING.
7. FULLY OPERATING NEW CHILLED WATER SYSTEM.
8. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
9. FINAL CLEANING AND INSULATION WORK.
10. COMMISSIONING OF NEW CHILLED WATER SYSTEM.
7 SS
8 STATUS
CHW PUMP 1
TE
10 CHR TEMP
TE
11 CHS TEMP
1 SS
2 STATUS
CHS
CHR
CHW PUMP 2
6 SS
5 STATUS
VFD
VFD
CHILLER
CHILLER POINTS LIST
SYSTEM: CHILLED WATER
POINT POINT TYPE
ADDRESS DESCRIPTION DI AI DO AO SI VP REMARKS
1 CHILLER - S/SX
2 CHILLER - STATUS X
3 CHILLER - ALARM/INFO X
4 CHW PUMP 2 - ALARM/INFO X
5 CHW PUMP 2 - STATUS X
6 CHW PUMP 2 - S/SX
7 CHW PUMP 1 - S/S
X
8 CHW PUMP 1 - STATUS X
9 CHW PUMP 1 - ALARM/INFO X
10 CHR TEMPERATURE X
11 CHS TEMPERATURE X
NOTE: POINTS LIST IS NOT ALL INCLUSIVE. THE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ANY ADDITIONAL
POINTS REQUIRED TO PERFORM THE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SPECIFIED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.
9 ALRM/INFO
3 ALRM/INFO
4 ALRM/INFO
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
H2.1
Issued
Rev Date
Description
ME
CH
AN
IC
AL C
ON
TR
OLS
A
ND
SC
HE
DU
LE
- B
AS
E B
ID
MECHANICAL
C154
CORRIDOR
C151
EXISTING CHILLER
EXISTING MANUAL
TRANSFER SWITCH TO
REMAIN AND BE REUSED.
REMOVE 3-#350 MCM & GND. IN 3"
CONDUIT BETWEEN EXISTING
TRANSFER SWITCH AND EXISTING
CHILLER.
EXISTING CLP-1 & 2 TO REMAIN
APPROXIMATE LOCATION
OF EXISTING CHILLER
MAIN DISCONNECT
REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO
CHILLER
EXISTING 5 HP INLINE
CHILLED WATER PUMPS TO
REMAIN
ALL FLEX CONDUIT TO EXISTING CHILLER MAIN
DISCONNECT TO BE REMOVED.
AHU
EXISTING 3 - #350 MCM + GND. IN 3" C. BETWEEN
EXISTING TRANSFER SWITCH AND EXISTING LINE
REACTOR TO REMAIN.
EXISTING 3 #350 MCM THWN
+ GND IN 3"C. TO REMAIN
AND BE REUSED.
MTS
EXISTING MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD MSB
277/480V. 3Ø 4W., 65,000 AMP RMS SYM.,
1600 AMP BUSSING . SIEMENS #FCI SERIES #6
#SO 17-14322-1. (6 DIST. CIRCUIT BREAKERS).
CIRCUIT BREAKER #4 SERVES THE EXISTING
CHILLER @ 300 AMPS, 3 POLE AND SHALL BE
REUSED TO SERVE THE NEW CHILLER.
EXISTING LINE FILTER TO
REMAIN
AT
SA
TS
EXISTING DISTRIBUTION
PANEL E0P2 TO REMAIN.
EXISTING ATS-2
TO REMAIN
EXISTING DISTRIBUTION
PANEL TO REMAIN
EXISTING ATS-1
TO REMAIN
EXISTING PANEL EPP6A TO
REMAIN
EXISTING PANEL EPP4.
EXISTING 40 AMP 3 POLE CIRCUIT
BREAKER 20,22,24 THAT SERVES
EXISTING ACCU TO BE REMOVED
AND REPLACED TO SERVE NEW
ACCU-1.
EXISTING ACCU
REMOVE, PROTECT, AND REUSE
EXISTING LIGHTING PHOTO
CONTROL. EXISTING BRANCH
CIRCUIT TO BE RE-USED.
PROTECT AND RE-USE/ATTACH LIGHTING PHOTO CONTROL AND
LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
EXISTING 120 VOLT
CIRCUIT TO PANEL EPP6A.
DISCONNECT POWER FOR
REMOVAL OF
RECEPTACLE. CONDUIT
AND WIRING TO REMAIN
FOR NEW WORK.
WP
GFCI
DISCONNECT POWER FROM ACCU.
REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED
DISCONNECTS, ETC. SERVING ACCU
TO BE REMOVED.
EXISTING 3 #8 + GND.
IN 3/4" C. TO EXISTING PANEL
EPP4. CCT 20,22,24 40/3. TO
BE REMOVED.
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
ED1.1
Issued
Rev Date
Description
ME
CH
AN
IC
AL R
OO
M A
ND
R
OO
F -
ELE
CT
RIC
AL D
EM
OLIT
IO
N
12" 0 1' 5' 10'
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
MECHANICAL ROOM - DEMOLITION - BASE BID
1
12" 0 1' 5' 10'
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN - DEMOLITION - BASE BID
2
GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS:
1) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE
PROJECT SITE BEFORE SUBMITTING COST PROPOSAL.
2) THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE TO VERIFY DEVICES NOT
SHOWN. ALL DEVICES NEED TO BE REMOVED IN THE DEMOLITION AREA UNLESS
NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.
3) IT IS MANDATORY THAT THE EXISTING BUILDING REMAIN IN CONTINUOUS AND
NON-INTERRUPTED OPERATION DURING REMODELING/ALTERING. SERVICES TO
EXISTING BUILDING SHALL BE KEPT ON CONTINUOUS OPERATION INCLUDING POWER,
LIGHTING, TELEPHONE, FIRE ALARM, ETC. ANY ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY
INTERRUPTION OF THESE SERVICES TO ACCOMPLISH PROJECT CONSTRUCTION,
SHALL BE HELD TO A MINIMUM AND ARRANGED WITH THE OWNER THROUGH THE
GENERAL CONTRACTOR TWO (2) WEEKS IN ADVANCE. TEMPORARY SERVICES SHALL
BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WHERE NECESSARY TO ACCOMPLISH THIS PURPOSE.
TEMPORARIES SHALL BE REMOVED ONLY AFTER NEW PERMANENT SERVICES ARE
INSTALLED AND FULLY OPERATIONAL.
4) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS OWN DEMOLITION,
REMOVAL, CAPPING, STORING, ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING, RELOCATING AND
RECONNECTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. ALL CUTTING,
PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND REFINISHING, SHALL MATCH THE
EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS POSSIBLE.
5) EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DRAWING - "TO BE RETAINED,
RELOCATED" OR HEREINAFTER NOTED, ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND
MATERIAL IN AREAS TO BE REMODELED/ALTERED SHALL BE REMOVED WHERE THEY
INTERFERE WITH PROPOSED NEW CONSTRUCTION AND/OR INTERFERE WITH
PROPOSED USAGE OF SPACE BY OWNER AS FOLLOWS:
A) REMOVE ANY CONDUITS PROTRUDING ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, CAP AND
FINISH OVER WITH FLOOR MATERIAL TO MATCH EXISTING.
B) REMOVE ALL LIGHT FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES, ETC. AND
ASSOCIATED WIRING.REMOVE ALL SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT/BOXES AND
THEIR ASSOCIATED WIRING.
C) REMOVE ALL CONCEALED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND WIRING FROM PARTITIONS
BEING DEMOLISHED.
D) REMOVE ALL EXISTING WIRING/CABLING FROM ALL EXISTING CONCEALED
RACEWAYS IN PARTITION THAT ARE TO REMAIN.
E) ANY FEEDERS, CONDUITS, BRANCH CIRCUITS, SIGNAL AND TELEPHONE
CIRCUITS, ETC. PASSING THROUGH THE REMODELED AREAS TO SERVE (OR BE
SERVED FROM) EXISTING ADJACENT, REMOTE OR SURROUNDING AREAS THAT
ARE TO REMAIN, SHALL BE RETAINED AND KEPT OPERATIONAL AND SHALL BE
REROUTED IN ALL CASES WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH ANY NEW WORK OR
USAGE TO BE ACCOMPLISHED IN THE REMODELED AREA.
F) WHERE DEVICES ARE OMITTED FROM PRESENT BRANCH CIRCUITS, THE
REMAINING DEVICES SHALL BE REWIRED, IF NEEDED AND AS REQUIRED, TO
REMAIN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE CIRCUITS AND IN OPERATING CONDITION.
6) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS TO
FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH EXTENT OF ALTERATION/REMODELING WORK AND MORE
SPECIFICALLY NOTE WHERE NEW PARTITIONING IS BEING INSTALLED, WHERE
EXISTING PARTITIONING IS BEING REMOVED, WHERE CEILINGS ARE BEING REMOVED
AND OR REPLACED, ETC.
7) ALL WIRING (POWER, LIGHTING) NOT REUSED FOR REMODELING AREAS SHALL BE
COMPLETELY REMOVED BACK TO ASSOCIATED PANELS. EMPTY BOXES AND
CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED BEYOND REMODELED AREA (ABOVE CEILING).
8) THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE "RIGHT-OF-REFUSAL" OF ALL REMOVED ITEMS. ITEMS
SELECTED NOT TO BE RETAINED BY THE OWNER SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE
JOBSITE AND DISPOSED OFFSITE AS QUICKLY AS POSSIBLE.
MECHANICAL
C154
CORRIDOR
C151
CH
1
AHU
AT
SA
TS
J
J
EXISTING 3 #350 MCM
THWN + GND IN 3"C.
TO REMAIN AND BE
REUSED.
EXISTING DISTRIBUTION
PANEL E0P2 TO REMAIN.
EXISTING MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD
MSB. 277/480V. 3Ø 4W., 65,000 AMP RMS SYM.,
1600 AMP BUSSING . SIEMENS #FCI SERIES #6
#SO 17-14322-1. (6 DIST. CIRCUIT BREAKERS).
CIRCUIT BREAKER #4 SERVES THE EXISTING
CHILLER @ 300 AMPS, 3 POLE AND SHALL BE
REUSED TO SERVE THE NEW CHILLER.
EXISTING CLP-2 TO REMAIN
5 HP 480V. 3Ø.
EXISTING CLP-1 TO REMAIN
5 HP 480V. 3Ø.
EXISTING 3 - #10 + GND IN
3/4"C. TO REMAIN.
EXISTING PANEL EPP4
EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKER
20,22,24 40 AMP 3 POLE THAT
SERVES EXISTING ACCU TO BE
REPLACED WITH 70 AMP 3 POLE
BREAKER TO SERVE NEW
ACCU-1.
EXISTING ATS-2
TO REMAIN
EXISTING DISTRIBUTION
PANEL TO REMAIN
EXISTING ATS-1
TO REMAIN
MTS
EXISTING NEW VFD'S
TO REMAIN
RM
EXISTING REFRIGERANT
MONITOR ABOVE STARTERS
AND VFD'S TO REMAIN.
EXISTING MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH 400 AMP.
480V. 3Ø TO REMAIN AND BE REUSED.
NEW CHILLER
MCA = 195 AMPS; MOCP = 250 AMPS
480V. 3Ø.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO NEW CHILLER.
SINGLE POINT CONNECTION IN CHILLER CONTROL
PANEL. MAIN OVERCURRENT AND MAIN FUSED
DISCONNECT IN CONTROL PANEL. COORDINATE
EXACT LOCATION.
EXISTING PANEL EPP6A TO REMAIN
EXISTING 3 - #350 MCM + GND. IN 3" C. BETWEEN
EXISTING TRANSFER SWITCH AND NEW CHILLER.
EXISTING LINE FILTER TO
BE REUSED
NEW (3) #350 KCMIL+ (1) #4
GND. IN 3" C. BETWEEN
EXISTING TRANSFER SWITCH
AND NEW CHILLER.
ACCU
1
NEW ACCU-1
MCA = 56 AMPS; MOP = 70 AMPS
480V. 3Ø.
EXTEND EXISTING 120
VOLT CIRCUIT FROM
EXISTING PANEL EPP6A
TO NEW RECEPTACLE.
NEW (3) #4 + (1) #8 GND.
IN 1" RGS C. TO EXISTING
PANEL EPP4 70A/3P CCT
20,22,24.
WP
GFCI FIELD VERIFY LOCATION OF
ACCU-1'S ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION.
HEAVY DUTY BONDING
PLATE FASTEN TO ACCU
REINSTALL THE EXISTING LIGHTING
PHOTO CONTROL. EXTEND EXISTING
BRANCH CIRCUIT AND EXISTING CONDUIT.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
POINTS TYPICAL(2).
RELOCATE EXISTING
POINTS IF SIZED
APPROPRIATELY, FIELD
VERIFY.
EXISTING DOWN CONDUCTOR AND
3/4" X 10' - 0" COPPER GROUND ROD.
EXISTING HEAVY DUTY GROUND ROD
CLAMP. TYPICAL.
ROUTE LIGHTNING PROTECTION CABLE
ON ROOF. SECURE WITH ADHESIVE
CABLE HOLDERS. EXTEND AS
NECESSARY TO LOCATION OF NEW
UNIT.
EXISTING LIGHTNING
PROTECTION CABLE TO
GROUND ROD AT GRADE.
EXISTING DOWN CONDUCTOR IN 1"
PVC CONDUIT TO GROUND. SECURE
TO BUILDING. TYPICAL.
100A DISC.
PROVIDE IF
NOT INCLUDED
BY
MANUFACTURER
140 E. Washington Street
East Peoria, Illinois 61611
309.222.8600
www.mweainc.com
IL Design Firm Reg. No.
184-005896
Midwest Engineering
Inc.Associates,
MW
PROJECT NUMBER
SHEET REFERENCE NUMBER
Designed:
Drawn:
Checked:
Approved:
20180141
SU
RS
C
HILLE
R R
EP
LA
CE
ME
NT
ST
AT
E U
NIV
ER
SIT
IE
S
RE
TIR
EM
EN
T S
YS
TE
M
CH
AM
PA
IG
N, IL, 61825
E1.1
Issued
Rev Date
Description
ME
CH
AN
IC
AL R
OO
M A
ND
R
OO
F -
ELE
CT
RIC
AL N
EW
W
OR
K
12" 0 1' 5' 10'
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
MECHANICAL ROOM - NEW WORK - BASE BID
1
12" 0 1' 5' 10'
SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"
ROOF PLAN - NEW WORK - BASE BID
2
ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LIST
DESCRIPTION
DISCONNECT SWITCH
COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH
MOTOR WITH DESIGNATION
JUNCTION BOX
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
DUPLEX OUTLET SPECIFICATION GRADE 120V 20A GROUND FAULT TYPE
BRANCH PANEL
DUPLEX OUTLET SPECIFICATION GRADE 120V 20A IN USE WEATHERPROOF COVER
SYMBOL
J
ATS
WP
GFCI
GENERAL NOTES:
1) ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE GROUND CONDUCTORS.
2) THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE, IF REQUIRED, ADJUSTMENTS (±) 6'-0" IN THE LOCATION OF ALL SYSTEM
DEVICES, FIXTURES, OUTLETS, PANELS, ETC. IN ORDER TO EXPEDITE THE ELECTRICAL WORK. THE POSITION OF ALL WORK
AS SHOWN IS INTENDED TO BE FIXED AND IN THE PROPER LOCATION. SUCH REQUIRED ADJUSTMENT SHALL BE
DETERMINED BY THE A/E.
3) PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PHASE CONDUCTOR.
4) WHERE NEW DEVICES ARE SHOWN THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL THE CUTTING. THE GENERAL
CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL PATCHING AND PAINTING OF EXISTING WALLS. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL
FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION. WHERE POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MAY USE
EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT BUT NEW CIRCUIT WIRING WILL NEED TO BE PULLED.
5) CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING THE INTEGRITY OF THE EXISTING ROOF. ALL NEW CONDUIT
PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SEALED, AND EXISTING PENETRATIONS TO BE DEMOLISHED SHALL BE PATCHED.
6) CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL REQUIREMENTS FOR A FULLY FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM.
MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH
MTS
CHILLER ONE LINE POWER DIAGRAM - BASE BID
3
NO SCALE
EXISTING MAIN DISTRIBUTION
SWITCHBOARD MSB
EXISTING MANUAL
TRANSFER SWITCH
FLOOR
TVSS
EXISTING CONDUIT/CONDUCTOR
FEEDER TO REMAIN
EXIST.
300/3
EXISTING GENERATOR
& OVER-CURRENT
PROTECTION
EXISTING 3#-350 MCM +
GND IN 3"C. TO CHILLER.
EXISTING SURGE PROTECTIVE
DEVICE 100 KA EQUAL TO SQUARE D
#HWA SPD. MOUNT NEAR CHILLER
POWER CONNECTION. PROVIDE
NOISE REJECTION. FIELD VERIFY.
COORDINATE NEW ELECTRICAL DEVICES WITH MANUFACTURER. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS.
ALL LIGHTNING PROTECTION WORK SHALL
BE INSTALLED PER NFPA 780, AS MANUFACTURED
BY THOMPSON LIGHTNING INC. CONDUCTOR 24-STRAND #14 GAUGE
REFRIGERANT MONITOR.
RM
EXISTING 200 HORSEPOWER 250
AMP LINE FILTER NEMA TYPE 1
EQUAL TO SQUARE D #HG200
AWO 1ST, HG7. APPROX. 70"H X
20"D X 20"W. FIELD VERIFY.
400 AMP 277/480V 3Ø S/N FUSED
DISCONNECT SWITCH FUSED AT 225 AMPS
INSIDE CHILLER CONTROL PANEL. BOTH
BASE BID AND ALTERNATE BID.
NEW CHILLER
SINGLE POINT
CONNECTION
NEW (3) 350 KCMIL
+ (1) #4 GND IN 3"C.
KEYED NOTES:
1) EXISTING PANEL EPP4 HAS NOT BEEN FIELD VERIFIED. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THE EXISTING PANEL
WILL CARY THE ADDITIONAL LOAD AND THE 70A/3P BREAKER WILL BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE EXISTING PANEL. FIELD
VERIFY PRIOR TO BID AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CHANGES NECESSARY PRIOR TO BID.